24i & 96i user and feature guide

24i & 96i user and feature guide
ISDN BUSINESS
ESS COMMU
MMUNICATION SYSTEM
Software Manua
anual
Issue 2-0 (April, 1999 )
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a
warranty of, or representation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is
subject to change without notice and Nitsuko has no obligation to provide any updates or
corrections to this manual. Further, Nitsuko also reserves the right, without prior notice, to
make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is
made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and Nitsuko shall not be liable for
any errors or omissions. In no event shall Nitsuko be liable for any incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the use of this manual. No part of this document may be
photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of Nitsuko.
ã 1999 by Nitsuko Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Japan
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Features
Page
Introduction ..............................................................................................1
Abbreviated Dialing ................................................................................27
Account Code (Optional / Forced)..........................................................34
Alarm Clock............................................................................................38
Alphanumeric Display.............................................................................42
Audio Communication Interface (ACI) ....................................................45
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA (VAU) ....................................51
Automatic Repeat Dialing.......................................................................62
BGM (Background Music) ......................................................................65
Break-In..................................................................................................68
Caller-ID .................................................................................................72
Call Forward ...........................................................................................73
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU) ..........................................79
Call Pickup .............................................................................................87
Call Timer ...............................................................................................94
Camp-On................................................................................................96
Class of Service ...................................................................................104
Condition Guidance Message (VAU).................................................... 114
Conference........................................................................................... 116
Continued Dialing.................................................................................120
CTI Capability.......................................................................................124
Data Communication Interface (DCI) ...................................................125
Data Privacy.........................................................................................146
Dial Block .............................................................................................149
DID Capability ......................................................................................153
Direct Inward Line (DIL) .......................................................................160
Directory Dialing ...................................................................................165
Direct Station Selection ........................................................................166
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns) .........................................167
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) ...................................................171
DLS Console ........................................................................................184
Do Not Disturb......................................................................................188
Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override..................................................192
i
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Features
Page
Door Lock Control ................................................................................195
Doorphone ...........................................................................................197
DSS Console........................................................................................201
Dual Line Appearance..........................................................................208
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) .............................................................209
External Alarm Sensor .........................................................................216
External Call Forward...........................................................................219
External Music On Hold........................................................................223
Flash ....................................................................................................225
Flexible System Numbering .................................................................228
Follow Me.............................................................................................232
Forced Trunk Disconnection.................................................................236
General Message (VAU) ......................................................................239
Group Hunt...........................................................................................244
Group Listening ...................................................................................251
Group Step Calling ...............................................................................253
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone).....................................................256
Headset Operation ...............................................................................258
Hold......................................................................................................262
Hot Line................................................................................................272
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) .........................................................277
Intercom ...............................................................................................293
Intercom Abandoned Call Display ........................................................299
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling ................................................................301
ISDN Capability (Euro) .........................................................................305
Key Touch Tone....................................................................................306
Last Number Dialing.............................................................................308
LCR (Least Cost Routing) .................................................................... 311
Line Preference....................................................................................315
Long Conversation Cutoff.....................................................................322
Long Conversation Warning .................................................................325
Meet Me Paging Answer ......................................................................328
Meet Me Paging Conference................................................................332
ii
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Features
Page
Meet Me Paging Transfer.....................................................................336
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU) .......................341
Memo Dial ............................................................................................354
Message Waiting..................................................................................357
Music On Hold......................................................................................363
Name Storing (Trunk & Station) ...........................................................366
Night Service (Manual / Auto) ..............................................................370
One-Touch Dialing................................................................................377
One-Touch Serial Operation.................................................................381
Paging ..................................................................................................384
Park Hold .............................................................................................393
PBX Compatibility.................................................................................398
PC Attendant........................................................................................404
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) ..................................406
PC Programming (Remote Maintenance) ............................................419
Preamble Message (VAU)....................................................................420
Preview Dial .........................................................................................425
Prime Line Selection ............................................................................427
Privacy Release (Meet Me Conference)...............................................432
Private Line ..........................................................................................435
Programmable Function Key................................................................439
Pulse to Tone Conversion ....................................................................442
Room Monitor.......................................................................................444
Saved Last Number Dialing..................................................................448
Secretary Call (Buzzer) ........................................................................451
Secretary Call Pickup ...........................................................................454
Selectable Ring Tone ...........................................................................456
Series Call............................................................................................459
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .........................................461
Text Message ......................................................................................470
Time and Date......................................................................................474
Toll Restriction......................................................................................477
Toll Restriction Override .......................................................................487
iii
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Features
Page
Transfer ................................................................................................490
Trunk Incoming Call .............................................................................496
Trunk Line Group .................................................................................502
Trunk Outgoing Call .............................................................................506
Trunk Port Disable................................................................................514
Unsupervised Conference....................................................................516
VAU Fixed Message (VAU) ..................................................................522
Virtual Extension ..................................................................................523
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) ...................................................526
Voice Over............................................................................................534
Volume Control.....................................................................................538
Walking Toll Restriction ........................................................................539
iv
RECORD OF REVISION
Revision No.
Date
Description of Change
DX2E-001
Mar. ‘95
Initial Release
2-0
Apr. '99
Renewal Issue for “2.2A” version
v
Introduction
Before Reading This Section
This section provides detailed information on the system's features. If you don't know what
the various features are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual's
Index. After reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.
Using This Section
The features in this section are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This section
subdivides each feature definition into heading as follows:
Description tells what the feature is and describes its benefits. Along with the Description
are the Conditions and the Default Setting. Conditions provide the feature's operational
limits (if any). Default Setting outlines how the feature works with the default
programming. When initially installed, the system uses the default setting.
Programming explains the system programming that lets you customize the feature.
Most of customization cases to the features, they require programming. If you decide to
customize the features, refer to “Programming” flow.
Related Features presents the feature interaction.
Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature.
--Read These Notes-Programmable Keys...
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar to
(PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1050). This means that the key requires function code 1050, and
you can program this code through Program 1006 or by dialing Service Code 851.
Refer to the “Programmable function key” feature for more information.
Using Handsfree...
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just press a
trunk line key or CL key to answer or place a call. For extensions without Automatic
Handsfree, the user must:
- Lift the handset or press SPK, for Intercom dial tone.
- Lift the handset or press SPK, then press a trunk line key for Trunk dial tone.
¾ 1 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 1 of 6)
Service Code...
#*#*(
9(
)
)
When you are...
For this feature...
Entering the system Programming
mode
System Programming
Password Protection
Placing a call using Trunk Line Group
Routing
Trunk Outgoing Call
Also see
Function Key...
—
1011
700(
)
Change toll restriction class of
extension by Dial Block
Dial Block
—
701(
)
Set Dial Block by Supervisor
Dial Block by
Supervisor
—
711(
)
Listen General Message (VAU)
General Message Play
Back
—
712(
)
Record and Erase General Message
(VAU)
General Message
Erase and Record
—
713(
)
Set Call Forward with personal greeting Call Forward with
(VAU)
Personal Greeting
—
714(
)
Leave telephone number from
DUD/DISA caller (VAU)
Leave Telephone
Number from
DUD/DISA
—
715(
)
Pick up extension’s ring
Direct Extension
Pickup
—
716(
)
Control VAU Message (VAU)
Operation for VAU
Message
—
717(
)
Access voice mail (NVM-series)
Voice Mail Access
—
720(
)
Canceling of several features
* Note 1
—
721(
)
Output accumulated data per extension Printout Accumulated
base (SMDR)
Extension Data
—
722(
)
Output accumulated data per station
group base(SMDR)
Printout Accumulated
STG Data
—
723(
)
Output accumulated data per account
code base (SMDR)
Printout Accumulated
Account Code Data
—
724(
)
Forced disconnecting of busy trunk
Forced Trunk
Disconnect
—
725(
)
Answer machine emulation (NVMseries)
Answer Machine
Emulation
—
726(
)
Set Message Waiting 2
Set MW2
—
743(
)
Check the number left (VAU)
Check Leave Number
—
Note 1: Alarm Clock, Call Forward, DND, Headset Operation, Message Waiting, Automatic
Repeat Dialing and Text Message.
¾ 2 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 2 of 6)
Service
Code...
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
745(
)
Disabling for trouble trunk
Trunk Port Disable
—
746(
)
Edit Caller-ID table data
Edit Caller-ID Table
Data
—
747(
)
Indicate Caller-ID table
Indicate Caller-ID Table
1084
748(
)
Check missed (abandoned) call
Check Missed Call
1085
750(
)
Withdraw from Station Group
STG Withdraw
1074
751(
)
Make Combine paging to external zone
and internal zone
Paging Combine
—
752(
)
Enter personal code
Personal Code
—
754(
)
Set conversation record from SLT
(NVM-series)
Conversation Record
from SLT
—
761(
)
Set personal speed dial
Personal Speed Dial
—
763(
)
Set Walking Toll Restriction
Walking Toll Restriction
—
770(
)
Set SLT room monitor
SLT Room Monitor
—
771(
)
Display the charged cost by Supervisor
phone
Charge Cost Display
—
772(
)
Answer the specific trunk line
Specified Trunk
Answer
—
773(
)
Set station park hold
Station Park Hold
—
780(
)
Set the mode for all-member to ring in
station group
STG All Ring Mode
—
800(
)
Extension names program
Name Storing
—
801(
)
Making an Internal Page
Paging, Internal
802(
)
Door-phone access
Door phone
803(
zone
803(
)+
External group (zone) paging External
all paging
Paging, External
804(
) + 0-9
00-16
Placing an outside call over a Trunk
Line group
Trunk Outgoing Call
1012 + 0-9
00-16
805(
)
Placing a call over a specific Trunk Line Trunk Outgoing Call
access
0001-0128
806(
)
Flashing to Trunk Line from a S.L.T
Flash
807(
)
Activating Do Not Disturb and Call
Forward (Bypass call)
DND/FWD override
(Bypass call)
1006
—
1004
1005
)+0
¾ 3 ¾
—
1022
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 3 of 6)
Service Code...
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
808(
)
Step Calling through a Department
Group
Group Hunt
1021
809(
)
Sending voice over to busy extension
or send off-hook signal
Voice Over / Intercom
Off-hook Signaling
1018
810(
)
Break in on an extensions call
Break in
1019
811(
)
Listening to the incoming ring choices
Check of ringing tone
—
812(
)
Switching the way your extension
signals the extension you are calling
Intercom
—
813(
) + bin
Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing
number
1037
Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing
number
Abbreviated Dialing
1038
(000-199)
814(
) + bin
(00-19)
815(
)
Saving a number or dialing a saved
number
Saved number redial
1014
816(
)
Activating Last Number Dialing
Last Number Dialing
—
817(
)
Setting modem outgoing parameters
818(
818(
818(
818(
)+P+0
)+P+1
)+P+2
)+P+3
Activating Day Mode
Activating Night Mode
Activating Midnight Mode
Activating Rest Mode
Night Service
820(
)
Switching Trunk Line incoming ring
tones
Selectable Ring Tones
821(
)
Incoming intercom called mode setting Intercom Talkback/
to voice announce
Forced Intercom
Ringing
—
823(
)
Incoming intercom called mode setting Intercom Talkback/
to signal call
Forced Intercom
Ringing
—
824(
)
Enabling/disabling Key Touch Tone
Key Touch Tone
—
825(
)
Turning Background Music on and off
Background Music
—
826(
)
Activating Conference from a S.L.T
Conference
Setting or cancel an alarm
External Alarm Sensor
827(
)+
1 or 2 + time
Note: "P" is user password.
¾ 4 ¾
—
—
1039 + P
1040 + P
1041 + P
1042 + P
—
1016
—
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 4 of 6)
Service Code...
When you are...
For this feature...
828(
)+P
Setting the system Time and Date
831(
) + 1-8
Parking a call in a system Park orbit (1- Park Hold
8)
1033
834(
)
Switching from headset to handset
mode and visa versa
Headset Operation
1028
836(
)
Activating Text Message
Text Message
1027
840(
)
Deleting the system alarm message
841(
)
Leaving a Message Waiting
Message Waiting
1023
842(
)
Activating Call Forward-dual ring
Call Forward
1000
843(
)
Activating transfer Busy
Call Forward
1002
845(
)
Activating Unanswered call transfer
Call Forward
1003
846(
)
Activating Follow Me at the destination
extension
Follow Me
1001
847(
)
Activating Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
848(
)
Activating Call forward
Call Forward
849(
)
Enabled on hook when holding
Hold
850(
)
Camping On or leaving a Callback for a Camp On/Callback
busy extension or Trunk Line
- Extension
- Trunk
851(
)
Switching the function of a
programmable key
Programmable
Function Key
852(
)
Accessing One-Touch Key Serial
Operation store and delete functions
One-Touch Serial
Operation
853(
)
Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
Abbreviated Dialing
—
854(
)
Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
Abbreviated Dialing
—
855(
)
Programming a One-Touch Key
One-Touch Dialing
—
856(
)
Answering a call ringing specified
extension in pickup group
Call Pickup
—
859(
)
Answer on hook when holding
Hold
861(
) + 1-8
Pickup a call parked in a system Park
orbit (1-8)
Park Hold
862(
)
Picking up a call from Group Hold
Hold
Note: "P" is user password.
¾ 5 ¾
Time and Date
Also see
Function Key...
—
—
1055
1020
—
1034
1033
—
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 5 of 6)
Service Code...
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
863(
)
Joining a Meet Me Page on an Internal
Paging Group (if your extension is in
the group called)
Meet Me Paging
—
864(
)
Joining a Meet Me Page if your
extension is not in the group paged
Meet Me Paging
—
865(
)
Joining an External Paging Group
Meet Me Paging
—
867(
)
Answering a call ringing another phone Call Pickup
in another pickup group
1007
868(
)
Answering a call ringing a phone in
another pickup group
Call Pickup
1009
869(
)
Answering a call ringing a phone in
Call Pickup
another pickup group (if you don't know
the group's number)
1008
870(
)
Canceling a Camp On/Callback request Camp On/Callback
- Extension
- Trunk
871(
)
Canceling Message Waiting you have
left at a specific extension
872(
)
Answering for non ringing Trunk line by
SLT
873(
)
Canceling all Message Waiting you
have left at other extensions
Message Waiting
—
875(
)+P
Temporality overriding an extension's
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction
Override
—
876(
)
Canceling number saved by Last
Number Dialing
Last Number Dialing
—
880(
)
Initializing the DCI
Data Communications
Interface
—
Note: "P" is user password.
¾ 6 ¾
Message Waiting
—
—
—
—
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-1, Service Codes by Number (Page 6 of 6)
Service Code...
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
881(
)+P
Switching the Music on Hold Tone
Music on Hold
—
883(
)
Enabling the DCI auto answer mode
Data Communications
Interface
—
884(
)
Disconnecting an active data call
Data Communications
Interface
—
885(
)
Canceling the number saved by Saved
Number Redial
Save Number Redial
—
891(
)
Account Code
Account Code
892(
)
Forcing Override with voice-announce
to your phone
Voice Over
—
893(
)
Forcing Override to ring your phone
Intercom Off-hook
Signaling
—
894(
)
Answering a Call waiting calling
Camp On/Callback
- Extension
899(
)
Testing the operation of S.L.T
1054
—
—
Saving and erasing a number or dialing Memo dialing
a memo number
1015
—
Privacy release of talking Trunk line
Privacy Release
(Meet-me conference)
1017
—
Setting the monitored and monitoring
extension number for Room monitor
Room monitor
1025
—
Activating and off for handset
transmission
—
Answering and disconnecting for data
call
Data
1029
—
Buzzer the secretary extension
Secretary call (Buzzer)
1031
—
Activating Executive's call forward
Secretary call pickup
1032
—
Activating series call
Series call
1035
—
Incoming and answering to Virtual
extension call
Virtual extension
1036
—
Holding and picking up a call
Hold
1043
—
Holding and picking up a call in an
exclusive hold
Exclusive hold
1044
—
Calling programmed extension
DSS key
1058
—
1026
Note: "P" is user password.
For function key number 1059-1065, 1067-1071, 1073, 1082, 1083 and 1086 those which don’t
have “Service Code”, refer to Table 1-4 (Page 11 of 13).
¾ 7 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table l-2, System Number Plan (Page 1 of 2)
Trunk Port Numbers .................................................................................. ...........................01-52
Trunk Group Numbers............................................................................... ...........................01-16
Telephone Extension Port numbers .......................................................... ...........................01-72
Telephone Extension Number Range .......................................................(Default) .........100-699
Virtual Extension Port Numbers ................................................................(Default) .............73-96
Virtual Extension Number Range ..............................................................(Default) .........100-699
Operator Access Number ..........................................................................(Default) .................... 0
DCI Port Number ....................................................................................... ...........................01-72
DCI Extension Number Range ..................................................................(Default) .........100-699
DCI Pooling Group numbers ..................................................................... ...............................1-8
DCI Pooling Group Extension Number Range ..........................................(Default) .........100-699
ACI Port Numbers ..................................................................................... ...............................1-6
ACI Extension Number Range ..................................................................(Default) .........100-699
Department/Extension Group Numbers .................................................... ...............................1-8
Department/Extension Group Extension Number Range .........................(Default) .........100-699
Ring Group Numbers................................................................................. ...........................01-16
Doorphone Numbers ................................................................................. ...............................1-8
Call Pickup Group Numbers ...................................................................... ...............................1-8
Internal Page Group Numbers .................................................................. ...............................1-8
External Page Group Numbers ................................................................. ...............................1-8
Park Group Numbers ................................................................................ ...............................1-8
User Password for Setting Time and Date ................................................(Default) .............. 0000
User Password for Setting Music on Hold tone.........................................(Default) .............. 0000
User Password for Setting Night Service ..................................................(Default) .............. 0000
¾ 8 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-2, System Number Plan (Page 2 of 2)
Programming Passwords
Level 2 (IN) .................................................................................12345678
Level 3 (SA) .........................................................................................0000
Level 4 (SB) .........................................................................................9999
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (not to exceed 400).
These devices share the same pool of extension numbers. Extension numbers cannot overlap.
Extension numbers can be three or four digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.
¾ 9 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-3, System Tones (Page 1 of 2)
Tone
Repetitions
Frequency
Level
Extension Dial Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
250 mS Off - 250 mS On
Special Dial Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
10 mS Off - 90 mS On
Transfer Dial Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
120 mS Off - 120 mS On
Busy Tone,
Busy Tone (terminated),
Congestion Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
500 mS Off - 500 mS On
DND Busy Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
200 mS Off, 200 mS On
Warning Tone
Continues
400 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Ringback Tone
Continues
580 Hz
-19 dB
1 Sec On, 2 Sec Off
Override Tone
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Lock-out Tone
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Clock Alarm Tone
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS On, 100 mS Off,
100 mS On, 700 mS Off
Doorphone Ring 1
3
Variable: 660 Hz at -10 dB for 200 mS, 660 Hz at
-16 dB for 200 mS, 520 Hz at -10 dB for 300 mS,
520 Hz at -16 dB for 400 mS, 520 Hz at -22 dB for
600 mS, 500 mS quiet
Doorphone Ring 2
3
Variable: 880 Hz at -10 dB for 200 mS, 880 Hz at
-16 dB for 200 mS, 700 Hz at -10 dB for 300 mS,
700 Hz at -16 dB for 400 mS, 700 Hz at -22 dB for
600 mS, 500 mS quiet
Doorphone Ring 3
3
Variable: 1050 Hz at -10 dB for 200 mS, 1050 Hz at
-16 dB for 200 mS, 700 Hz at -10 dB for 300 mS,
700 Hz at -16 dB for 400 mS, 700 Hz at -22 dB for
600 mS, 500 mS quiet
Service Set Tone,
Service Clear Tone,
Speaker Monitor Tone,
Door Relay Tone,
Door Call Tone,
Splash Tone 1
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Talk Back Tone,
Paging Tone,
Splash Tone 2
2
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Splash Tone 3
3
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
1 Second Signal Tone
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
1 Second On
Confirmation Tone
¾ 10 ¾
Pattern
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-3, System Tones (Page 2 of 2)
Tone
Repetitions
Frequency
Level
Sensor Alarm Tone 1
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
200 mS On, 200 mS Off
Sensor Alarm Tone 2
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
500 mS On, 500 mS Off
Sensor Alarm Tone 3
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
700 mS On, 700 mS Off
Sensor Alarm Tone 4
Continues
800 Hz
-13 dB
1 Sec On, 1 Sec Off
Transfer and Call Waiting
Tone
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS On
Intrusion Tone
1
520 Hz
-13 dB
800 mS On
DUD, DISA Dial Tone
Key Touch Tone
Continues
1
Pattern
Variable: 400 Hz at -16 dB for 100 mS, then 520 Hz
at -16 dB for 100 mS
438 Hz
—
50 mS
Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 1 Combination of...
High: 1032 Hz + 865 Hz + 16 Hz
Mid: 582 Hz + 416 Hz + 16 Hz
Low: 421 Hz + 360 Hz + 16 Hz
See Table 1-4
Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 2 Combination of...
High: 2667 Hz + 2000 Hz + 8 Hz
Mid: 2000 Hz + 1600 Hz + 8 Hz
Low: 1455 Hz + 1185 Hz + 8 Hz
See Table 1-4
Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 3 Combination of..
High: 1778 Hz + 1333 Hz + 24 Hz
Mid: 889 Hz +711 Hz + 24 Hz
Low: 438 Hz + 360 Hz + 24 Hz
See Table 1-4
Trunk Line Ring Tone Range 4 Combination of...
High: 2462 Hz + 2286 Hz + 25 Hz
Mid: 2000 Hz + 1882 Hz + 25 Hz
Low: 1524 Hz + 1455 Hz + 25 Hz
See Table 1-4
Incoming Ring Tone Range
Combination of...
High: 800 Hz + 1032 Hz + 12 Hz
Mid: 604 Hz + 865 Hz + 12 Hz
Low: 400 Hz + 640 Hz + 12 Hz
See Table 1-4
Alarm Sensor Ring Tone
Range
Combination of...
High: 880 Hz + 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Mid: 800 Hz + 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Low: 800 Hz + 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
See Table 1-4
¾ 11 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 1 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
When...
(Idle telephone)
Date and Time
Ext No.
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and on hook
(Idle telephone)
CHECK
You press CHECK to check a function
CHECK(ext No.) (ext name)
PORT nnn GP-nn
You press CHECK and CL 1 to check
extension information, where (ext) is the
extension number, (ext name) is the extension
name, PORT nn is the port number and GP-nn
is the extension group
SET ABB: COMMON
You dial Service Code 853 to store a Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
SET ABB: GROUP
You dial Service Code 854 to store a Group
Abbreviated Dialing number
(Idle telephone)
Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing
ABB (bin)
(digits)
You are storing Abbreviated Dialing numbers,
where (bin) is the bin number and (digits) is the
current stored number (if any)
Abbreviated Dialing Time and Date
ABB:COMMON
You press CL and DC to dial a Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
Abbreviated Dialing Time and Date
You press CL and DC to dial a Group
Abbreviated Dialing number
ABB:GROUP
Abbreviated Dialing (trk name)
(digits)
HH:MM:SS
(bin name)
You place a call using Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing PREVIEW
ABB:COMMON or
GROUP
You press DC to preview an Abbreviated
Dialing entry, where COMMON or GROUP
displays depending on the DC key setting
Abbreviated Dialing
You press DC and select a bin before outgoing
Abbreviated Dialing number, where (bin name)
is the programmed name, (bin) is the bin
number and (digits) is the stored number
PREVIEW (bin name)
ABB: (bin) (digits)
¾ 12 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 2 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
Abbreviated Dialing
CHECK
ABB(xxxx)
Abbreviated Dialing
CHECK
ABB(xxxx)
(name)
(digits)
When...
You press CHECK and DC to check a stored
Abbreviated Dialing bin, where (bin name) is
the bin name, (xxxx) is GROUP or COMMON
depending on the DC key setup
You press CHECK, DC and dial a bin number
to check an Abbreviated Dialing entry, where
(name) is the bin name, (xxxx) is the bin
type/number and (digits) is the stored number
Alarm Clock
Date and Time
Ext No.
ALARM n
Your extension is idle, after setting Alarm n
(1 or 2)
Alarm Clock
SET n ALARM
HH:MM am or pm
You set an alarm time but do not hang up
Alarm Clock
SET n ALARM
You dial 827, 1 or 2 to select an alarm type then
9999 to cancel
CANCEL
Alarm Clock
SET ALARM
1: ALARM 1 2: ALARM 2
You dial 827 to set an alarm
Alarm Clock
ALARM n
You press CHECK, dial 827, then 1 or 2 to
check your alarm setting
HH:MM am or
pm (digits)
Background Music
Time and Date
B.G.M. ON
You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background
Music on
Background Music
Time and Date
B.G.M. OFF
You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background
Music off
Break In
BREAK IN
(ext name) (ext name)
You have Break-In (speech mode) on a coworker's Intercom call
Break In
(trk name)
(ext name)
BREAK IN
You have Break-In (speech mode) on a coworker's Outside call
MONITOR
(ext name) (ext name)
You have Break-In (monitor mode) on a coworker's Intercom call
Break In
Break In
(trk name)
(ext name)
MONITOR
You have Break-In (monitor mode) on a coworker's Outside call
¾ 13 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 3 of 13)
With this feature
Call Forward
You'll see this display...
When...
Time and Date
FWD
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forward (Service Code 848).
Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
FWD-DUAL
(name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forward dual Ring (Service Code
842). Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
TRNS-NA
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Unanswered Call Transfer (Service
Code 845). Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
TRNS-BUSY
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Busy Transfer (Service Code 843).
Name shows destination extension.
Call Forward
SET DUAL RING
1: SET 0: CANCEL
You dial Service Code 842 to enable Call
Forward Dual Ringing
Call Forward
SET BUSY TRANSFER
1: SET 0: CANCEL
You dial Service Code 842 to enable Busy
Transfer
Call Forward
SET NO ANS TRANSFER
1: SET 0: CANCEL
You dial Service Code 845 to enable
Unanswered Call Transfer
Call Forward
SET FORWARD
1: SET 0: CANCEL
You dial Service Code 848 to enable Call
Forward
ICM DIAL
You dial 1 to set Call Forward. System asks
you to enter the destination extension number.
Call Forward
Call Forward
Call Forward
Call Forward
Call Forward
CANCEL
You dial a Call Forward Service Code and 0 to
cancel Call Forward
Call Pickup
Time and Date
CALL P/U
(ext name)
You have intercepted a call using Call Pickup
Call Pickup
(trk name)
CALL P/U
(HH:MM:SS)
(ext name)
You use Call Pickup to intercept a call ringing a
phone in a pickup group
Call Timer
(trk name)
HH:MM:SS
(digits)
You place an outside call and the Call Timer
starts (HH:MM)
¾ 14 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 4 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
When...
Camp On/Callback
- Extension
Time and Date
CAMP-ON
(ext name)
You have 850 to camp-on to a busy extension.
Name shows the destination extension.
Camp On/Callback
Time and date
CAMP CANCEL
You have dialed 870 to cancel a Camp- On or
Callback
Camp On/Callback
Time and Date
CALL-BACK
(ext name)
Extension at which you left a Callback (shown
in the name field) is calling you back
Camp on/Callback
Trunk Line
(trk name)
CALL BACK
The trunk you queued for is calling you back
Camp-On Trunk
line
Time and Date
CAMP LINE
You have queued for a busy trunk
Conference
CONF
ICM DIAL
Conference
(name)
(name)
Dial Block
Time and Date
DIAL BLOCK
You blocking dial for your extension
Dial Number
Preview
PREVIEW DIAL
You use Preview Dial to preview your call
before dialing it out
Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
Console
CONF
(name)
You press the Conference key to initiate a
Conference
DIAL (digits)
Time and Date
OFF DUTY
You have set up a Conference, where (name)
is either an extension or trunk name
You press ALT to activate Alternate Answering
Do Not Disturb
Time and Date
DND INTERCOM
You press DND and dial 2 to activate DND for
Intercom and transferred trunks
Do Not Disturb
Time and Date
DND ALL
You press DND and dial 3 to activate DND for
all calls
Do Not Disturb
Time and Date
DND TRANSFER
You press DND and dial 4 to activate DND for
incoming Call Forwards
SET DND
You press DND to start DND activation
procedure
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
SET DND
CANCEL
Do Not Disturb
Time and Date
DND EXTERNAL
You press DND and dial 0 to cancel Do Not
Disturb
You press DND and dial 1 to activate DND for
incoming trunk calls
¾ 15 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 5 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
When...
Doorphone
Time and Date
CALL <<<
DOOR-n
You are receiving rings from Doorphone n.
Doorphone
Time and Date
TALKING TO
DOOR-n
You dial Service Code 802 and call a
Doorphone, where n is the Doorphone number
External Alarm
SET n ALARM
DIAL TIME
You dial 827 to set an alarm, then dial 1 (to set
Alarm 1) or 2 (to set Alarm 2)
Trunk Incoming
Call
(trk name)
RINGING
A trunk call is ringing your extension
Trunk Incoming
Call
(trk name)
ANSWERED
Trunk Outgoing
Call
(trk name)
BUSY
Trunk Outgoing
Call
(trk name)
HH:MM:SS
You have answered an incoming trunk call
(where nn:nn indicates the Call Timer)
You have tried to place a call over a busy trunk
You have seized a trunk for an outside call
Follow Me
SET FOLLOW ME
1: SET 0: CANCEL
You dial Service Code 846 to dial Follow Me
Follow Me
SET FOLLOW ME
ICM DIAL
You dial 1 to set Follow Me (after dialing
Service Code 846)
Follow Me
CANCEL FOLLOW ME
ICM DIAL
0:ALL CLR
You dial 0 to cancel Follow Me
(after dialing Service Code 846)
Follow Me
SET FOLLOW ME
You have cancelled Follow Me
CANCEL
Follow Me
SET FOLLOW ME
FLW ME <<
(ext name)
You enable Follow Me, where (ext name) is
extension you want to intercept
Time and Date
FLW ME >>
(ext name)
An extension is having its calls intercepted by
Follow Me, where (ext name) is intercepting
extension
Headset Operation
Time and Date
SET HEADSET MODE
You dial Service Code 834 to enable the
Headset mode
Headset Operation
Time and Date
CANCEL HEADSET MODE
You dial Service Code 834 to disable the
Headset mode
Follow Me
¾ 16 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 6 of 13)
With this feature
Hold
You'll see this display...
When...
Time and Date
HOLD
(ext name)
You place an Intercom call on Hold, where (ext
name) is the name of the extension you placed
on Hold
Time and Date
GROUP HOLD (ext name)
You dial Service Code 832 to place an
Intercom call on Group Hold, where (ext name)
is the name of your Intercom caller
Hold
(trk name)
GROUP HOLD
You dial Service Code 832 to place your trunk
call on Group Hold
Hold
Time and Date
HOLD
(ext name)
You place an Intercom call on Hold, where (ext
name) is the name of your Intercom caller
(ext name)
HOLD RECALL
An Intercom call you left on Hold too long
recalls your extension, where (ext name) is the
call you left on Hold
Hold
(trk name)
HOLD RECALL
A call you have left on Hold too long is recalling
your extension
Hold
(trk name)
HOLD
You place a call on Hold
Intercom
Time and Date
TALKING TO
(ext name)
Your extension is busy on an Intercom call
Intercom
Time and Date
DND
(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call to an
extension in DND
Time and Date
CALLING
(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call that has
either voice-announced or is ringing (but the
user has not lifted the handset)
Intercom
Time and Date
CALL FROM
(name)
An Intercom call has voice-announced or is
ringing your extension
Intercom
Time and Date
HANG UP
Your Intercom caller has hung up - but you are
still off-hook
Intercom
Time and Date
BUSY
(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call to a busy
extension
Hold
Hold
Intercom
¾ 17 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 7 of 13)
With this feature
Intercom
Abandoned
Call Display
You'll see this display...
When...
CHECK SET CALL ABAN
(nnn)
(ext name)
You press CHECK and CL2 to check the
Intercom Abandoned Call Display, where (nnn)
is the abandoned extension and (ext name) is
that extension's name
Key Touch Tone
Time and Date
SET KEY TOUCH TN
You dial Service Code 824 to enable Key
Touch Tone
Key Touch Tone
Time and Date
CANCEL KEY TOUCH TN
You dial Service Code 824 to enable Key
Touch Tone
Last Number
Dialing
(trk name)
Last Number Dialing is outdialing the last
number you dialed
Last Number
Dialing
REDIAL (digits)
CHECK
REDIAL
(digits)
You press CHECK and LND to check the
stored Last Number Dialing entry, where
(digits) is the stored entry
Last Number
Dialing
PREVIEW
REDIAL
(digits)
You press LND to check your stored Last
Number Dialing entry
Last Number
Dialing
Time and Day
CLEAR REDIAL
Memo Dial
Memo Dial
CHECK
You dial Service Code 876 to clear the Last
Number Dialing entry
MEMO DIAL
(digits)
You press the Memo Dial key to check the
Memo Dial entry before dialing it out
LINE KEY (nn)
MEMO DIAL
You press CHECK and the Memo Dial key
Memo Dial
MEMO DIAL
(digits)
You press the Memo Dial key while on hook to
check the stored number
Message Waiting
Time and Date
MSG >>>
(ext name)
You dialed Service Code 841 and left a
message at the extension shown in (ext name)
Message Waiting
Time and Date
CANCEL MESSAGE
You dialed 871 to cancel a message you left at
another extension
Music on Hold
SET HOLD TONE
0: TN-0 1: TN-1 2: TN-2
You dial Service Code 881 and the password
(normally 0000) to set the MOH tone
Music on Hold
SET HOLD TONE
SET nTONE
You set the MOH tone, where n is the MOH
tone number (0-2)
ENTER NAME
You dial Service Code 800 to program your
name
Name Storing
¾ 18 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 8 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
When...
Voice Over
Time and Date
2nd VOICE CALL
You dial Service Code 892 to have incoming
override voice-announce
Intercom Off-hook
Signaling
Time and Date
2nd SIGNALING
You dial Service Code 893 to have incoming
override ring
(trk name)
ONE TOUCHnn (digits)
You press a One Touch Key after seizing a
trunk to outdial the number stored under the
key, where nn is the One-Touch Key number
KEY PROG
You dial Service Code 855 to program a OneTouch key
One-Touch Dialing
One-Touch Dialing
ONE TOUCH
One-Touch Dialing
KEY nn
One-Touch Dialing
(name)
(digits)
CHECK DSSnn
(digits)
One-Touch Serial
Operation
One-Touch Serial
Operation
One-Touch Serial
Operation
KEY PROG
FTR KEY
CHECK
LINE KEY nn
SERIAL(SERIES)
OPERATION
CHECK DSSnn
(key) (key) etc.
FTR KEY
You program a One-Touch Key by dialing
Service Code 855 and pressing the One-Touch
Key, where (digits) displays current
programming
You press CHECK and a One Touch key to
check the stored function, where nn is the key
number and (digits) is the stored code
You dial Service Code 852 to program OneTouch Serial Operations
You press CHECK and the Serial Operations
key, where nn is the programmable key number
You press a One-Touch key twice to check the
stored Serial Operations, where nn is the key
number and (key) is the stored key function
One-Touch Serial
Operation
Time and Date
FTR KEY
You press the Serial Operations key to begin
using One-Touch Serial Operations
Paging, External
Time and Date
PAGE EXT ALL
You make an All Call External Page
Paging, External
Time and Date
PAGE EXT
GROUP (nn)
You make an External Zone Page, where (nn)
is the external zone number
¾ 19 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 9 of 13)
With this feature
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Programmable
Function Key
You'll see this display...
When...
Time and Date
ZONE
You dial 801 to access an Internal Paging Zone
or 803 for an External Paging Zone
Time and Date
GROUP CALL
You press 801 and an internal zone number,
where (name) is the Internal Paging Zone
name
Time and Date
GROUP CALL
(name)
(ext name)
Another extension makes an Internal Page to
your paging group, where (ext name) is the
name of the extension that initiated the page
KEY PROGRAM KEY nn
PAGE EXT ALL
You dial Service Code 851 and Programmable
Function Key code 1005
KEY PROGRAM KEY (nn)
(function)
You press a function key after dialing Service
Code 851, where (function) is the currently
programmed function, as follows:
For this key function... You see this display...
1000 .......................CALL FORWARD
1001 .......................FOLLOW ME
1002 .......................TRANSFER-BUSY
1003 .......................TRANSFER-NO ANS
1004 .......................PAGE GROUP 0
1005 .......................PAGE EXT ALL
1006 .......................PAGE GROUP ICM 0
1007 .......................CALL PICK UP
1008 .......................OTHER GROUP PICK UP
1009 .......................GROUP PICK UP
1010 .......................MEET ME PAGE
1011 .......................LINE ACCESS
1012 .......................LINE GRP ACCESS 0
1013 .......................--Not used -1014 .......................SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
1015 .......................MEMO DIAL
1016 .......................CONFERENCE
1017 .......................MEET ME CONF
¾ 20 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 10 of 13)
With this feature
Programmable
Function Key
You'll see this display...
When...
For this key function... You see this display...
1018 .......................OVERRIDE
1019 .......................BREAK IN
1020 .......................CAMP ON
1021 .......................STEP CALL
1022 .......................DND/FWD OVERRIDE
1023 .......................MESSAGE WAITING
1024 .......................--Not used -1025 .......................ROOM MONITOR
1026 .......................TRANSMIT CUT OFF
1027 .......................TEXT MESSAGE 00
1028 .......................CHANCE HEADSET MODE
1029 .......................DATA
1030 .......................DATA PRIVACY
1031 .......................BUZZER
1032 .......................BOSS CALL FORWARD
1033 .......................PARK HOLD 00
1034 .......................SERIES OPERATION
1035 .......................SERIES CALL 00
1036 .......................VIRTUAL EXTENSION
1037 .......................ABB COMMON DIAL
1038 .......................ABB GROUP DIAL
1039 .......................SET DAY
1040 .......................SET NIGHT #1
1041 .......................SET NIGHT #2
1042 .......................SET BREAK
1043 .......................HOLD
1044 .......................EXCLUSIVE HOLD
1045 .......................KEYBOARD DIAL
1046 .......................--Not used-1047 .......................--Not used-1048 .......................--Not used-1049 .......................--Not used-1050 .......................--Not used-1051 .......................--Not used-1052 .......................--Not used-1053 .......................--Not used--
¾ 21 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 11 of 13)
With this feature
Programmable
Function Key
You'll see this display...
When...
For this key function... You see this display...
1054 .......................-- Not used-1055 .......................CALL FORWARD
1056 .......................--Not used-1057 .......................--Not used-1058 .......................DSS ICM
1059 .......................VOICE MAIL MSG
1060 .......................CONVERSATION RECORD
1061 .......................CONV. RECORDING
1062 .......................PAUSE
1063 .......................ADDITIONAL RECORDING
1064 .......................MAIL BOX
1065 .......................RE-RECORDING
1066 .......................--Not used-1067 .......................CANCEL CONV. REC
1068 .......................PLAY MESSAGE
1069 .......................SKIP MESSAGE
1070 .......................IMMEDIAE DELIVERY
1071 .......................AUTO ATTENDANT
1072 .......................--Not used-1073 .......................EDIT CALLER I.D.
1074 .......................PILOT GROUP WITHDRAW
1075 .......................--Not used-1076 .......................--Not used-1077 .......................--Not used-1078 .......................--Not used-1079 .......................--Not used-1080 .......................--Not used-1081 .......................--Not used-1082 .......................VAU QUEUE MESSAGE
1083 .......................INTERNAL LND
1084 .......................IND CALLER ID TBL
1085 .......................CHECK MISSED CALL
1086 .......................24DLS SELECT RANGE
¾ 22 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 12 of 13)
With this feature
Programmable
Function Key
You'll see this display...
You dial Service Code 851 to program your
function keys
KEY PROGRAM
Programmable
Function Key
CHECK
Park Hold
(trk name)
HOLD
Park Hold
PARK HOLD
When...
LINE KEY nn
(function)
PARK nn
You press CHECK and a function key while on
hook, where (function) is the stored function
You Park Hold a call (before you hang up)
You dial Service Code 831 to Park Hold a call
PARK No DIAL
Park Hold
ANS HOLD
PARK No DIAL
You dial Service Code 861 to pick up a parked
call
Privacy (Data)
Time and Date
DATA PRIVACY
You press the Data privacy key to activate Data
Privacy
Automatic Repeat
Dialing
PREVIEW
CANCEL REPEAT DIAL
You cancel Automatic Repeat Dialing
Automatic Repeat
Dialing
(trk name)
REPEAT DIAL (digits)
Automatic Repeat Dialing is automatically
outgoing
Automatic Repeat
Dialing
(trk name)
REPEAT DIAL
You have activated Automatic Repeat Dialing
but have not hung up
Room Monitor
ROOM MONITOR
ICM DIAL
You press the Room Monitor key
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
Time and Date
MONITOR <<
(ext name)
You activate Room Monitor at the initiating
extension, where (ext name) is the name of the
extension being monitored
Time and Date
MONITORED >>
You activate Room Monitor at the extension to
be monitored
Saved Last Number (trk name)
Dialing
NUMBER SAVED
You saved the number you just dialed
Saved Last Number (trk name)
Dialing
Save is outdialing your saved number
SAVED (digits)
Saved Last Number
PREVIEW SAVED NUMBER
Dialing
(digits)
While on hook, you pressed your Saved Last
Number Dialing key to preview your stored
number
Saved Last Number CHECK
LINE KEY nn
Dialing
SAVE NUMBER REDIAL
You press CHECK and the Saved Last Number
Dialing key while on hook
¾ 23 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-4, Digital Key Telephone Displays (Page 13 of 13)
With this feature
You'll see this display...
When...
Text Messaging
TEXT MESSAGE
DIAL MESSAGE No.
You dialed Service Code 836 to choose a Text
Message
Selectable Ring
Tone
SET INCOM RING
1:INT 2:EXT
You dial Service Code 820 to set Selectable
Ring Tones
Selectable Ring
Tone
SET INT INCOM .RING
1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L)
You dial Service Code 820 plus 1 to Set
Intercom Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring
Tone
SET EXT INCOM RING
1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L)
You dial Service Code 820 plus 2 to Set trunk
Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring
Tone
SET (type) INCOM RING
(n) SET
You set the incoming ring type, where (type) is
INT or EXT and n is the range (H, M or L)
Selectable Ring
Tone
CONFIRM INCOM RIN
1:INT 2:EXT
G You dial Service Code 811 to listen to your
Selectable Ring Tone Settings
Selectable Ring
Tone
CONFIRM INT INCOM
1:H 2:M 3:L
You dial Service Code 811 plus 1 to listen to
the Intercom ring settings
Selectable Ring
Tone
CONFIRM EXT INCOM
1:H 2:M 3:L
+TN1-4
You dial Service Code 811 plus 2 to listen to
the trunk ring settings
(trk name)
WAIT TRF
You press the Serial Call key to set up a Serial
Call, where (trk name) is the trunk transferred
and (ext name) is destination extension
Serial Call
(ext name)
Transfer
(trk name)
TRANSFER <
(ext name)
Transfer
(trk name)
TRF RECALL
(ext name)
A transferred trunk is ringing your phone, where
(trk name) is the trunk's name and (ext name) is
the name of the extension that transferred the
call
A trunk you transferred is recalling your phone,
where (trk name) is the recalling trunk and (ext
name) is extension from which the call is
recalling
¾ 24 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-5, System Ring Rates
SECONDS
¾ 25 ¾
Introduction (Cont'd)
Table 1-6, System Flash Rates
SECONDS
¾ 26 ¾
Abbreviated Dialing
Description
Abbreviated Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers.
This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they dial often. Instead of
dialing a long telephone number, the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialing code.
The system has 560 Abbreviated Dialing bins that you can allocate for Common (400) and
Group (160 <20 x 8 groups>) Abbreviated Dialing. Each bin can contain a stored number
up to 24 digits long.
l Abbreviated Dialing by Single Operation
Abbreviated dialing also provided that the specified common/ group ABB No. can be
stored to an unused programming key. The Key Telephone user can place an outgoing
call only by pressing this key. These keys can be used as same like One-Touch key.
This feature provides the benefit in case all One-Touch keys have already been
occupied but the other Telephone Nos. are wanted to be stored to the One-Touch keys.
There are 2 types of function keys.
- Specified Common Abbreviated Dial key (Function Code : 1037 + ABB No.)
- Specified Group Abbreviated Dial key (Function Code : 1038 + ABB No.)
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
The 0T TEL and SLT are not available for the single operation feature.
Default Setting
- Extension's DC key is for Common Abbreviated Dialing
- An extension's COS allows entering and using Abbreviated Dialing entries
- Bins 0-400 assigned for Common Abbreviated Dialing
- 160 bins assigned for Group Abbreviated Dialing
- No Abbreviated Dialing numbers entered.
- All extensions in Extension (Abbreviated Dial) Group 1.
- No Abbreviated Dialing keys programmed.
- Service Code of Common Abbreviated Dial Setting is dial 853.
- Service Code of Group Abbreviated Dial Setting is dial 854.
- Service Code of Common Abbreviated Dialing is dial 813.
- Service Code of Group Abbreviated Dialing is dial 814.
Options
None
¾ 27 ¾
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In Program
0401 Item 15,
enter 1.
Group
In Program
0406 Item 18,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 19,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 20,
enter 0.
No
Should extension's DC
keys be for Common or
Group Abbreviated
Dialing?
Should extensions be
allowed to store
Abbreviated Dialing
entries?
Should extensions be
allowed to dial Common
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
Should extensions be
allowed to dial Group
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
Go to
Programming
flowchart on
the following
page.
¾ 28 ¾
Common
In Program
0401 Item 15,
enter 0.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 18,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 19,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 20,
enter 1.
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Do you want to assign
names to Abbreviated
Dialing bins?
Yes
In Program 0603, enter
names for the Common
and Group Abbreviated
Dialing bins.
No
Should users have
one-button dialing or
Single Operation for
Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing?
Yes
In Program 1006, assign
Programmable keys for
Common (code 1037)
and Group (code 1038)
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing?
Yes
No
Stop
¾ 29 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options Part A, Item 15: Abbreviated Dialing DC Key Function
Assign the extension's DC key for either Common (0) or Group (1) Abbreviated Dialing.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 18: Common/Group Abbreviated Dial Registration
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) the storing of Abbreviated
Dialing entries (Service Codes 853 and 854).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 19: Common Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Group Abbreviated Dialing.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 20: Group Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Group Abbreviated Dialing.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 23: Common Abbreviated dial
Assign a service code for common abbreviated dialing code.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 24: Group Abbreviated dial
Assign a service code for group abbreviated dialing code.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A, Item 68: Common abbreviated dial setting
Assign a service code for common abbreviated dial registration code.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A, Item 69: Group abbreviated dial setting
Assign a service code for Group abbreviated dial registration code.
> 0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers Names
Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names.
> 0604 - Trunk Group for Abbreviated dialing
Assign the Trunk Group which is used for Abbreviated dialing.
> 0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extension
Assign the Trunk Route for each extension.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys Code 1037: Common abbreviated dialing
Assign the specified Common ABB dialing or Common ABB Key. In case of specified
common ABB key, the desired ABB No. is stored to the additional data area.
- Programming Function Keys Code 1038: Group abbreviated dialing
Assign the specified Group Abbreviated Dialing or Group ABB Key. In case of
specified group ABB key, the desired ABB No. is stored to the additional data area.
> 1023 - Extension (Abbreviated Dial) Groups
Assign each extension to Abbreviated Extension Groups (1-8).
¾ 30 ¾
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Related Features
Trunk Outgoing Call
A user can implement Abbreviated Dialing only if their extension has outgoing access to
Trunks.
Trunk Group Routing
Unless a user pre-selects a Trunk, Group Routing selects the Trunk for Abbreviated
Dialing.
One-Touch Dialing
An extension can have a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing Operation
PBX Compatibility
If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin, the system
automatically share bins.
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Abbreviated Dialing number.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To store an Abbreviated Dialing number:
(This feature is only available for key telephone with display.)
1. Press idle CL key
2. Dial 853(
) [for common] or 854(
) [for group].
3. Dial common (000-399) or group storage code (00-19).
4. Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).
Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. To enter a pause, press MIC key.
5. Press HOLD.
6. Enter the name associated with the Abbreviated Dialing number.
7. Press HOLD.
8. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 31 ¾
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 813(
).
OR
Press DC key (when initial setting or DC key is setting to Common Abbreviated Dialing
key).
OR
Press Common Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1037).
To pre-select, press a trunk key in step 1 (instead of CL) before pressing the DC or
Abbreviated Dialing key.
If common ABB bin No. is stored on the key, then step-3 is not necessary.
3. Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code.
The stored number dials out.
To dial Group Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 814(
).
OR
Press DC key.
OR
Press Group Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1038).
To pre-select, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CL) before pressing the DC or
Abbreviated Dialing key.
If Group ABB bin No. is stored on the key, then step-3 is not necessary.
3. Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialing code.
The stored number dials out.
To place an outgoing call by using specified ABB key for single operation:
This feature is only available for key telephone except 0T TEL.
1. Press a specified ABB key.
¾ 32 ¾
Abbreviated Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To assign the Specified ABB key for single operation:
This feature is only available for key telephone except 0T TEL.
1. Press SPK key and dial 851 (
).
2. Press one of unused Programmable key.
3. Dial Function code (1037 or 1038).
4. Dial the desired ABB No.
5. Press SPK key to finish.
Note: If HOLD key is pressed instead of dialing ABB No. at Step-4, then the key shall be
defined as Common / Group ABB access key.
To check your stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers:
(This feature is only available for key telephone with display.)
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press DC key.
3. Dial the Abbreviated Dialing Code (e.g., common code 001).
If the entire stored number is too long for your phone's display,
press * to see the rest of it.
4. Press CLEAR.
To display additional numbers, repeat from step 2.
<Single Line Telephone>
To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 813(
).
3. Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code.
The stored number dials out.
To dial Group Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 814( ).
3. Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialing code.
The stored number dials out.
¾ 33 ¾
Account Code (Optional / Forced)
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or
restrict Trunk calls. The system has two types of Account Codes:
l Optional Account Codes
Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk
call or anytime while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional; the system does
not require the user to enter it.
l Forced Account Codes
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time
before they place a Trunk call. If the user doesn't enter the code, the system prevents the
call.
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call
completes. Account Codes can be from 1-8 digits long, using 0-9 and #.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and DTMF type single line telephone.
(A) If a user enters a code that exceeds the eight digits limit, the system ignores the
Account Code entry.
(B) The system does not verify Forced Account Codes.
(C) If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g.,*1234*) appear on
the SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
Default Setting
- Account Codes disabled in an extension's Class of Service.
- Account Codes enabled in the system (but not forced).
- Service Code for Account Code is dial 891.
- No Account Code keys assigned.
Options
None
¾ 34 ¾
Account Code (Optional / Forced) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0407, enter 0 to
disable Account Codes.
Disabled
Should the system
have Account Codes
enabled, disabled or
forced (required)?
Enabled
In 0407, enter 1 to
enable Account Codes.
Forced
In 0407, enter 2 to
force users to enter
Account Codes.
In 0406, Item 84,
enter 0 to disable
Account Code entry.
No
If allowed for the system,
should extension
be able to enter an
Account Code?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 35 ¾
Yes
In 0406, Item 84,
enter 1 to enable
Account Code entry.
Always enable this option if
your system has Forced
Account Codes.
Account Code (Optional / Forced) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 84: Account code service
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to enter Account
Codes.
> 0407 - Mode Selection of Account Code
Set Account Code operation.
The options are:
0 Account Codes disabled
1 Account Codes enabled (but not required)
2 Account Codes required (forced)
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 86: Account code
Assign a service code for account code.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
One-Touch Dialing
To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., *1234*) in a One-Touch
key. Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Station Message Detail Recording
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To enter an Account Code any time while on a Trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter.
1. Dial *.
2. Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
3. Dial *.
¾ 36 ¾
Account Code (Optional / Forced) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk call:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.
Access Trunk for outside call.
You can access a Trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code.
Dial *.
Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
Dial *.
If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don't enter a code, your call cannot
go through.
Dial number you want to call.
<Single Line Telephone>
To enter an Account Code any time while on a Trunk call:
1. Dial *.
2. Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
3. Dial #.
To enter an Account Code while placing a Trunk call:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.
Access Trunk for outside call.
You can access a Trunk by pressing trunk access code.
Dial *.
Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
Dial *.
If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don't enter a code, your call cannot
go through.
Dial number you want to call.
¾ 37 ¾
Alarm Clock
Description
Alarm Clock lets a key telephone and SLT extension work like an alarm clock. An
extension user have Alarm shall be reminded by the ring for a meeting or an appointment.
There are two types of Alarm Clocks:
Alarm Clock 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
Alarm Clock 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default setting
- The Alarm Clock duration is 30 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service allows alarm clock setting.
- Service Code of Clock Alarm is dial 827.
- Service Code of Common Canceling Code is dial 720.
Options
None
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 23: Alarm Clock Duration
Set the duration of the Alarm Clock signal (0-64800 seconds).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 27: Alarm Clock
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Alarm clock setting.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 22: Alarm Clock
Assign service code of Alarm Clock.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 10: Common Canceling Code
Assign service code of Common Canceling Code.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 38 ¾
Alarm Clock (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In Program
0406 Item 27,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension
be allowed to use
Alarm?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 27,
enter 1.
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
Should the alarm
signal be different
than 30 seconds
(the default)?
Yes
In Program 0405 Item 23,
set the duration of the
alarm signal
(0-64800 seconds).
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Alarm Clock setting,
cancel and common
Canceling code?
No
Stop
¾ 39 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Alarm Clock (Cont'd)
Related Features
None
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To set the alarm clock:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 827(
).
3. Dial alarm clock type (1 or 2).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
Alarm clock 1 sounds only once. Alarm clock 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4. Dial the alarm clock time (24-hour clock).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
For example, for 1: 15 PM dial 1315.
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To silence an alarm clock:
1. Press CLEAR.
To check the programmed alarm clock time:
(This feature only available for key telephone with display.)
1. Press CHECK.
2. Dial 827(
).
3. Dial alarm clock type (1 or 2).
The programmed time displays.
4. Press CLEAR.
To cancel an alarm clock:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 827(
).
3. Dial alarm clock type (1 or 2).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. Dial 9999.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 40 ¾
Alarm Clock (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To cancel an alarm clock:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
).
When you cancel an alarm clock by dial 720, these features are canceled at same time, DND,
Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text Message.
<Single Line Telephone>
To set the alarm clock:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 827(
).
3. Dial alarm clock type (1 or 2).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
Alarm clock 1 sounds only once. Alarm clock 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4. Dial the clock alarm time (24-hour clock).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
For example, for 1: 15 PM dial 1315.
5. On hook.
To silence an alarm clock:
1. Off hook.
(Music on hold tone is heard.)
2. On hook.
To check the programmed alarm clock time:
This feature only available for key telephone with display.
To cancel an alarm clock:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 827(
).
3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. Dial 9999.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. On hook.
OR
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 720(
3. On hook.
).
When you cancel an alarm clock by dial 720, these features are canceled at same time, DND,
Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text Message.
¾ 41 ¾
Alphanumeric Display
Description
Key telephone with display has a 2-line, 20 character per line alphanumeric display that
provides various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user
process calls, identify callers and customize features. Refer to Table 1-4 at the beginning of
this section for a listing of the available digital key telephone displays.
l Busy Status Displaying
When the Key Telephone user (Display type only) places an intercom call to the busy status
extension, the details of busy status (who is talking with him or which Line is used by him)
can be displayed. And also, the details of busy status for Trunk (who is using) can be
displayed after accessing to the Trunk. This feature provides the benefit that the calling Key
Telephone user can decide whether Break In feature is used or not after checking the busy
status
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
Default setting
l An extension's Class of Service allows the displaying of:
- A Trunk's name/number when the user seizes the Trunk
- A Trunk's name/number when the Trunk is ringing
- The incoming intercom caller's name and number
- An extension's incoming Transfer pre-answer display
- An extension's Group Call Pickup display
Options
None
¾ 42 ¾
Alphanumeric Display (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
This also disables
the Call Timer.
In Program
0406 Item 37,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 38,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 39,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 40,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 42,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0406 Item 51,
enter 0.
No
When a user seizes a trunk,
should they see the trunk
name on their display?
When a trunk rings an extension,
should their display show the
trunk name and "RINGING" display?
When a user answers an Intercom
call, should their display show the
calling extension's name and
"TALKING TO" answer display?
When a user receives an Intercom
call, should their display show
the callers name and "CALL FROM"
pre-answer display?
When a user receives a transferred
call, should their display show the
"TRANSFER<<" transfer
pre-answer display?
When a user employs Call Pickup to
intercept a call, should their display
show the "CALL P/U" display?
In Program 1005,
assign a class of
Service to an
extension
¾ 43 ¾
In Program
0406 Item 37,
enter 1.
Yes
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 38,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 39,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 40,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 42,
enter 1.
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 51,
enter 1.
Stop
Alphanumeric Display (Cont'd)
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 34: Non-Hold transfer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “Non-Hold Transfer”.
Caution : If “Busy Status Displaying” for Trunk feature is to be used, then this item
should be set to “0”.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 37: Trunk No. and Name Display (Seizing)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a Trunk's
name/number when the user seizes the Trunk.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 38: Trunk No. and Name Display (Incoming)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a Trunk's
name/number when the Trunk is ringing.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 39: Extension No. and Name Display (conversation)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the incoming Intercom
caller's name and number.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 40: Extension No. and Name Display (incoming)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the pre-answer display of the
incoming Intercom caller's name and number.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 42: Transfer Information Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's incoming
Transfer pre-answer display.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 51: Call Pick up Information Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's Group Call
Pickup display.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 88: Busy status displaying
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “Busy status
displaying”.(to monitor)
Caution : If “Busy Status Displaying” feature is to be used, then this item should be set
to “1”.
Related Features
Refer to Table 1-4 in “Introduction” section.
Operation
Display indication appears automatically as operated.
¾ 44 ¾
Audio Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
The Audio Communication Interface (ACI) provides three audio ports (with associated
relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging or auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and
loud bells. The system allows up to 2 ACIs, for a maximum of 6 audio ports. Each ACI unit
requires an unused port on the DSTU card. The ACI gives you more flexibility when
connected auxiliary devices since it doesn't use up resources on PGDU (Page/Doorphone),
ASTU (Analog Station) or ATRU (Analog Trunk) cards.
l Music on Hold
You can connect up to three customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to an
ACI. This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CPU card
or the internal source is not adequate. By using ACIs, you could even have a different
music source for each Trunk.
When the system switches the ACI audio port to a Trunk on Hold, the ACI relay
associated with the ACI audio port closes. You can use this capability to switch on the
music source, if desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI audio port extension number and listen to the
connected music source. The ACI relay associated with the port closes when the call
goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the ACI audio port IN (Input) jack.
Connect the music source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the
Hardware Manual for additional details.
l External Paging
An ACI audio port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customerprovided External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging
independent of the PGDU card. To use the External Paging, an extension user just dials
the ACI audio port extension number and makes the announcement. The system
broadcasts the announcement from the ACI audio port and simultaneously closes the
associated ACI relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging
amplifier, if required.
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the ACI audio port OUT (output)
jack. Connect the amplifier control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the
Hardware Manual for additional details.
¾ 45 ¾
Audio Communications Interface (ACI) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
l Auxiliary Device Control
The ACI can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials
the ACI audio port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and
activate the record function.
When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape
recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the ACI audio port OUT
(output) jack. Connect the recorder control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay)
jack.
Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
By using Group Hunt, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an
extension user dials the department Group pilot number, they reach the first available
tape recorder in the pool.
The relays on the ACI can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud
bells) and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI audio port extension number,
the associated ACI relay closes and activates the ringer. You could use this capability to
control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each ACI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three audio
ports. For programming purposes, the audio ports are also called as software ports. The
physical port connects to a station position on a DSTU card. During installation, the first
ACI you set up is physical port 1; the second ACI is physical port 2, etc.
Each ACI has three software ports, which are numbered, independently of the physical
ports. Normally, the first ACI set up has software ports 1-3; the second ACI has
software ports 4-6, etc. There are a total of 6 software ports (2 ACIs ´ 3 ports each).
During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers, Department Group options to
ACI software ports, not physical ports. During installation, you connect equipment to
the jacks on the ACI that correspond to the software port. Refer to the system Hardware
Manual for more installation details.
¾ 46 ¾
Audio Communications Interface (ACI)(Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
Conditions
The devices connected to the ACI must be compatible with the specifications below. Refer
to the system Hardware Manual for additional details.
ACI Interface Specifications
Relay Contacts
Configuration…………………………………………Normally Open
Maximum Contact Ratings…………………………24V DC @ 500mA
120V AC @250mA
Minimum Application load…………………………..1V DC @ 1mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance……………………………………..47K Ohms @ 1KHz
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance…………………………………...600 Ohms @ 1KHz
Maximum Output …………………………………….400 mV RMS
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
-
No ACI circuit types programmed (for physical ports).
No ACI extension numbers programmed.
No ACI group pilot numbers programmed.
All ACI software ports have function 0 (no setting - neither input or output)
All ACI software ports in ACI Department Group 1.
Options
DX2E-3ACI-A
¾ 47 ¾
Audio Communications Interface (ACI) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Plug ACI into an available
DSTU station port.
External Paging/Aux
Device Control
Music on Hold
Is ACI software port for
Music on Hold or External
Paging/Aux Device Control?
In 1301, enter 2 for
output function.
In 1301, enter 2 for
output function.
In 0914, assign a
Music on Hold source
for each Trunk.
Direct dialing is required for External
Paging and Ringer Control.
Direct dialing is optional
for Music on Hold.
Do not make extension
number entries in 0504.
No
Should system users be
able to directly dial ACI
software ports?
Yes
In 1303, assign ACI software
ports to Department Groups.
In 0508, assign pilot numbers
to the ACI Department Groups.
Stop
¾ 48 ¾
Yes
In 0504, enter an extension
number for each ACI
software port.
Should system users be
able to use Department
Calling to call ACI
software ports?
No
Audio Communications Interface (ACI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0504 - ACI Extension Number
Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports (1-6). This lets system users dial ACI
ports directly.
> 0508 - ACI Group Pilot Numbers
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups (1-4). When a user dials the pilot number, they
reach an available ACI software port within the External Paging/ringer control.
> 0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source
Assign music on hold tone sending ACI port for each Trunk.
> 1301 - Basic ACI Port Setup
Assign ACI type for each ACI port.
> 1303 - ACI Groups
Assign ACI software ports (1-6) to ACI Department Groups (1-4).
This lets ACI callers connect to ACI software ports by dialing the group's pilot number
(set in Program 0508).
Related Features
Background Music
ACI software ports cannot be Background Music sources.
Hotline
ACI extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports.
Music on Hold
ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources. Since the system allows up to 6
ACI software ports, each Trunk can have its own music source.
One-Touch Dialing
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension
user:
- One touch access to external music
- One touch External Paging
- One touch loud ringer control
Paging (External)
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the PGDU card.
¾ 49 ¾
Audio Communications Interface (ACI) (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To call an ACI software port:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial ACI software port extension number.
OR
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
OR
Press One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software part:
l If the port is set for input (Program 1301=1) and a music source is connected, you hear
music.
OR
l If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and External Paging is connected, you can
page into the external zone.
OR
l If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you
activate the loud ringer.
<Single Line Telephone>
To call an ACI software port:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial ACI software port extension number.
OR
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
After you call an ACI software port:
l If the port is set for input (Program 1301=1) and a music source is connected, you hear
music.
OR
l If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and External Paging is connected, you can
page into the external zone.
OR
l If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you
activate the loud ringer.
¾ 50 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA (VAU)
Description
For DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) and DISA (Direct Inward System Access) calls from
outside, the system can provide voice announcement as AA (Automated Attendant) by the
connection of VAU module. Up to 3 simultaneous calls can be handled by the VAU. And
by adding “VAU Expansion Board” in the module, then up to 6 simultaneous calls can be
handled. AA message can be assigned per trunk for each day/night mode.
(refer to “DUD” and “DISA” for more details)
l Leave Telephone Number from DUD/DISA caller
When DUD/DISA caller calls to busy extension, DUD/DISA caller can leave the own
telephone number to busy extension, if the extension is display type. And then the
extension user finished conversation, he/she can check and call back the call's telephone
number by simple operation.
Condition
- The DUD or the DISA caller must use DTMF type telephone.
- The destination (called telephone) must be display type for "Leave Telephone
Number".
- This feature available for outside caller.
(A) If DISA/DUD caller uses the rotary dial telephone, or if the caller does not dial
after answering of VAU, incoming call will be transferred to pre-programmed
incoming ring group if you set.
(B) If desired extension is idle, incoming call will be transferred to that extension.
However, the call will not be attended by VAU even if transferred extension does
not answer the call.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A module
VAU Expansion Board
¾ 51 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Assign the
DUD or DISA
Feature.
No
Do you finish the setting
for DUD or DISA setup
Programming.
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 31,
enter 1.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 0
To not allow using
automated attendant
message
Stop
No
No
Does VAU send VAU fixed
Message?
Does DUD/DISA caller
need VAU for DUD/DISA
Talkie?
In 0405 Item 10 enter the
Intercom calling set
inter-digit time.
Go to
Programming
flowchart on
the following
page.
¾ 52 ¾
Yes
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 31,
enter 0.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 4
To allow using
automated attendant
message by VAU.
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Does the all VAU
message clear?
Yes
In 2201, enter 2 all VAU
Message clear.
No
After the system
answers, does the
Yes
system allow the
automated attendant and
error message for an
adequate duration?
In 2202, Item 1, change
the message length.
No
When the system
answer, does the system Yes
allow the automated
attendant message
For DUD/DISA caller by
VAU
In 2205, assign the VAU
message number at the
each night for each
DUD/DISA line.
th
l
th
No
When the system
answer, does the system
allow the automated
attendant error message
For DUD/DISA caller by
VAU
Yes
In 2209, assign the VAU
message number at the
each night for each
DUD/DISA line.
No
Go to
Programming
flowchart on
the following
page.
¾ 53 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
In 2204, enter 0
To does not allow
the transfer.
Continued
from
previous
page.
No
If the all VAU path are
busy when DUD/DISA
has a incoming call, does
the system allow
automatic transfer to
incoming ring group?
Yes
In 2204, enter the
transfer ring group
number.
In 0405 Item 63, enter
DUD/DISA calling set
transferring interval, when
VAU path are busy.
Should extension be
allowed to operate the
automated attendant
message and error
message?
Yes
In 0406 Item 96, enter
1.
No
Should DUD/DISA caller
be allowed to operate the
automated attendant
message(VAU message)?
Yes
In 2208, enter the VAU
Password.
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing?
Stop
¾ 54 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Note: For additional programming information on DUD and DISA, refer to DUD (Direct Universal
Dialing) and DISA (Direct Inward System Access).
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 31: VAU fixed message
Set the use (0) or not use (1) VAU fixed message for VAU feature.
0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 10: Intercom interdigit timer
Set the Intercom interdigit time (0 - 64800 seconds) when placing intercom calls, users
Must dial each digit within this interval.
0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 63: VAU no-answer time (VAU)
Set the waiting time (0 - 64800 seconds) of automatic answer for incoming call, when
All VAU paths are busy. If all VAU paths are busy while waiting time, incoming call
transfer to transferring ring group (CMD 2204).
0406 - COS Options, Item 96: Operation for VAU message (VAU)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the initiate operation for
Automated Attendant Message.
0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B,
Item 4: Leave telephone number from DUD/DISA (VAU)
Assign a service code for Leave Telephone Number from DUD/DISA.
0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B,
Item 6: Operation for VAU message (VAU)
Assign a service code for Operation for VAU message.
0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B,
Item 33: Check leave number (VAU)
Assign a service code, leave telephone number received key telephone user call and
erase the left telephone number.
1804 - DUD,DISA Talkie
Assign DUD, DISA Talkie type and extension group for Talkie for each Trunk
And each night mode. When you use Automated Attendant features, enter 4(VAU) to
Target Trunk and night mode.
2201 - VAU Reset
When you use to erase the VAU Personal Message and VAU Message.
2202 - Message Length Assignment for VAU
Set the maximum length of message length for VAU Message and Personal Message.
2204 - Transfer Ring Group Setup When VAU No Answer
Assign a transfer ring group number, when VAU will be no answer.
¾ 55 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 2205 - Automated Attendant Massage Assignment
Assign the VAU message which is used Automated Attendant Message for
DUD/DISA caller from VAU.
> 2208 - VAU Password Setup
Assign the VAU Password. When DUD/DISA caller is heard and recorded VAU
Message, DUD/DISA caller must dial VAU.
> 2209 – Automated Attendant Error Message
Assign the VAU Message number which is used Automated Attendant Error Message
for DUD/DISA caller from VAU.
Related Features
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA feature is supported by the automated attendant and automated voice guidance.
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing)
DUD feature is supported by the automated attendant and automated voice guidance.
Operation
For DISA caller
To place a DISA call from outside:
1. Call to DISA Trunk.
2. Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with "Please enter your password".
OR
Hear Unique dial tone.
3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code). (used DTMF tone)
4. Hear Automated Attendant Message.
5. Dials the system extension number directly to feature access service code.
For DUD caller
To place a DUD call from outside:
1. Call to DUD Trunk.
2. Hear Automated Attendant Message.
3. Dials the system extension number directly.
¾ 56 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
For DUD and DISA Caller
To leave telephone number for busy extension:
1. Dial busy extension (key telephone with display) number.
2. Hear "Station AAAA is not available, please dial a new station or dial BBBB to wait, or
dial 714 to leave number".
(AAAA is extension number, BBBB is service code for Camp On, 714 is service code
for Leave Telephone Number)
3. Dial 714(
).
4. Hear "Please enter your area code and telephone number".
5. Dial own telephone number (maximum 14 digits).
6. Hear "Dial # to call you back at CCC...CC".
(CCC...CC is left telephone number.)
7. Dial #.
8. Hear "Good by".
For key telephone with display user
To call the telephone number which is left from outside:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 743(
).
Dial 2.
The system calls to the left telephone number automatically.
To erase the telephone number left:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 743(
).
Dial 3.
Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 57 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Automated Attendant Message Control
<Key Telephone>
To operate the VAU message (Automated Attendant Message and Automated
Attendant Error Message):
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 716(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. Dial message number (01-16).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-b.
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Dial message number (01-16).
You hear recorded VAU message.
Press SPK to hang up (finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-c. Dial 7 (re-record).
4-c. Dial message number (01-16).
5-c. You hear "Please start recording <beep>".
OR
"Three times of beep tone".
6-c. Recording VAU message by your voice.
7-c. Press SPK to hang up (finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
¾ 58 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To operate the VAU message (Automated Attendant Message and Automated
Attendant Error Message):
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 716(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. Dial message number (01-16).
5-a. On hook (finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-b.
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Dial message number (01-16).
You hear recorded VAU message.
On hook (finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-c. Dial 7 (re-record).
4-c. Dial message number (01-16).
5-c. You Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
OR
"Three times of beep tone".
6-c. Recording VAU message by your voice.
7-c. On hook (finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
¾ 59 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<DISA Outside Caller>
To record the VAU message (Automated Attendant Message and Automated
Attendant Error Message from outside):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Call to DISA Trunk.
Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with "Please enter your
password".
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code). (Used DTMF tone)
Hear Automated Attendant Message.
Dial 716(
).
Dial the 6-digit VAU password.
Dial 7.
Dial VAU message number (01-16).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording VAU message.
To confirm the VAU message from outside:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Call to DISA Trunk.
Waits for the DISA Trunk to automatically answer with "Please enter your password".
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code). (Used DTMF tone)
Hear Automated Attendant Message.
Dial 716(
).
Dial the 6-digit VAU password.
Dial 5.
Dial message number (01-16).
Hear the recorded VAU message.
To erase the VAU message from outside:
This feature is not available for DISA caller.
¾ 60 ¾
Automated Attendant for DUD and DISA(VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<DUD Outside Caller>
To record the VAU message (Automated Attendant Message and Automated
Attendant Error Message from outside):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Call to DUD Trunk.
Hear Automated Attendant Message.
Dial 716(
).
Dial the 6-digit VAU password.
Dial 7.
Dial VAU message number (01-16).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording VAU message.
To confirm the VAU message from outside:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Call to DUD Trunk.
Hear Automated Attendant Message.
Dial 716(
).
Dial the 6-digit VAU password.
Dial 5.
Dial message number (01-16).
Hear the recorded VAU message.
To erase the VAU message from outside:
This feature is not available for DUD caller.
¾ 61 ¾
Automatic Repeat Dialing
Description
If an extension user places a Trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have
Automatic Repeat Dialing try it again later on. The user doesn't continually retries it (up to
three times) until the called party answers.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- The system waits 60 seconds between Automatic Repeat Dialing attempts
- After Automatic Repeat Dialing places a call, the system waits 30 seconds for the called
party to answer.
- An extension's Class of Service permits Automatic Repeat Dialing.
- Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720.
Options
None
Programming
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 36: Interval of Repeat Dial
Set the internal between Repeat are dial attempts (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 37: Repeat Dial Enable Call
Set how long the system waits (0-64800 seconds) for the called party to answer after an
Automatic Repeat Dialing. If the called party doesn't answer within this interval, the
system hangs up and tries again (after the Automatic Repeat Dialing Time).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 74: Automatic Repeat Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Automatic Repeat Dialing.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B
Item 10: Common Canceling service code
Assign a service code of common Canceling service code.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 62 ¾
Automatic Repeat Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 74,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Automatic Repeat
Dialing?
Yes
In 0406 Item 74,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Is the interval between
Automatic Repeat Dialing
attempts adequate?
In 0405 Item 36,
change the Repeat
Redial Time.
No
Yes
When Automatic Repeat Dialing
retries a call and the called party is
busy or doesn't answer, does the
system wait an adequate interval
before hanging up and trying again?
No
In 0405 Item 37,
change the Repeat
Redial Enable Time.
Yes
Do you change the
Service Code for Common
Canceling code?
Yes
Stop
¾ 63 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Automatic Repeat Dialing (Cont'd)
Related Features
Last Number Dialing / Save Last Number Dialing
An extension user can quickly redial their last call.
Operation
To use Automatic Repeat Dialing (if the outside party you call is unavailable
or busy):
1. Place Trunk call.
Listen for busy tone or ring-no-answer.
2. Press DC.
3. Press LND.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
The system periodically redials the call.
To cancel Automatic Repeat Dialing:
1. Do not lift handset.
Lifting the handset cancels Automatic Repeat Dialing.
2. Press DC.
3. Press LND.
See also Last Number Dialing.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720, these features are cancelled at same time, DND,
Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text Message.
¾ 64 ¾
BGM (Background Music)
Description
BGM (Background Music) sends music from a customer-provided music source to
speakers on the keyphone. If a station user activates it, BGM is played whenever the station
is in on-hook condition.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and external paging speaker.
(Background Music requires a customer-provided music source to be connected to the
32CPRU (for dX-Z96) or 24CPRU (for dX-Z24). Refer to the system Hardware Manual.)
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows BGM.
- Service Code of BGM is dial 825.
<Note> For dX-Z24 system, BGM function is not allowed as default. For the activation,
refer to dX-Z24 Hardware Manual page 5-12.
Options
DX2E-4PGDU-S1 (if BGM is sent from external speaker)
Programming
> 0108 - Service Tone Setup, Tone 18: BGM (Back Ground Music) <For dX-Z24 only>
Change Time slot number from 29 to “28”.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 53: BGM (Back Ground Music)
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from turning
Background Music on and off.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 52: BGM
Assign service code of BGM.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 65 ¾
BGM (Background Music) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Is your system
Yes
In 0108 Tone18,
change Time Slot No
from 29 to 28.
dX-Z24?
No
In Program
0406 Item 53,
enter 0.
Off
Should extension be allowed
to turn Background Music
on and off?
On
In Program
0406 Item 53,
enter 1.
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Background Music
setting and cancel?
No
Stop
¾ 66 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
BGM (Background Music) (Cont'd)
Related Features
Music on Hold
The system can broadcast music to callers on Hold.
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1. Press idle CL key,
2. Dial 825(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 67 ¾
Break-In
Description
Break In permits an extension user to break into another extension user's call on the handset
or speaker (in case of handsfree) verbally.
There are two Break In modes: Monitor Mode and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode, the
caller Break In can listen to another user's conversation but cannot participate. With Speech
Mode, the caller Break In can listen and join to the conversation established. For the
Speech mode, it is programmable either to send the intrusion tone or not.
CAUTION
Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature
may be interpretted as an invasion of privacy.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Intrusion (warning) tone is provided.
- Break In Speech Mode enabled.
- Break In Monitor Mode disabled.
- Class of Service allows extensions to initiate and receive Break In.
- Service Code of Break In is dial 810.
Options
None
¾ 68 ¾
Break In (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In Program
0406 Item 65,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be
allowed to initiate Break In?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 65,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 66,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be
allowed to receive Break In?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 66,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 44,
enter 0.
Speech
Should Break In use Speech
Mode or Monitor Mode?
Monitor
In Program
0406 Item 44,
enter 1.
In Program
0401 Item 5,
enter 0.
No
Should extension being Break Yes
In on hear warning tones?
In Program
0401 Item 5,
enter 1.
In Program 1005, Assign a
Class of Service to an
extension.
Yes
Should extension have onebutton access to Break In?
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Break In setting and
cancel?
Yes
In Program 1006,
assign a function key
as a Break In key
(code 1019).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
Break In?
No
Stop
¾ 69 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512 Service
No. 2, assign a One
Digit Service Code for
Break In.
Break In (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 5: Intrusion Tone
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Break In Tone on the Speech mode.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 44: Break In Monitor Mode
In an extension's Class of Service, Monitor mode (1) or Speech mode (0) the Break In
Speech Mode at the initiating extension (i.e., Break In initiator).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 65: Break In
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the Break In at the initiating
extension (i.e., Break In initiator).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 66: Broken In
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the Break In at the receiving
extension (i.e., Broken In).
> 0511 Service Code Setup, Part A Item 61: Break in
Assign a service code for Break In (default code 810)
> 0512 One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No.2 Break in
Assign a One-Digit Service Code for Break In.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Break In (code 1019).
Related Features
Conference
An extension user cannot Break In on Conference mode.
Intercom
An extension user cannot Break In on an Intercom call of the Intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answer back. Both Intercom parties must have either lifted the handset or
pressed SPK.
Intercom Off-hook Signaling / Voice Over
If the system provides Automatic Override (0406-Item6=1), an extension caller cannot
Break in to the busy keyphone unless the called keyphone is being received the 2nd call in
the time It means both CL1 and CL2 should be busy at the receiving side for the Break In
attempt.
Privacy (Data)
Privacy blocks Bleak In attempts
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Break In operation.
¾ 70 ¾
Break In (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To Break In on a conversation in progress:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Press Break In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1019).
OR
Dial 810(
).
OR
Dial One Digit Service Code (
).
<Single Line Telephone>
To Break In on a conversation in progress:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 810(
).
OR
Dial One Digit Service Code (
).
¾ 71 ¾
Caller-ID
Description
In case of receiving the Caller-ID information from public network on the incoming trunk,
the system can indicate the information on the keyphones’ display and SMDR output.
The system supports both Caller-ID reception from ISDN trunk and analogue trunk with
Bellcore specification.
For more details, refer to separate issue of Caller-ID manuals.
¾ 72 ¾
Call Forward
Description
Call Forward permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension. Call
Forward ensures that the user's calls are covered when they are away from their work area.
There are four types of Call Forward for internal usage:
l Call Forward
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
l Call Forward with Dual Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the
forwarded extension ring.
l Busy Transfer
Calls forward only when the extension is busy.
l
Unanswered Call Transfer
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
Calls Forward reroutes calls from the initiating (forwarding) extension. To reroute calls
from the destination extension, use Call Forward with Forward with Follow Me.
Additionally, the feature that a call forwards to an external party is provided. For the
details, refer to External Call Forward.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
(Note) The system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension
216 forwards to 218, and 218 in turn forwards to 220. However, the calls to 216
don’t route to 220.
Default Setting
- Delayed Call Forward interval is 10 seconds.
- Extension users can activate Call Forward Immediate, Both Ringing, When Busy and
When Unanswered.
- Service Code of Call forward with dual ring is dial 842.
- Service Code of Busy transfer is dial 843.
- Service Code of Unanswered call transfer is dial 845.
- Service Code of Call forward is dial 848.
Options
None
¾ 73 ¾
Call Forward (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 30,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Call Forward
(Service Code 848)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 30,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button
access, in 1006 assign a
Call Forward (code 1055).
In 0406 Item 23,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able to
use Call Forward with Dual
Ringing (Service Code 842)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 23,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button
access, in 1006 assign a
Call Forward with dual
Ringing key (code 1000).
In 0406 Item 31,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Busy Transfer
(Service Code 843)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 31,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button
access, in 1006 assign a
Busy Transfer key
(code 1002).
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 74 ¾
Call Forward (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0406 Item 32,
enter 0.
No
Should an Extension be able to
use Unanswered Call Transfer
(Service Code 845)?
Yes
In 0405 Item 1, set the
Delayed Call Forward
Time. Unanswered calls
transfer after this interval.
In 0406 Item 32,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button
access, in 1006 assign a
Unanswered Call Transfer
key (code 1002).
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Do you change the Service
Code for Call Forward, Call
Forward with Dual Ring,
Busy Transfer, Unanswered
Call Transfer and Common
Canceling code?
No
Stop
¾ 75 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Call Forward (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 1: Delayed Call Forward Time
Set the Delayed Call Forward interval.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 23: Call Transferring with both rings
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set
Call Forward with Both Ringing (Service Code 842).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 31: Call Transfer When Busy
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set
Call Forward when Busy (Service Code 843).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 32: Unanswered Call Transfer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set
Call Forward when Unanswered (Service Code 845).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Assign a service code for:
- Call Forward with Both Rings (Item 3: dial 842)
- Unanswered Call Transfer (Item 62: dial 845)
- Busy Transfer (Item 63: dial 843)
- Call Forward (Item 85 dial 848)
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B
Assign a service code for Common Canceling Service Code.
(Item 10: dial 720)
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for:
- Call Forward with Both Ringing (code 1000)
- Busy Transfer (code 1002)
- Unanswered Call Transfer (code 1003)
- Call Forward (code 1055)
¾ 76 ¾
Call Forward (Cont'd)
Related Features
Group Hunt
An extension user cannot forward their calls to a Department number.
Do Not Disturb
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from
forwarding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND
option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Call Forward operation.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate or cancel Call Forward:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial Call Forward code:
842 (
) for Call Forward with Dual Ringing
Transfers ring destination immediately
Intercom calls ring both extensions
Calls do not forward when extension busy
843 (
) for Busy Transfer
845 (
) for unanswered Call Transfer
848 (
) for Call Forward
OR
Press Call Forward key.
PCM 1006 or 851: code 1000 for Forward with Dual Ringing.
PGM 1006 or 851; code 1002 for Busy Transfer.
PGM 1006 or 851: code 1003 for Unanswered transfer.
PCM 1006 or 851: code 1055 for Forward All Calls Immediately.
When you enable Call Forward, your Call Forward key flashes slowly.
3. Dial 1 plus extension to enable; dial 0 to disable.
Your Call Forward destination must be an installed extension. It cannot be a
Department Group pilot number.
Once you activate Call Forward, only your Call Forward destination can place an
Intercom call to you.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 77 ¾
Call Forward (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To cancel Call Forward:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel Call Forward by dial 720, these features are canceled at same time:
Alarm Clock, DND, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text Message
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate or cancel Call Forward:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial Call Forward code:
842 (
) for Call Forward with Dual Ringing
Transfers ring destination immediately
Intercom calls ring both extensions
Calls do not forward when extension busy
843 (
) for Busy Transfer
845 (
) for unanswered Call Transfer
848 (
) for Call Forward
3. Dial 1 plus extension to enable; dial 0 to disable.
(Confirmation tone is heard)
Your Call Forward destination must be an installed extension. It cannot be a
Department Group pilot number.
One you activate Call Forward, only your Call Forward destination can place an
Intercom call to you.
4. On hook.
To cancel Call Forward:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 720(
3. On hook.
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
When you cancel Call Forward by dial 720, these features are canceled at same time:
Alarm Clock, DND, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text Message
¾ 78 ¾
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU)
Description
Call Forward with Personal Messages permits an extension user to redirect their call to
another extension with message.
There are four types of Call forward with personal message:
l
Call Forward
All calls forward immediately to destination, and only the destination rings.
l
Busy Transfer
Call forward only when the extension is busy.
l
Unanswered Call Transfer
Calls forward only if the extension is unanswered in certain period (Ring No Answer).
l
Busy or Unanswered Call Transfer
Calls forward when the extension is busy or unanswered.
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A module
VAU Expansion Board
¾ 79 ¾
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU)
Programming
Start
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 1.
No
Should extension be able
to use Call Forward with
Personal Message?
Yes
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 0.
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 1.
If the all VAU path are busy
In 2204, enter 0 to
does not allow the
transfer.
No
When DUD/DISA has a incoming Yes
call, does the system allow
automatic transfer to incoming ring
group?
In 2204, enter the
transfer ring group
number.
In 0405 Item 63, enter
DUD/DISA calling set
transferring interval, when
VAU path are busy.
Does the all VAU personal
message clear?
No
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 80 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 31,
enter 1.
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Does the system allow
the Call forward with
personal message for an
adequate duration?
No
In 2202 Item 2, change
the message length.
Yes
Do you change the
Service Code for
Call Forward with
Personal Greeting
Message
Yes
No
Stop
¾ 81 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 31: VAU fixed message
Set the use (0) or not use (1) VAU fixed message for VAU feature.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 63: VAU no-answer time (VAU)
Set the waiting time (0 - 64800 seconds) of automatic answer for incoming call, when
All VAU paths are busy. If all VAU paths are busy while waiting time, incoming call
transfer to transferring ring group (CMD 2204).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 99: Personal greeting message (VAU)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to
use the Call forward with personal message.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B,
Item 3: Call Forward with personal greeting (VAU)
Assign a service code for Call Forward with personal greeting (VAU).
> 2201 - VAU Reset
When you use to erase the VAU Personal Message and VAU Message.
> 2202 - Message Length Assignment for VAU
Set the maximum length of message length for VAU Message and Personal Message.
> 2204 - Transfer Ring Group Setup When VAU No Answer
Assign a transfer ring group number, when VAU path are busy for DUD/DISA caller.
Related Features
Preview Dial
When you use VAU Adaptor, you can use Preview Dial feature after dial *.
¾ 82 ¾
Call Forward with Personal Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate the Call forward with personal message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 713(
)
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Greeting Message.
Dials the destination extension number.
Dial Call Forward condition:
1: Busy
2: No-answer
3: Busy/No-answer
4: Always
7. Dial forwarding type:
1: All incoming calls
2: Trunk incoming calls only
3: Extension incoming calls only
8. Press SPK to hang up (finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: 5-a of "To operate").
OR
Dial 5 (listen: 5-b of "To operate").
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: 5-c of "To operate").
¾ 83 ¾
Call forward with personal message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> <Cont'd>
To operate the Call forward with personal message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-b. Dial 5 (listen).
5-b. Hear recorded Personal Greeting Message.
6-b. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
Dial 7 (re-record)
Hear "Please start recording".
Recording Personal Greeting Message.
Dial the destination extension number.
Dial Call Forward condition :
1: Busy
2: No-answer
3: Busy/No-answer
4: Always
9-c. Dial forwarding type :
1: All incoming calls
2: Trunk incoming calls only
3: Extension incoming calls only
10-c. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 84 ¾
Call forward with personal message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate the Call forward with personal message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Off hook.
Dial 713(
)
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Greeting Message.
Dial the destination extension number.
Dial Call Forward condition :
1: Busy
2: No-answer
3: Busy/No-answer
4: Always
7. Dial forwarding type :
1: All incoming calls
2: Trunk incoming calls only
3: Extension incoming calls only
8. On hook.
To operate the Call forward with personal message:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. On hook (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-b. Dial 5 (listen).
5-b. Hear recorded Personal Greeting Message.
6-b. On hook (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
¾ 85 ¾
Call forward with personal message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To operate the Call forward with personal message:
(Cont'd)
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
Dial 7 (re-record)
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message.
Dials destination extension number.
Dial Call Forward condition :
1 : Busy
2 : No-answer
3: Busy/No-answer
4 : Always
9-c. Dial forwarding type :
1 : All incoming calls
2 : Trunk incoming calls only
3 : Extension incoming calls only
10-c. On hook (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 86 ¾
Call Pickup
Description
Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup
Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other's calls.
The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Call
Pickup key.
With Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following types of calls:
Feature
Description
SVC
CODE
DIAL
ICM
ICM
CFWD
NORMAL
TRK
RING
TRK
CFWD
TRFR
X
X
Direct Call Pickup
856
X
X
Call Pickup
867
X
X
X
X
X
Call Pickup for
specified group
868
X
X
X
X
X
Call Pickup for
another group
869
X
X
X
X
X
Direct extension
call pickup
715
X
X
X
X
X
GR#
EX#
SVC CODE: Service Code, ICM CFWD: Intercom Call Forward
TRK RING: Trunk Ring,
TRK CFWD: Trunk Call Forward,
TRFR: Transfer GR#: Group Number, EX#: Extension Number
Conditions
This feature available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone.
¾ 87 ¾
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service permits using Service Codes 715, 867, 868, 869 and 856.
- An extension's Class of Service causes telephone display to show the pickup group
intercepted, not the Trunk.
- To Group Call Pickup keys assigned.
- All extensions are in pickup group 1.
- Service Code of Call Pickup of same call pickup group is dial 867.
- Service Code of Call Pickup for another group is dial 869.
- Service Code of Call Pickup for specified group is dial 868.
- Service Code of Direct call pickup - own group is dial 856.
- Service Code of Direct extension call pickup is dial 715.
Options
None
¾ 88 ¾
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 1012, assign
extensions to Pickup
Group 0.
In 0406 Item 63,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 8,
enter 0.
In 1006, make sure a
function key is not
assigned code 1007.
In 0406 Item 9,
enter 0.
In 1006, make sure a
function key is not
assigned code 1008.
No
No
No
No
No
No
Should extension be in a
Pickup Group?
Should extension have to
ability to be call pickup
by another extension?
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing their
own Pickup Group
(Service Code 867)?
Should extension have
one-button pickup for calls
ringing their own Pickup
Group?
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing another
(unknown) Pickup Group
(Service Code 869)?
Should extension have
one-button pickup for calls
ringing another (unknown)
Pickup Group?
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 89 ¾
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
In 1012, assign
extensions to Pickup
Groups (8 max).
In 0406 Item 63,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 8,
enter 1.
In 1006, assign
a function key
(code 1007).
Use Service Code 869 when the ringing
Pickup Group number is unknown.
Yes
Yes
In 0406 Item 9,
enter 1.
In 1006, assign
a function key
(code 1008).
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
In 0406 Item 10,
enter 0.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key (code 1009
+ Pickup Group number).
In 0406 Item 51,
enter 0.
No
No
Trunk
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing in
another (known) Pickup
Group (Service Code 868)?
Should extension have
one-button pickup for calls
ringing another (known)
pickup Group?
After picking up a call should
extension’s display show
number of trunk intercepted
or Pickup Group?
Use Service Code 868 when the
ringing group number is known.
Yes
Yes
In 0406 Item 10,
enter 1.
In 1006, assign a function
key (code 1009 + Pickup
Group number).
Pickup
Group
In 0406 Item 51,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Do you change the Service
Code for Call pickup for
specified group, Call pickup,
Call pickup for another
group and Specified
extension call pickup?
No
Stop
¾ 90 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 8: Call Pick Up
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to pick
up calls ringing their pickup group (Service Code 867).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 9: Call Pick up for another group
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
pickup calls ringing telephones that are not in their pickup group (Service Code 869).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 10: Call Pick up for specified group
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
pickup calls ringing a specific group (Service Code 869).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 51: Call Pick up information display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's Call Pickup
display. If disabled, extension's display shows the number of the Trunk intercepted, not
the pickup group.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 63: Call Pick Upped
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to be
Call Pick Upped.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 8: Call pick up for specified group
Assign service code of call pick up for specified group.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 16: Call pick up
Assign service code of call pick up.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 17: Call pick up for another group
Assign service code of call pick up for another group.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 95: Direct call pick up
Assign service code of direct call pick up.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B
Item 5: Direct extension call pickup
Assign service code of direct extension call pickup.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 91 ¾
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign Call Pickup keys:
Code 1007 for an extension's own Pickup Group (Service Code 867)
Code 1008 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group
(Service Code 869)
- used when the caller doesn't know the group number
Code 1009 (+Group Number) for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup Group
(Service Code 868)
> 1012 - Call Pickup Group
Assign extensions to call pickup groups far each extension port.
Related Features
None
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1007).
OR
Dial 867(
).
To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don't
know the group number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1008).
OR
Dial 869(
).
To answer a call ringing a phone in Pickup Specified Group:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1009).
OR
Dial 868(
) and the group number (1-8).
To answer a call ringing a phone without incoming Trunk in your Pickup
Group:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 856(
).
¾ 92 ¾
Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To answer a call ringing a specified extension:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 715 (
) and specified extension number.
<Single Line Telephone>
To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 867(
).
To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don't
know the group number:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 869(
).
To answer a call ringing a phone in Pickup Specified Group:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 868(
) and the group number (1-8).
To answer a call ringing a phone without incoming Trunk in your Pickup
Group:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 856(
).
To answer a call ringing a specified extension:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 715 (
) and specified extension number.
¾ 93 ¾
Call Timer
Description
Call Timer lets a keyset user time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps
users that must keep track of their time on the phone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call
Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call. For outgoing trunk calls, the Call Timer
starts about 10 seconds (PGM 0405 Item 30) after the user dials the last digit. However, if
Polarity Reverse Signal is detected from the network side, then the Call Timer starts
immediately.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
Default Setting
An extension's Class of Service allows using the Call Timer.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 46: Call Duration display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use the
Call Timer.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Item24: Answering Condition
Enter 0 to start the Call Timer only when Polarity Reverse Signal is detected from network.
Enter 1 to start call timer either trunk inter-digit time over or the reception of Polarity
Reverse Signal whichever comes faster.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Disabling the trunk name seizes display (Program 0406: Item 37=0) also disables the Call
Timer.
Operation
<Key Telephone with Display>
To time your trunk calls:
1. Place trunk call. The timer starts automatically.
¾ 94 ¾
Call Timer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 46,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Call Timer?
In 0901 Item 24,
enter 1.
No
Should the Call Timer
start only when Polarity
Reverse Signal is detected?
Check the timer
in 0405 Timer 30
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 95 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 46,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0901 Item 24,
enter 0.
Camp On
Description
Camp On / Callback – Extension
When an extension user calls a busy extension, the user may leave a Callback request for a
return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the busy extension back, hoping to
find it idle or automatic recall.
The system processes Camp On/Callback requests as follows:
1. Caller at extension A leaves a Camp On/Callback at busy extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.
2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.
If caller A doesn't answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Camp
On/Callback.
4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring.
When Callback Automatic Answer Callback is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring
when they lift the handset. When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must
press the ringing CL key appearance to answer the Callback ring.
Camp On / Callback – Trunk
Callback - Trunk permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy
Trunk or Trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as
the Trunk is available. The user does not have to manually retry their call later.
Camp On/Callback - Trunk lets the caller know when the call can go through. If the
extension user does not answer the Camp On/Callback - Trunk ring, the system cancels the
queue request.
With Camp On - Trunk, an extension user can queue (wait in line) off hook for a busy
Trunk or Trunk group to become free. The call goes through immediately when the Trunk
becomes free. As with Camp On - Trunk, the user does not have to manually retry their
call later.
Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same Trunk or
Trunk group. When a Trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order
that the requests were left.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
(An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time)
¾ 96 ¾
Camp On (Cont’d)
Default Setting
- Calling Automatic Answer enabled.
- Callback ring is 15 seconds long.
- The system cancels Callback requests after 64800 seconds.
- Callback key not assigned.
- An extension’s Class of Service allows Camp On/Callback.
- Service Code of Camp On/Callback is dial 850.
- Service Code of Cancel Camp On/Callback is 870.
Options
None
¾ 97 ¾
Camp On (Cont’d)
Programming (for Callback-Extension)
Start
In 0406 Item 24,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able Camp
On/Callback a busy extension?
Yes
In 0406 Item 24,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0401 Item 14,
enter 0.
No
Should users be able to just
lift the handset to answer the
Callback ring?
Yes
In 0401 Item 14,
enter 1.
In 0405 Item 6, set
how long Callback
rings an extension.
In 0405 Item 29,
enter the interval
after which the
system cancels
Callback requests.
This key is also used for
Camp On/Callback.
Should extension
have one-button
Camp On?
Yes
In 1006, assign a Camp
On key (code 1020).
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Camp On/Callback?
No
Stop
¾ 98 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Camp On (Cont'd)
Programming (for Callback-Trunk) (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 25,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
allowed to use Camp
On/Callback - Trunk
(Service Code 850)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 25,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0401 Item 14,
enter 0.
No
Should users be able to
just lift the handset to
answer the Callback ring?
Yes
0401 Item 14,
enter 1.
In 0405 Item 6, set
how long Callback
rings an extension.
In 1006, do not
assign a function
key for Camp On
(code 1020).
No
Should extension have
one-button Camp On
/Callback - Trunk
operation?
When Callback Trunk
an extension callback,
does it ring for an
adequate time?
Yes
No
In 1006, assign
a function key
for Camp On
(code 1020).
In 0405 Item 26, change
Callback Trunk
Callback Time.
Yes
Does the system wait an
adequate time before
canceling Callbacks/Camp
On that cannot go through?
Yes
Stop
¾ 99 ¾
No
In 0405 Item 29, change
the Callback-Trunk
Cancel Time.
Camp On (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 14: Call-Back automatic answer
Enable (1) or disable (0) callback Automatic Answer.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 6: callback ring duration timer Set the duration of the
callback ring (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 26: Camp-on Trunk callback time
Set the Camp On - Trunk Callback time (0-648000 seconds). Camp On Trunk Callback
ring an extension for this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 29: Camp-On Cancel Time
The system cancels callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0-64800
seconds).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 24: Camp On Extension.
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
the Camp On/Callback - Extension.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 25: Camp-on Trunk
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Camp On - Trunk.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 20: Camp On
Assign a Service Code for Camp On/Callback.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 21: Cancel Camp On
Assign a Service Code for Cancel Camp on.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Camp-On (code 1020). This key is also the Camp-On key.
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.
¾ 100 ¾
Camp On (Cont'd)
Operation
Callback – Extension
<Key Telephone>
To place a Callback - Extension:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 850(
) or press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Hang up.
4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.
If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the
formerly busy extension when you lift the handset. If you don't have Callback
Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing CL key appearance to place the call.
To place a Camp On - Extension:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 850(
) or press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Do not hang up.
To cancel a Camp On/Callback - Extension:
1. Press idle CL key and Dial 870(
).
OR
Press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a Callback - Extension:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 850(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Hang up.
4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.
¾ 101 ¾
Camp On (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
Callback – Extension
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a Camp On - Extension:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 850(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Do not hang up.
To cancel a Camp On/Callback - Extension:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 870(
3. On hook.
).
Callback – Trunk
<Key Telephone>
To queue for a busy Trunk:
1. Try to access busy Trunk.
2. Dial 850(
) or press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Hang up to leave a Callback request.
OR
Wait off-hook to Camp On to the Trunk.
To answer when Callback - Trunk calls you back:
1. Lift handset.
To cancel a Camp On/Callback - Trunk request:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 870(
).
OR
Press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 102 ¾
Camp On (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
Callback – Trunk
<Single Line Telephone>
To queue for a busy Trunk:
1. Try to access busy Trunk.
2. Dial 850(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Hang up to leave a Callback request.
OR
Wait off-hook to Camp On to the Trunk.
To answer when Callback - Trunk calls you back:
1. Lift handset.
To cancel a Camp On/Callback - Trunk request:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 870(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. On hook.
¾ 103 ¾
Class of Service
Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for
extensions. The system allows 10 Classes of Service, and any number of extensions can
share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a different Class of Service for
each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of dialing options for
daytime operation, night time operation, midnight time option and even during lunch
breaks.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
All extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
See the chart on the next page for the default setting on the individual options.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options
Set the options in a Class of Service.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to extension.
Related Features
Night Service
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each service mode
Service mode: Day, Night, Midnight or Rest.
Operation
Refer to the individual features on the next page.
¾ 104 ¾
Class of Service (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Stop
No
Do you want to change a
Class of Service option?
Find the COS Option (Item)
on the chart and review the
associated feature.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 105 ¾
Yes
Refer to the COS
Options chart on the
following page.
In 0406, change the
data for the option
as required.
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 1 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
1
Hook/Flash
On/off Hook/flash for S.L.T.
Hook/Flash
1: on
2
Manual night
service switching
On/off an extension's ability to use
manual Night Service Switching
Night Service
0: off
3
Long conversation
Alarm
On/off the Warning Tone for Long
Conversation
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
1: on
4
DND/Call Forward
override (Bypass
call)
On/off an extension's ability to use Call
Forward/DND Override
Call Forward/DND
Override
1: on
5
Override
Allows/prevents an Intercom caller from
sending off Hook signaling tones to a
busy extension
Override
1: on
6
Automatic override
Allows/prevents an extension busy on a
call from receiving override
Override
0: off
7
Data privacy
On/off an extension's ability to switch
privacy at their extension
Privacy (Data)
1: on
8
Call pink up
On/off Call Pickup for calls ringing an
extension's own Pickup Group
(Service Code 867)
Call Pickup
1: on
9
Call pick up for
another group
On/off Call Pickup for calls ringing
outside a group (Service Code 869)
Call Pickup
1: on
10
Call pick up for
specified group
On/off Call Pickup for ringing a specified
group (Service Code 868)
Call Pickup
1: on
11
Ring inward transfer On/off an extension's ability to use Ring
inward transfer
Transfer
1: on
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 106 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 2 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
12
Do not disturb
On/off an extension's ability to use Do
Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
1: on
13
Intercom
abandoned call
display
On/off an extension’s Intercom
Abandoned Call Display
Intercom
Abandoned Call
Display
1: on
14
Meet me answer
On/off an extension’s ability to use Meet
Me Answer
Conference Meet
Me Paging
Conference
1: on
15
Message waiting
On/off an extension’s ability to leave
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
1: on
16
Conference
On/off an extension's ability to initiate a
Conference or Meet Me Paging
Conference
Conference Meet
Me Paging
Conference
1: on
17
Privacy Release
On/off an extension’s ability to initiate a
Privacy Release
Privacy Release
1: on
18
Common/group
abbreviated dial
registration
On/off an extension’s ability to store
Abbreviated Dialing numbers
abbreviated
Dialing
1: on
19
Common
abbreviated dialing
On/off an extension's ability to use
Common Abbreviated Dialing
abbreviated
Dialing
1: on
20
Group abbreviated
dialing
On/off an extension's ability to use Group abbreviated
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing
1: on
21
Department group
step call
On/off an extension's ability to use
Department Group Step Calling
Department Group
Step Calling
1: on
22
External paging
On/off an extension’s ability make an
External Page
Paging, External
1: on
23
Call Forward-dual
ring
On/off an extension's ability active Call
Forward with dual ring
(Service Code 842)
Call Forward
1: on
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 107 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 3 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
24
Camp-on extension
On/off an extension's ability to dial
Service Code 850 for a Camp On or
Callback
Camp On/
CallbackExtension
1: on
25
Camp-on Trunk
On/off an extension's ability to Camp On
to a busy Trunk
Camp On-Trunk
1: on
26
Follow-me
On/off an extension's ability to initiate
Follow Me
Follow Me
1: on
27
Alarm clock
On/off an extension's ability to set an
alarm
Alarm Clock
1: on
28
-- Not Used --
29
-- Not Used --
30
Call transfer
On/off an extension's ability to use Call
Forward
Call Forward
1: on
31
Busy transfer
On/off an extension's ability to use Busy
transfer (Service Code 843)
Call Forward
1: on
32
Unanswered call
transfer
On/off an extension's ability to use
Unanswered call transfer
(Service Code 845)
Call Forward
1: on
33
Toll restriction
override
On/off an extension's ability to use Toll
restriction override
Toll Restriction
Override
1: on
34
Transfer without
holding
On/off an extension's ability to use
Transfer without holding
Transfer
1: on
35
Group hold
On/off an extension's ability to initiate a
Group hold
Hold
1: on
36
Group hold answer
On/off an extension's ability to pick up a
call on Group hold
Hold
1: on
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 108 ¾
Is used with...
Default
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 4 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
37
Trunk No. and
name display
(seizing)
On/off the displaying of a Trunk's
name/number when the user seizes the
Trunk
Trunk Outgoing
Call Name Storing
1: on
38
Trunk No. and
name display
(incoming)
On/off the displaying of a Trunk's
name/number when the Trunk is ringing
Trunk Incoming
Call Name Storing
1: on
39
Extension No. and
name display
(conversation)
On/off the displaying of the incoming
Intercom caller's name/number after
answer
Intercom Name
Storing
1: on
40
Extension No. and
name display
(incoming)
On/off the pre-answer display of the
incoming Intercom caller's name and
number
Intercom Name
Storing
1: on
41
Intercom hotline
On/off Hotline-Off Hook Access for
extensions with this COS
Hot Line-Off Hook
Access
0: off
42
Transfer information On/off an extension's incoming Transfer
display
pre-answer display
Transfer
1: on
43
-- Not used --
44
Break In Monitor
mode
Set the extension’s Break In Monitor
mode (0 for Break In, 1 for Monitor)
Break In
0: off
45
Changing of music
on hold tone
On/off an extension's ability to change
the music on hold tone
Music on Hold
0: off
46
Call duration timer
On/off an extension's Call duration timer
Call Timer
1: on
47
Memo dial
On/off an extension's ability to use Memo Memo Dial
Dial
1: on
48
Last number redial
On/off an extension's ability to use Last
number redial
Last Number
Redial
1: on
49
Saved number
redial
On/off an extension's ability to use Save
Number Redial
Save Number
Redial
1: on
50
Preset dial
On/off an extension's ability to use
Preview Dial
Preview Dial
1: on
51
Call pick up
information display
On/off an extension's Call Pickup display Call Pickup
1: on
52
Internal group
paging
On/off an extension's ability to use
Internal Paging
Paging, Internal
1: on
53
BGM (Back Ground
Music)
On/off an extension's ability to turn
Background Music on and off (Service
Code 825)
Background Music
1: on
54
Room monitoring
On/off an extension's ability to initiate
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
0: off
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 109 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 5 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
55
Room monitored
On/off an extension's ability to be
monitored
Room Monitor
0: off
56
Key touch tone
Allow/prevent and extension from on/off
the Key Touch Tone
Key Touch Tone
1: on
57
DTMF signal
On/off an extension's ability to use
Continued Dialing
sending while
talking on extension
Continued Dialing
1: on
58
Connected line
identification
(COLP)
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
COLP information in the LCD
ISDN Capability
0:off
59
Ringing tone
Selection
On/off an extension's ability to change
the incoming ring tones
Selectable Ring
Tones
1: on
60
SLT room monitor
On/off an extension’s ability to use room
monitor by SLT
Room Monitor
0: off
61
Intercom calls
On/off Intercom calling for the extension
Intercom
1: on
62
Trunk outgoing
On/off Trunk calling for the extension
Trunk Outgoing
Call
1: on
63
Call Pick upped
On/off an extension's ability to pick up a
call ringing into a Pickup Group (Service
Code 867 and 868)
Call Pickup
1: on
64
Pilot number called
extension
On/off an extension's ability to call a
department number
Group Hunt
1: on
65
Break In
ON/off break In at the initiating extension Break In
1: on
66
Broken In
Blocks/Allows Break In at the initiating
extension
Break In
1: on
67
Buzzer
On/off an extension's ability to use
Secretary Call
Secretary Call
1: on
68
Setting of
signal/voice called
Allows/prevents an extension’s ability to
set signal-called mode (s/c: 823) and
voice-called mode (s/c: 821)
Intercom
1: on
69
Programmable
function key
programming
On/off programmable and extension's
ability to program their function keys
Programmable
Function Key
1: on
70
DCI auto answer
On/off an extension's ability to set the
DCI auto answer mode (Service Code
883)
Data
Communications
1: on
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 110 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 6 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
71
Time and date
setting
On/off an extension’s ability to set the
Time and Date
Time and Date
1: on
72
Switching of
signal/voice call
Allows/prevents an extension's ability to
switch the calling mode from voice to
signal or vise versa
Intercom
1: on
73
Microphone cutoff
On/off an extension’s ability to use
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
1: on
74
Repeat redial
On/off an extension’s ability to use
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
1: on
75
Text message
On/off an extension’s ability to use Text
Message
Text Message
1: on
76
Automatic on hook
transfer
On/off an extension’s ability to use
Automatic on hook transfer
Transfer
1: on
77
Automatic on-hook
transfer (Park Hold)
Transfer
On/off an extension’s ability to use
Automatic on hook transfer for Park Hold
1: on
78
-- Not Used --
79
External Call
Forward
On/off an extension’s ability to set
External Call Forward
External Call
Forward
0: off
80
Calling number
identification (CLIP)
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
CLIP information on the LCD
ISDN Capability
1: on
81
Advice of charge
(AOC)
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
AOC information on the LCD
ISDN Capability
1: on
82
Cost display
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
the cost information through TTU on the
LCD
TTU
0 off
83
Sub address
identification
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
sub-address information on the LCD
ISDN Capability
0 off
84
Account code
service
On/off an extension’s ability to enter
Account Codes
Account Codes
0: off
85
Extension name
program
On/off an extension’s ability to program
its name
Name Storing
1: on
86
Checking incoming
ring tone
On/off an extension’s ability to check the
Selectable Ring Tone
Selectable Ring
Tone
0: off
87
Notification of
Temporary Memory
existence
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
Temporary Memory existence during
absence/busy
Caller-ID
1: on
88
Display the detail
state of called party
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
“busy status” of B(internal) -party
Alphanumeric
Display
0: off
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 111 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 7 of 8)
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
Default
89
-- Not Used --
90
-- Not Used --
91
Operator transfer
after hold callback
On/off an extension’s ability to use
automatic transfer to operate after hold
callback
Intercom
0: off
92
Direct Call Pickup
- own group
On/off an extension’s ability to use direct
call pickup to own group
Call Pickup
1: on
93
Enable on hook
when holding (SLT)
On/off an SLT’s ability to use on hook
when holding
Hold
1: on
94
Answer on hook
when holding (SLT)
On/off an SLT’s ability to answer on hook Hold
when holding
1: on
95
Ringing Trunk name On/off the Ringing Trunk name display. If Transfer
display
“on”, second line of display shows recall
source.
0: off
96
Operation for VAU
massage
On/off an extension’s ability to operate
VAU messages
Automated
Attendant for DUD
and DISA
1: on
97
General message
playback
On/off an extension’s ability to listen
General massage (VAU)
General Message
1: on
98
General message
record and erase
On/off an extension’s ability to control
General message (VAU)
General Message
1: on
99
Personal greeting
message
On/off an extension’s ability to use
Personal greeting message (VAU)
Call Forward with
Personal Message
1: on
100
-- Not Used --
101
-- Not Used --
102
SMDR printout
accumulated
extension data
On/off an extension’s ability to output the SMDR
accumulated data per extension base
0: off
103
SMDR printout
accumulated STG
data
On/off an extension’s ability to output the SMDR
accumulated data per station group base
0: off
104
SMDR printout
accumulated
account code data
On/off an extension’s ability to output the SMDR
accumulated data per account code base
0: off
105
Group listening
service
On/off an extension’s ability to use Group Group Listening
Listening
0: off
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 112 ¾
Class of Service (Cont’d)
Class of Service Options, Program 0406 (Page 8 of 8)
Item
Name
106
-- Not Used --
107
Long conversation
cut-off for incoming
call
108
Long conversation
cut-off for outgoing
call
109-119
This option...
Is used with...
Default
On/off the long conversation automatic
cut-off for incoming Trunk.
Long Conversation
Cut-off
0: off
On/off the long conversation automatic
cut-off for outgoing Trunk.
Long Conversation
Cut-off
0: off
-- Not used --
120
Forced trunk
disconnect service
On/off an extension’s ability to use forced Forced Trunk
trunk disconnect service
Disconnect
0: off
121
Dial block
On/off an extension’s ability to use Dial
Block.
0: off
122
Trunk port disable
On/off an extension’s ability to use Trunk Trunk Port Disable
Port Disable.
123
Indicate Caller-ID
information
On/off an extension’s ability to indicate
Caller-ID information on the LCD
Caller-ID
1: on
124
Edit Caller-ID table
On/off an extension’s ability to edit
Caller-ID table
Caller-ID
1: on
125
Incoming, holding
answer by CL1/2
key
On/off an extension’s ability to answer
incoming/holding call by CL1 or CL2 key
Intercom
0: off
126
External incoming
answer with service
code
On/off an extension’s ability to answer
trunk incoming call by service code
Trunk incoming
Call
0: off
127
Protect for the call
mode switching
from caller
On/off an extension’s ability to protect the Intercom
call mode to be switched by the caller
(intercom)
128
-- Not Used --
Note: on ® Enable, off ® Disable
¾ 113 ¾
Dial Block
0: off
0: off
Condition Guidance Message (VAU)
Description
Condition Guidance Message gives key telephone users to listen date, time and own
extension number.
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A module
VAU Expansion Board
Programming
Start
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 1
No
Should extensions be able
to use Condition Guidance
Message?
Stop
Related Features
None
¾ 114 ¾
Yes
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 0
Condition Guidance Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Operation
To listen the date:
1. Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key.
2. Dial 3.
3. Listen date.
ex. "The day is Thursday seven fourteen ninety-nine."
(Thursday July 14 1999)
To listen the own extension number:
1. Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key.
2. Dial 6.
3. Listen extension number.
ex. "This is station Two-o-one." (201)
To listen the time:
1. Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key.
2. Dial 8.
3. Listen the time.
ex. "The time is eleven-five AM." (11:05AM)
¾ 115 ¾
Conference
Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their
conversation. With Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting
without leaving the office. The system allows either four or eight parties maximum per
conference. Up to two outside parties can be joined in Conference on analogue trunks.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- System allows four-party conferences.
- An extension's Class of Service allows initiating a Conference.
- Conference key not assigned.
- Service Code of Conference is dial 826.
Options
None
¾ 116 ¾
Conference (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
8-party
In 0302 Item 2, enter 1.
In 0406 Item 16, enter
0 to prevent initiating
Conference.
No
Should the system
allow eight 4-party
conferences or four 8party conferences?
4-party
Should an extension
be allowed to initiate a
Conference?
Yes
In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
In 0406 Item 16, enter
1 to allow initiating
Conference.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, assign a function key
as a Conference key (code 1016).
Do you change the
Service Code for
Conference?
No
Stop
¾ 117 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Conference (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference mode
Set the Conference mode. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences (0) or 4
eight-party conferences (1).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 16: Conference
In an extension's Class of Service, enables (1) or disable (O) the extension's ability to
initiate a Conference.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 24: Conference
Assign a Service Code for Conference.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function keys
Assign a function key for Conference (code 1016).
Related Features
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
Programmable Function Key
In order for keyset to have conference, it must have a conference function key.
Unsupervised Conference
After the conference call is established, the extension user can quit from the mode.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To establish a Conference:
1. Establish Intercom or Trunk call.
2. Press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
3. Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access outside call.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group
code.
4. When called party answers, press Conference key twice.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.
¾ 118 ¾
Conference (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To establish a Conference (Cont'd):
1. Establish Intercom or Trunk call.
2. Dial 826(
).
3. Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access outside call.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group
code.
4. When called party answers, press HOLD key twice.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:
1. Press HOLD key.
If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear
Music on Hold.
To hold all other parties in conference.
1. Press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2. Do not hang up.
To hold recall in conference.
1. Press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
<Single Line Telephone>
To establish a Conference:
1. Establish Intercom or Trunk call.
2. Hooking and 826(
).
3. Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access outside call.
To get the outside call, you can either dial specified line access code or dial a
trunk/trunk group access code.
4. When called party answers, hooking twice.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.
To hold all other parties in conference.
1. Hooking.
2. Do not hang up.
To hold recall in conference.
1. Hooking.
¾ 119 ¾
Continued Dialing
Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer
and then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail,
automatic banking.
There are two types of Continued Dialing;
· Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension's Class of Service, a keyset user may be able to dial additional
digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Special Extension connected to
SLT port, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension users dial the different options
after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users cannot access
these Voice Mail options.
· Continued Dialing far Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside
Automated Attendant. After the outside service answers, the user can dial digits for
whatever options the service allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system's Toll
Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Programming
below for additional information.
NOTICE
Continued Dialing may make the system more
susceptible to toll fraud
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and DTMF type single line telephone.
Since SLT set dial pad is always active, the system does not limit Intercom Continued
Dialing from these phones.
Default Setting
· Intercom Continued Dialing allowed.
· Toll Restriction allows Continued Dialing for Trunk calls.
· Continued Dialing detection port no setting.
¾ 120 ¾
Continued Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Is Continued Dialing
required for Intercom
calls?
Yes
Program 0406
Item 57
No
No
Program 1005
In 1001 <SLT> Item 5,
enter 1 to Continued
Dialing receiving
SLT port.
Is Continued Dialing
required for local
trunk calls?
Yes
Is Continued Dialing
required for DP type
Trunk?
Yes
Refer to Pulse to
Tone Conversion
feature.
No
Is Continued Dialing
required for long
distance trunk calls?
Yes
Program 0701
Item 3 and
0702 Item 3
Program 1004
Program 0701
Item 4 and
0702 Item 4
Program 1004
No
Stop
Refer to the Toll Restriction feature for more information.
¾ 121 ¾
Continued Dialing (Cont'd)
Options
None
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Programming Flowchart an the Following Page
> 0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options
Set the DP to DTMF conversion timing, auto (0) or auto and manual (1) or manual (2)
par each Trunk.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 30: Inter digits timer
Set the inter digit timer (0-64800 seconds)
> 0406 - COS Options,
Item 57: DTMF signal sending while talking on extension
In an extension's Class of Service, enables (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Continued Dialing for Intercom calls to SLT.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 3: Dial Number Length Limit for Local Call
Assign Program 0702 Item 3 entries to each Toll Restriction class.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 4: Maximum Dial Number Length Limit
Assign Program 0702 Item 4 entries to each Toll Restriction class.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Dial Number Length Limit for Local Call
If enabled in 0701 Item 3, user cannot dial a local call longer than this number of digits.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 4: Maximum Dial Number Length Limit
If enabled in 0701 Item 4, user cannot dial a long distance call longer than this number
of digits.
> 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), <Single Line Telephone>
Item 5: Terminal type
Set the SLT ports for Continued Dialing possible to receive.
> 1004 - Toll Restriction Class
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-8) to an extension.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to extension.
¾ 122 ¾
Continued Dialing (Cont'd)
Related Features
Toll Restriction
The ability to use Continued Dialing on Trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse Trunks - and then dial DTMF digits after
the service answers.
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
(When DP to DTMF conversion timing is auto to DP trunk)
or (Continued dialing to DTMF trunk.)
1. Place Intercom or Trunk call.
2. Continue dialing after call connects.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
To use Continued Dialing:
(When DP to DTMF conversion timing is manual to DP trunk)
1. Place Intercom or Trunk call.
2. Dial #.
3. Continue dialing.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
¾ 123 ¾
CTI Capability
Description
From next version of main software (version “2.4A”), TAPI 1.4 standard will be supported.
Several application software package (e.g. Phonemax, Phonetasatic, etc..) which are being
sold in the market may be able to applicable to the dX-Z system.
For the future plan. TAPI 2.1 standard shall be complied with.
For more details, refer to separate issue for CTI.
¾ 124 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI)
Description
With the Data Communication Interface (DCI), you can use your telephone system to set
up a data network. DCI networking lets system users share common office resources such
as PCs and printers. Since the phone system handles the network communications, you can
eliminate the expense of separate wiring, network adaptors and network driver software.
The DCIs can switch asynchronous RS-232-C data at speeds from 300 to 19.2K baud.
Internal X 25 packet switching ensures maximum data reliability with a minimum of
disruption to other system activities.
There are three types of DCIs:
l
RS-232-C DCI Module (DX2E-DCI-A)
The DCI-A is a single port data module that installs in a Key Telephone with display for
serial (RS-232-C) communications. Although it installs in the phone, the DCI-A has its
own unique port and extension number. Use DCI-A to easily add RS-232-C data
capabilities to any keyset. The system can have up to 72 DCI Ports (DCI-A plus DCI-B
plus 3DCI X 3 – see below).
l
Centronics DCI Module (DX2E-DCI-B)
The DCI-B is also a single port data module that installs in a key telephone, but it is
used for parallel (Centronics) communication.
Like the DCI-A, DCI-B also has its own unique port and extension number. If you want
to connect a parallel printer to your data network, use the DCI-B instead of a DCI-A and
a separately purchased serial-to-parallel converter. The system can have up to 72 DCI
Ports (DCI-A plus DCI-B plus 3DCI X 3 - see below).
l
3-Port DCI Unit (DX2E-3DCI-A)
The 3DCI-A is a stand-alone unit that connects to a single DSTU card ports and
provides three RS-232-C ports. The 3DCI units are helpful in areas that have a high
concentration of data devices. Since you can have three devices connected to each 3DCI,
you use up 1/3 the number of DTSU card ports (when compared to the DCI Module).
The system can have up to 24 3DCI Ports (DCI-A plus DCI-B plus 3DCI X 3 - see
above).
¾ 125 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
DCI Features
l
Keyset-Originated Data Call
Place a call to another DCI by using your telephone dial pad. The data call automatically
sets up if the called DCI answers.
l
Terminal-Originated Data Call
Place data calls directly from your PC. You can dial using Hayes compatible dialing
commands (e.g., ATDT) or use the powerful auto-dialing features of your
communications software.
l
DCI Department Group
Group DCIs into departments for pooled DCI operation. For example, you can program
several network printers into a DCI Department Group (see the illustration below).
When a user calls the department, they connect to the first available printer.
l
Hayes Compatibility
The DCI is compatible with many Hayes AT commands. For example, you can use Sregisters to change DCI communications parameters (refer to Table DCI-2). In addition,
Result Codes help you monitor the progress of your call (refer to Table DCI-4).
You can also enter over 20 Hayes commands from your terminal to control dialing and
terminal options, Result Code display and S-register programming (refer to Table DCI5).
l
DCI Hotline
DCI Hotline sets up a "nailed-up" (permanent) connection between a DCI Module and
another DCI. During programming, you set the DCI Module as the "source" and the
other DCI as the "target". When the user at the source presses the keyset data key, the
system automatically sets up the data link to the target DCI. You could use a DCI
Hotline at a terminal connected through the phone system to a mini-computer. When the
terminal user presses the keyset Hotline key, the terminal goes on-line to the minicomputer.
¾ 126 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
l
Speed Conversion
The system can automatically compensate for speed differences between two connected
data device. For example, a PC receiving at 2400 baud can accept files sent by another
PC at 19.2K baud. There is no need for the two devices to match their communications
speed.
Physical Ports and Software Ports
DCIs have physical ports and corresponding software ports. The software ports are used
during system programming. For DCI modules, the physical port and corresponding
software port (1-72) are the same as the phone port into which the module is installed.
Each 3DCI consists of a physical port for connection to the Main Equipment and three
software ports. The physical port is the station port into which the 3DCI line cord is
plugged. The 1st software port of a 3DCI is the same as the physical port. Other two
software ports follow 1st software port. For example, when you installed a 3DCI to 2nd
station port of the system, the physical port of this 3DCI is “2”. The software ports
assigned to “2”,”3” and “4”. Please note that you can not overlap software port of the
DCI, in other words, you can connect the Key Telephone (without DCI) to station port
“3” and “4” in above connection.
During programming, you assign DCI extension numbers, Department Group options
and System options to DCI software ports, not physical ports. And, due to the above
rule, 3DCI unit has to be connected between 1st and 6th port of each DSTU card. Refer
to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details.
¾ 127 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-1, S-Registers (Page 1 of 3)
S-Register
0
Title
Description
Number of Rings The number of rings required
Until Autobefore the DCI port answers the
Answer
call
Range
Default
0
(No auto-answer)
0
1-255
(0-510 seconds)
1
Ring Count
The register that stores the number 0-255
or rings detected by the DCI
(0-510 seconds)
0
2
Escape
Character
The decimal value of the ASCII
character used for Escape
0-127 (decimal)
43
3
Carriage Return
Character
The decimal value of the ASCII
character used for carriage return
0-127 (decimal)
13
4
Line Feed
Character
The decimal value of the ASCII
character used for line feed
0-127 (decimal)
10
5
Backspace
Character
The decimal value of the ASCII
character used as a backspace
0-32, 127
(decimal)
8
7
Wait for Carrier
After Dial
During call setup, sets time DCI
waits for carrier from remote
modem before hanging up
Also
Sets time DCI pauses when it
encounters a W in the dial string
1-255 (seconds)
30
9
Carrier Detect
Response Time
Minimum duration of valid carrier
signal
1-255
(10-2550 mS)
6 (60 mS)
10
Lost Carrier to
Hang Up Delay
Length of time DCI waits before
hanging up after loss of carrier
(must be greater than register 9)
1-255
(10-2550 mS)
14 (140 mS)
12
Escape Code
Guard Time
Delay (guard) time before and after 0, 1-255
entering escape character
(0, 20-5100 mS)
¾ 128 ¾
50
(1 second)
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-1, S-Registers (Page 2 of 3)
S-Register
Title
Description
Range
Default
25
Delay to DTR
In synchronous mode, sets interval
between connection and
examination of DTR
Also
After connection, sets minimum
duration of valid DTR signal
1-255
(10-2550 mS)
61
Packet size
Sets the size of the data packet.
Packets exceeding this size are
transmitted. Packets less than this
size are not (unless timeout occurs
-see register 63).
0-255
(0-255 byte)
62
Terminate Code
The decimal value of the ASCII
code used to end (terminate) a
command line
0-127 (decimal)
63
Data
Transmission
Time
Sets how long DCI waits before
transmitting an incomplete packet.
Use register 61 to set packet size
0, 1-255
(0, 50-12750 mS)
0 = disabled
20
(1000 mS)
64
Result Code
Send/Block
Allows/prevents sending of Result
Codes to device connected to DCI
0 = Send
1 = Do Not Send
0 (Send)
Result Code
Type
Enables sending of Result Codes
as words or numbers
0 = Numeric
1 = Words
1 (Words)
Result Code
Mode
Determines which set of Result
0 = Basic
Codes are sent to device connected 1 = Extended
to DCI (Basic or Extended - see
Results Codes table below)
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the DCI port
65
¾ 129 ¾
1 = 300 BPS
2 = 600 BPS
3 = 1200 BPS
4 = 2400 BPS
5 = 4800 BPS
6 = 9600 BPS
7 = 19200 BPS
5 (50 mS)
255
13 (CR)
0 (Basic)
3
(1200 BPS)
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-1, S-Registers (Page 3 of 3)
S-Register
66
Title
Description
Range
Default
Stop Bit
Sets the number of stop bits the DCI 0 = 1 stop bit
expects in the data stream
1 = 2 stop bits
0
(1 stop bit)
Data Bits
Sets the number of data bits the
DCI expects in the data stream
0 = 7 stop bits
1 = 8 stop bits
1
(8 stop bits)
Parity
Sets the parity method the DC
expects in the data stream
0 = No parity
1 = Not used
2 = Odd parity
3 = Even parity
0
(no parity)
Request to Send Enables (0) or disables (1) RTS
(RTS) Control
(pin 4) control. If disabled, the DCI
holds RTS on
0 = Control
enabled
1 = Disabled
(normally on)
0
(control
enabled)
Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
Control
Enables (0) or disables (1) DTR
(pin 20) control. If disabled, the DCI
holds DTR on
0 = Control
enabled
1 = Disabled
(normally on)
0
(control
enabled)
Clear to Send
Enables (0) or disables (1) CTS
(pin 5) control. If disabled, the DCI
holds CTS on
0 = Control
enabled
1 = Disabled
(follows RTS)
0
(control
enabled)
Flow Control
Sets flow control
0 = No flow
control
1 = RTS/CTS
(Hardware)
flow control
enabled
2 = XON/XOFF
between DCI
and
connected
terminal
3 = XON/XOFF
between
sender and
receiver (DCI
transparent)
1
(Hardware
flow
control)
¾ 130 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-2, X.25 Packet Switching (LAPB) Registers
LAPB
Register
Title
Description
Range
Default
Internal Calls
1
T1 Timer
After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must
receive a response from the connected DTE
within the T1 interval. If a response is not
received, the DCE resends the packet
0-65535 mS
500 mS
2
T2 Timer
After the connected DTE receives a packet
from the DCE, it must respond within the T2
interval. (T2 must be less than T1.)
0-65535 mS
250 mS
3
N1
The maximum number of bits in an I
(Information Transfer) frame.
0-65535 mS
2080 bits
4
N2
After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of 0-65535 times
transmissions and retransmissions of a packet
allowed
5
K
The maximum number of I (Information
Transfer) frames a connected device may have
unacknowledged (outstanding)
0-7 frames
7 frames
External Calls
6
T1 Timer
After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must
receive a response from the connected DTE
within the T1 interval. If a response is not
received, the DCE resends the packet.
0-65535 mS
2000 mS
7
T2 Timer
After the connected DTE receives a packet
from the DCE, it must respond within the T2
interval. (T2 must be less than T1.)
0-65535 mS
1000 mS
8
N1
The maximum number of bits in an I
(Information Transfer) frame.
0-65535 mS
2080 bits
9
N2
After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of
transmissions and retransmissions of a packet
allowed
0-65535 mS
7 times
10
K
The maximum number of I (Information
Transfer) frames a connected device may have
unacknowledged (outstanding)
0-7 frames
7 frames
¾ 131 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-3, DCI RS-232-C Connector
Pin
Designation
Function
1
FG
Protective Ground
2
TX
Transmitted Date
To Terminal
3
RX
Received Date
To DCI
4
RTS
Request to Send
To Terminal
5
CTS
Clear to Send
To DCI
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
To DCI
7
SG
Signal Ground
8
CD
Carrier Detect
To DCI
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
To Terminal
22
RI
Ring Indicator
To DCI
¾ 132 ¾
Direction
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-4, Result Codes
Numbers
Words
0
OK
1
CONNECT
2
RING
3
NO CARRIER
4
ERROR
5
Definition
Result Code Set
0
1
2
3
4
Returned when command entered without error.
*
*
*
*
*
Connection is established (any speed) with result
code set 0.
*
*
*
*
*
Displays at destination terminal while call is
ringing.
*
*
*
*
*
No carrier received from destination - call
disconnected.
*
*
*
*
*
Incorrect command entered.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CONNECT 1200 Call connected at 1200 baud.
7
BUSY
8
NO ANSWER
Destination extension busy
Destination doesn’t answer within allowed time.
*
*
*
*
*
10
CONNECT 2400 Call connected at 2400 baud.
*
*
*
*
21
CONNECT 300
Call connected at 300 baud.
*
*
*
*
22
CONNECT 600
Call connected at 600 baud.
*
*
*
*
23
CONNECT 4800 Call connected at 4800 baud.
*
*
*
*
24
CONNECT 9600 Call connected at 9600 baud.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
25
CONNECT
19200
Call connected at 19200 baud.
26
CAMP ON SET
After getting BUSY result code, caller uses ATK
to Camp-On.
*
*
*
*
*
27
CAMP ON FAIL
Camp on attempt fails (see CAMP ON SET
above).
*
*
*
*
*
28
CAMP ON
CALLBACK
Extension waiting for CAMP ON to go through.
*
*
*
*
*
¾ 133 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-5, Hayes Commands (Page 1 of 2)
Command
Title
Description
AT
Attention
Precedes all commands-place at beginning of command line.
A/
Re-execute Command
Re-executes the most recent AT command.
A
Answer
Answers incoming call.
Dn
Dial
Dial according to the value of n, where n can be; 0-9, A to D, #
and * (in telephone number) [,], - or space (used to make
number easier to read, but ignored at time of dialing).
E0
Echo Off
Terminal does not echo commands input by user.
E1
Echo On
Terminal echoes commands input by user.
H
Hang Up
Hang up (disconnect) current call.
I
ROM Version
Returns the version on the ROM chip in the DCI.
K
Camp On
Camp On to busy system extension.
Q
Return to
Communication Mode
After entering command mode (by entering an escape
sequence), use ATQ to return to the communications mode.
Q0
Result Codes On
Result codes are displayed.
Q1
Result Codes Off
Result codes are not displayed.
Sx?
Register Contents
The contents of register x are displayed (e.g., S1?) displays
the contents of register 1). (x = two digits)
Sx=y
Change Register
The contents of register X are changed to entry y.
(x = 2 digits, Y = 3 digits)
V0
Numeric Result Codes
Set
DCI provides numeric result codes, instead of verbal result
codes. See also Q0 and Q1.
V1
Verbal Result Codes
Set
DCI provides verbal result codes, instead of numeric result
codes. See also Q0 and Q1.
¾ 134 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-5, Hayes Commands (Page 2 of 2)
Command
Title
Description
X0
Result Code Set 0
Enable result code set 0 (basic result codes).
X1
Result Code Set 1
Enable result code set 1.
X2
Result Code Set 2
Enable result code set 2.
X3
Result Code Set 3
Enable result code set 3.
X4
Result Code Set 4
Enable result code set 4.
Reset
Reset the DCI, using the last values saved by system
programming or the &W command.
&F
Initialize Registers
The DCI returns all registers to their factory default setting.
&W
Store Registers
The DCI save (store) the current register values.
Register values saved are S0, S2-S5, S12, S61-S66.
Z
¾ 135 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Conditions
This feature available for PC with DX2E-DCI-A or DX2E-DCI-B or DX2E-3DCI-A
Default Setting
- No DCIs programmed.
- System and Alarm reports use DCI software port 1.
- System date is American format.
- No data keys or Telemarketing Dial keys defined.
- Default communication parameters are 1200 baud, 1 stop bit, 8 data bits with no parity.
- All DCIs are RS-232-C when installed.
- All DCIs are in DCI Department Group 1.
- All DCIs are Toll Restriction Class of Service 2.
- No DCI Hotlines programmed.
Options
Key telephone with display and DX2E-DCI-A set
OR
Key telephone with display and DX2E-DCI-B set
OR
DX2E-3DCI-A
¾ 136 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0503 assign unused
extension numbers to
the DCI ports.
In 1202 (DCI Type)
for the DCI software
port, enter 2
(parallel).
In 1202 (DCI SubType) for the DCI
software port, enter
1 for each sub-type.
Parallel
Same
Is DCI software port an
RS-232-C (serial) or
Centronics (parallel)
interface?
Do DCI's require
unique register
(option) programming?
Do you want to
change DCI software
port’s default
communications
options?
No
You can also use Hayes
commands to change
S-registers and other options.
Go to the
flow chart on
the following
page.
¾ 137 ¾
Serial
Unique
Yes
In 1202 (DCI Type)
for the DCI software
port, enter 1
(serial).
In 1202 (DCI SubType) for the DCI
software port, enter
a unique sub-type
number (1-10).
In 1201 for each sub- type
(1-10), set the values for the
DCI S-registers (Resister
Type 1) and LAPB (X.25
packet switching) resisters
(Resister Type 2) .
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
Do you want to have
DCI Department
(pooled) operation?
Yes
In 1204, assign DCI
software ports to
DCI Department Groups
(1-8).
No
In 0507, assign extension
(pilot) numbers to the
DCI Department Groups.
In 1205, assign each DCI
software port to a nonrestrictive Toll Restriction
Class (1-8). Also refer to
the Toll Restriction feature.
No
Do you want to Toll
Restrict outgoing
(trunk) DCI calls?
Do you want DCI
Hotlines for
"nailed-up"
connections?
No
Yes
Yes
In 1206, initialize
DCI software port.
Go to the
flow chart
on the
following
page.
¾ 138 ¾
In 1205, assign each DCI
software port to a
restrictive Toll Restriction
Class (1-8). Also refer to
the Toll Restriction feature.
In 1207, set DCI Hotline
originator and target
extension numbers.
If you don't initialize, any
changes you made in 1201
won't take effect.
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
No
In 0406 Item 70,
enter 0.
No
Is DCI a DCI Module
installed in a keyset?
Should keyset be able to set
DCI Automatic Answer
(Service Code 883)?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 139 ¾
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign a
data key (code 1029)
to the keyset.
In 0406 Item 70,
enter 1.
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
Is the terminal
connected to the DCI
software port also for
SMDR?
Yes
Refer to the Station
Message Detail
Recording feature.
No
Is the terminal
connected to the DCI
software port also for
system reports?
Yes
In 0007, enter the DCI
software port number as
the system report port
number.
No
Is the terminal
connected to the DCI
software port also for
the alarm report?
Yes
In 0008, enter the DCI
software port number as
the system report port
number.
No
In 0130, set the report date
format (0 = American).
Do you change the
Service Code for DCI
Auto Answer Mode
Setting, Data Call
Disconnect and DCI
Initial?
Yes
No
Stop
¾ 140 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0007 - System Report Print Out Port Setup
If the device connected to the DCI will also be for system reports, enter the DCI
software port number as the system report port number.
> 0008 - System Alarm Report Setup
If the device connected to the DCI will also be for alarm reports, enter the DCI software
port number as the alarm report port number.
> 0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
Set the date format for SMDR (0 = American, 1 = European or 2 = Japanese).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 70: DCI auto answer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to set
the DCI auto-answer mode
(Service Code 883).
> 0503 - DCI Extension Number
Assign an unused extension number (e.g.,500) to the DCI port. This allows other users
to place data calls to the DCI.
> 0507 - DCI pooling Pilot Numbers
Assign unused extension numbers (e.g.,500) to the DCI Department Groups set in
Program 1204.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 49: DCI auto answer mode setting
Assign a service code for DCI auto answer mode setting.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 50: Data call disconnect
Assign a service code for Data call disconnect
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 51: DCI initial
Assign a service code for DCI initial.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign Class of Service (1-10) to extensions.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a data key (code 1029) to each keyset with a DCI Module.
¾ 141 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1201 - DCI Internal Pattern Setup
For each of the DCI sub-types (1-10 set in Program 1202), set the values for the modem
S-registers (Register Type 1) and the X.25 packet switching (LAPB) registers (Register
Type 2). Refer to Tables DCI-1 and DCI-2 provided with this feature. (You can also
change these registers interactively from the DCI's terminal.)
> 1202 - Basic DCI Port Setup
Assign a DCI port type (1 for RS-232-C or Centronics) to each DCI software port
installed (1-72). Also, assign the sub-type (1-10 used in Program 1201) to each DCI
port.
> 1204 - DCI Group
To pool DCIs into a Department, assign DCI software ports (1-72) to DCI Department
Groups (1-8). Assign Pilot Numbers to DCI Departments in Program 0507.
> 1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class
For outgoing data calls, set the Toll Restriction Class (1-8, used in program 0701) for
each DCI port (1-72).
> 1206 - DCI S-Register initial
After changing register values in Program 1201, be sure to use this program to initialize
the DCI port (0-72, 0 : All ports).
You must initialize a DCI software port before any changes made in Program 1201 will
take effect.
> 1207 - DCI Hotline Assignment
Use this program to set up a DCI Hotline between an extension with a DCI Module and
a destination DCI. When the user at the DCI Hotline originator presses the data key, the
system automatically calls the programmed destination.
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
A keyset with a Data Module must have a data key. As an option, keysets can also have
Telemarketing Dial keys.
Station Message Detail Recording
The system uses DCIs for SMDR and system reports.
¾ 142 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Operation
KEYSET-ORIGINATED DATA CALL
To place a keyset-originated data call:
Your extension must have a data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029)
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial DCI extension number.
The data key lights when the call connects.
If you see "BUSY" on your terminal display, you may be able to type ATK (Enter) to
Camp On. Refer to Table DCI-4 for a description of the other Result Codes. Refer to
Table DCI-5 for a complete list of the Hayes-compatible commands.
TERMINAL-ORIGINATED DATA CALL
To make sure your terminal is working properly:
1. Type AT (Enter).
OK displays on the next line.
If you don’t see OK, check the communications parameters of your DCI and
communications software.
To place a call from your terminal:
1. Type ATD nnn (where nnn is the DCI extension you want to call).
2. Press Enter.
You see CONNECT if your call goes through. For an explanation of other Result
Codes you may see, refer to Table DCI-4.
To reset your DCI from your telephone (DCI Modules only):
Resetting your DCI Module drops the data call in progress.
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 880(
).
3. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 143 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
USING DCI HOTLINE
To use DCI Hotline:
For DCI Hotline, the calling (source) DCI must be a DCI Module installed in a
telephone.
1. Press data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029) on extension with DCI Module.
The system automatically sets up the call.
USING HAYES COMMANDS
To use a Hayes command from your terminal:
Hayes commands let you dial numbers, change DCI registers and set other options.
Refer to Table DCI-5 for a list of the Hayes commands available with the DCI.
1. Type AT.
2. Type the command plus any options, then press enter.
If you use ATSx=y to change S-register values, be sure to use AT&W to save your
entries.
ANSWERING DATA CALLS
To answer an incoming data call:
Your data key flashes.
1. Press flashing data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029).
OR
Your PC communications software answers the call automatically.
You can also type the Hayes command ATA (Enter) to answer the call.
To enable Auto Answer for a DCI Module:
1. Press idle CL key Dial 883(
).
Operation (Cont'd)
DISCONNECTING AN ACTIVE DATA CALL
To disconnect your active data call:
1. Use your PC communications software to hang up.
OR
(DCI Module Only) Press idle CL key and dial 884.
¾ 144 ¾
Data Communication Interface (DCI) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
INITIALIZING A DCI MODULE
To initialize your DCI Module:
1. Press idle CL key and dial 880(
).
2. Press SPK to hang up.
You can also use Program 1206 to initialize DCIs.
¾ 145 ¾
Data Privacy
Description
While on a data call using an acoustic coupler, an extension user can implement Privacy to
block incoming Off Hook Signals and Break In attempts. The system establishes Privacy
for the extension when the user presses the programmed Privacy key. It cancels Privacy
when the user presses the Privacy key a second time or hangs up. Privacy assures the user
that they will not be interrupted during an important data call.
Conditions
This feature only pertains to data calls set up using a keyset and an acoustic coupler. It does
not pertain to data calls using a DCI. (Privacy is automatic for these types of calls.)
Default Setting
An extension's Class of Service allows the use of a Privacy key.
No Privacy keys programmed.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 7: Data Privacy
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use a Privacy
key.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Privacy key (code 1030).
Rated Features
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
A keyset user can release Privacy on their outside call so a co-worker can join in the
conversation.
Programmable Function Key
Data Privacy requires a uniquely programmed function key.
¾ 146 ¾
Data Privacy (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In Program 0401
Item 7 enable
(1) Privacy.
Yes
Should keyset user be
allowed to enable
Privacy?
In Program 1005, assign
Class of Service to an
extension.
In Program 1006,
assign a Privacy key
to an extension.
Stop
¾ 147 ¾
No
In Program 0401
Item 7, disable
(0) Privacy.
Data Privacy (Cont'd)
Operation
To enable Privacy for the call you are on:
1. Press Privacy key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1030).
A co-worker cannot Break In on your conversation nor send Off Hook Signals.
2. (Optional) Press Privacy key again to release Privacy for the call.
The system cancels Privacy automatically when you hang up.
¾ 148 ¾
Dial Block
Description
Dial Block lets a user down an extension's class of Toll Restriction temporary. This helps
an extension user to block his/her phone to be used by another persons. During the Dial
Block function is being set at an extension, the toll restriction class (1-8) shall be defined in
the system program in the system-wide.
Dial Block feature can also be set by Supervisor and the Supervisor can manage Dial Block
in the system-wide.
Note 1 : In case “Dial Block” has already been set by the extension user, Supervisor can not release.
Note 2 : In case “Dial Block” has already been set by Supervisor, the extension user can not release.
Note 3 : This function is not available for S-Bus extensions.
[ CAUTION ]
This function works under the Password and Class of Service control. (“Supervisor” is not assigned
by extension base.) In case “Dial Block” is available for all Classes, everybody may become
“Supervisor” if they know the Password.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
(If the system re-start by Cold Start, Dial Block feature is all cleared.)
Default Setting
- No Dial Block Toll Restriction Class programmed.
- Service Code for Dial Block is dial 700.
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit to use Dial Block.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options, Item 121: Dial Block
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Dial Block.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 34: Dial Block
Assign a service code for Dial Black.
> 0703 - Dial Block Restriction Class
Assign a Dial Block Restriction Class. (1-8)
> 0704 - Dial Block Release
If an extension user forget Dial Block personal password, you can release Dial Block for
each extension.
> 0705 - Dial Block Password for Supervisor
Assign the Password which is used by Supervisor.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a class of service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 149 ¾
Dial Block (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Related Features
Start
No
In 0406 Item 121, enter 0.
Should extension be
Yes
In 0406 Item 121, enter 1.
able to use Dial Block?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0703, assign Toll
Restriction Class at the Dial
Block.
Do you need to control
the Dial Block by
Supervisor ?
Yes
In 0704, assign Dial Block
Release by Supervisor.
No
In 0705, assign Password
for Supervisor.
Do you change the
Service Code for Dial
Block?
No
Stop
Toll Restriction
Dial Block downs an extension's Toll Restriction Class.
¾ 150 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Dial Block (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To set the Dial Block:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 700(
).
Dial personal password (4 digit).
Dial 1.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To release the Dial Block:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 700(
).
Dial personal password (4 digit).
Dial 0.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To set “Dial Block” from the other extension :
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 701 (
).
3. Dial the Password.
4. Dial the extension No. which is set “Dial Block”.
5. Dial 1 to accept. (Confirmation Tone shall be sent.)
6. Press SPK to hang up.
To release “Dial Block” from the other extension :
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 701 (
).
3. Dial the Password.
4. Dial the extension No. which has been set “Dial Block”.
5. Dial 0 to release. (Confirmation Tone shall be sent.)
6. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 151 ¾
Dial Block (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Single Line Telephone>
To set the Dial Block:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 700(
).
Dial personal password (4 digit).
Dial 1.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. On hook.
To release the Dial Block:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 700(
).
Dial personal password (4 digit).
Dial 0.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. On hook.
To set “Dial Block” from the other extension :
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 701 (
).
3. Dial the Password.
4. Dial the extension No. which is set “Dial Block”.
5. Dial 1 to accept. (Confirmation Tone shall be sent.)
6. On hook.
To release “Dial Block” from the other extension :
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 701 (
).
3. Dial the Password.
4. Dial the extension No. which has been set “Dial Block”.
5. Dial 0 to release. (Confirmation Tone shall be sent.)
6. On hook.
¾ 152 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability)
Description
The system supports DID (DDI) feature that the outside party dials as same digits as local
telephone number, but it goes to the extension directly through KTS/PABX (switch box).
<Note> Generally, in the telecommunication world, the above function may be called either DID
(Direct Inward Dialing) or DDI (Direct Dialing In), even though the functionality is
exactly same. In this manual, the word “DID (DDI)” shall be used for easy reference.
For ISDN DDI (DID), in case of the destination is busy/no-answer or vacant number is
dialed from outside, then 1st and 2nd transfer tables (even divert to outside party) can be
programmed for more flexibility.
Conditions
This feature is available for outside caller on DID (DDI) trunk.
Default Setting
- This feature is not assigned.
Options
DX2E-8/4/BRIU-S1
DX2E-PRIU-S1
<for ISDN (BRI)>
<for ISDN (PRI)>
Programming
> 0405 : System Timers, Part A Item 30 : Inter-Digit Timer (for Trunk)
Define Inter-Digit Timer for Trunk. (5 sec is recommended)
Note : This timer assignment is required in case 2nd Trunk type is Analogue. The system connects
DID (DDI) incoming call and transferred to destination party after this timer has passed. In case
2nd Trunk type is Digital (ISDN), this timer assignment is not related.
> 0405 : System Timers, Part A Item 31 : DDI no answer time
Define the ringing duration period. After timeout, this call shall be transferred to the next
target in accordance with Command 1814, 1815 and 1809.
> 0406 : Class of Service Options Item 79 : External Call Forward
In extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “External Call Forward”.
Note : This item should be set to “1”.
¾ 153 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0414 : System Timers, Part B Item 9 : DDI pilot call no answer timer
Define no-answer timer for DID (DDI) call to STG pilot number.
> 0414 : System Timers, Part B Item 18: DDI Incoming Ring Group no answer timer
Define no-answer timer for DID (DDI) call that is transferred to IRG.
> 0604 : Trunk Group for Abbreviated Dial
Assign the Trunk Group for ABB outgoing call (for ABB Bin base).
> 0605 : Destination Setup for MSN / DDI Flexible Transfer
Assign the ABB No. which is used as destination of MSN / DDI Flexible Transfer.
> 0905 : Trunk Group
Assign the Trunk Group for the command 1808. (1-16)
> 1805 : DDI Conversion Table Area
Define the DDI Conversion Table Area. (1-8)
> 1806 : DDI Conversion Table Data Setup
Enter the receive number, transferring number and the name per Conversion Table. (1-400)
> 1807 : DDI Receiving Digit Setup
Assign the receiving digits (1-8) to be referred in the Conversion Table Area.(1-8)
> 1808 : Conversion Table Area Number Setup for Trunk Line Group
Assign the Trunk Group number for Conversion Table Area. (1-8)
> 1809 : DDI Transferred Destination Setup
Assign the (final) destination (Incoming Ring Group, Department Group or DUD / DISA) for
each Conversion Table Area. (1-8)
> 1810 : DDI Operation Mode Setup
Assign the operation mode (disconnect or transfer) for each status (vacant number, busy, noanswer) per each Conversion Table. (1-400)
> 1814 : DDI Transfer Table-1 (1st Step)
Assign the 1st destination (Incoming Ring Group, Department Group, DUD / DISA or Outside Party)
for each Conversion Table. (1-400)
> 1815 : DDI Transfer Table-2 (2nd Step)
Assign the 2nd destination (Incoming Ring Group, Department Group, DUD / DISA or Outside Party)
for each Conversion Table. (1-400)
¾ 154 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0901 Items 14-17, set
the circuit type for DID
trunks (type 3).
Should make more than
two Conversion Table?
Yes
In 1805, create
Conversion Table
Area.
No
In 1806, enter the
conversion data per
Table Area.
Should change the
receiving digits from
network?
Yes
In 1807, enter the
number of
receiving digits.
No
In 0905, make Trunk
Group for DID lines.
Confirm the appropriate timers are
assigned for “No-answer” in 0405-Timer31,
0414-Timer9 and 0414-Timer18.
Go to operation flow
To next page
¾ 155 ¾
In 1808, assign Trunk
Group on each
Conversion Table
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
From previous
page
Incoming DDI
Call
Route Call Cmd 1806
Station Group
A
Extension
Extension
Status
Vacant
1
External
Number
Is Cmd
1810
Item 1 Set?
0
Disconnect
Route the call to
the external
destination
Busy
RNA
Cmd 0405
Timer 31
expires
Is Cmd
1810
Item 3 Set?
No Entry
1
Is Cmd
1810
Item 2 Set?
1
0
Disconnect
0
Continue to
ring Ext.
D
Route Call : Cmd 1814
Station
Group
Voice Mail
IRG
DUD/DISA
No Entry
IRG
Trunk to
Trunk
G
B
Ring IRG
Ring
Voice
Mail
Ports.
Do not step
on to 1815
E
DUD/DISA
operation using
Cmds 1802,
1803 1804 and
2205. Do not
RNA : Cmd
0414 Timer
18 expires
E
¾ 156 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
E
Route Call : Cmd 1815
Station
Group
Voice Mail
IRG
DUD/DISA
No Entry
Trunk to
Trunk
IRG
G
C
Ring IRG
Ring Voice
Mail Ports.
Do not step
on to 1809
DUD/DISA
operation using
Cmds 1802,
1803 1804 and
2205. Do not
step on to 1809
F
RNA: Cmd 0414
Timer18 expires
F
F
Route Call : Cmd 1809
Voice
Mail
No Entry
IRG
Ring IRG
Ring Voice
Mail Ports.
Continue to ring IRG or station
group set in 1814 or 1815
¾ 157 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
A, B, C
Station
Group
Status
A
D
B
E
C
F
All extensions busy
At least 1
extension
idle.
Wait for Station Group
extension to become free
Ring the extension in
the Station Group
Timer
Cmd
0414 Item 9
expires
D, E, F
G
Is it possible
to route the
call to
Trunk ?
No
Yes
Route the call to
the external
destination
Continue to Ring
IRG or Ring Ext.
¾ 158 ¾
DID Capability (DDI Capability) (Cont’d)
Related Features
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing)
As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer (vacant/busy/no-answer), DUD feature
can take place.
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer (vacant/busy/no-answer), DISA feature
can take place.
Group Hunt
As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer (vacant/busy/no-answer), the call shall
be transferred to the pilot number (station group).
PC Based Voice Mail Connection
As one of the option for DDI conditional transfer (vacant/busy/no-answer), the call shall
be transferred to the pilot number of the PC based voice mail port.
Operation
None (This feature is for outside caller)
¾ 159 ¾
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Description
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a Trunk Line that rings an extension directly. Since DILs
only ring one extension, employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a
company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When
outside callers dial the DIL's phone number, the call rings the operator on the International
Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension's DIL. If the
DIL is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group.
This could help a Technical Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside
Sales department. If the Inside Sales calls are not answered, they ring into the Technical
Service department.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
If unanswered, a DIL rings an extension until the outside party hangs up.
The DIL does not automatically reroute.
Default Setting
- DIL No Answer Time is 0 (disabled).
- No DILs programmed (0901 Items 14 to 17 = 0).
- All Trunk Line has extension port 1 as the DIL destination.
- All extensions have full access to all Trunk Line.
- No DIL No Answer Ring Groups Programmed.
Options
None
¾ 160 ¾
Direct Inward Line (DIL) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Stop
No
Should extension
have a DIL?
Yes
In 0901 Items 14
to 17, enter 4
In 0917, enter DIL
destination.
Incoming DILs show as busy
Should DIL also
ring extension's
line key?
Yes
In 1006, enter
Trunk line number
for line key.
No
All extensions should have at
least hold access for DIL.
Should extensions
have outgoing
access to DIL?
Yes
In 0911, for trunks;
0912 for extensions.
Yes
In 0405 Item 62, set the
DIL No Answer Time.
No
Should other
extensions have
delayed ringing
for the DIL?
No
In 0919, assign the ring
group used for the DIL
No Answer destination.
Stop
¾ 161 ¾
Unanswered calls to
the DIL ring this
group after the DIL
No Answer Time.
Direct Inward Line (DIL) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 62: Normal or DIL incoming call no answer
Set DIL No Answer Time (0-64800 seconds). If DIL Delayed Ringing is set in program
0919, this option sets the DIL Delayed Ring interval.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A
Item 14 to 17: Service Type
Assign each DIL Service Type 4. Make an entry for each Night Service mode.
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps. All extensions should have at least Hold access to
the DIL (entry 3). Without Hold access, transferred DILs and DILs on hold can be
answered only while they are ringing or recalling.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16) to extensions.
> 0917 - DIL Assignment
Set the destination extension for each DIL. You make a different entry for each Night
Service mode.
> 0919 - DIL No Answer Destination
For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group.
An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time.
Make an entry for each Night Service mode.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
To have the DIL ring a key, program a line key for the DIL trunk.
Related Features
Call Forward
Call Forward does not reroute DILs. If an extension forwards their Trunk Line calls, the
Trunk Line rings according to Ring Group programming.
Trunk Outgoing Call
You can place DILs in Trunk Line Group to make outgoing DIL calls easier.
Group Hunt
A DIL cannot have an Extension (Department) Group as its destination.
Do Not Disturb
If a DILs destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group
programming.
Call Pickup
A user can activate group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.
¾ 162 ¾
Direct Inward Line (DIL) (Cont'd)
Related Features (Cont'd)
Name Storing
Program a name for a DIL. This makes it easier to identify the incoming call.
Private Line
To simulate Private Line operation, create a unique Access Map for the DIL that allows full
access only for the destination. Give all other extensions only Hold access.
Programmable Function Key
If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call will ring the key.
If not, the call rings an available line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates as
busy.
Ring Groups
A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming.
A DIL only rings at assigned extension. It will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1. Lift handset
2. Press flashing line key for DIL.
If you don't have a line key for the DIL, the DIL rings an idle CL key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you don't answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., DIL No Answer Ring
Group.)
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1. Lift handset.
2. Press line key for DIL
OR
Dial 805(
) and the DIL Trunk Line number (e.g. 05).
OR
Dial 804(
) and the DIL Trunk Line group number (e.g. 05).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Line Group Access
3. Dial telephone number.
¾ 163 ¾
Direct Inward Line (DIL) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1. Lift handset
2. Press flashing line key for DIL.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you don't answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., DIL No Answer Ring
Group.)
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 805(
) and the DIL Trunk Line number (e.g. 05).
OR
Dial 804(
) and the DIL Trunk Line group number (e.g. 05).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Line Group Access
3. Dial telephone number.
¾ 164 ¾
Directory Dialing
Description
When you place a call, you can choose the destination by the name, if your type of phone is
Super Display Phone (Large Display keyphone). Either intercom or trunk line call can be
placed by the name directory.
Conditions
Only 24-key Super Display Phone (Large Display Keyphone) <see *Reference>
Default Setting
- The feature is provided. (not optional)
Options
None
Programming
> 0502 : Extension Number and Name
Enter the Name for extension.
> 0603 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name
Put the Name on abbreviated number.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
The name for each abbreviated number has to be entered.
Operation
Refer to “Concise Instruction Manual” (How To Use The Key Telephone) <attached to
each keyphone> page25 and 26 for the details.
<*Reference>
For the future enhancement, this function (for trunk call with the name of abbreviated number)
will be provided to Executive Keyphone (with standard display) with referring to the alphabet
character on the keypad.
¾ 165 ¾
Direct Station Selection
Description
Direct Station Selection key (DSS key) shall be assigned to the function key on any
keyphone. The key shows idle/busy status of the programmed extension by BLF (Busy
Lamp Field) indication. (LED ON: busy, LED OFF: idle) When the key LED shows off
state, the programmed extension can be called by simply pressing the key.
Conditions
This feature is available only for key telephone.
Default Setting
- No DSS key is assigned.
Options
None
Programming
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign DSS keys:
Code 1058 (+ extension number) for DSS key
Related Features
DSS Console / DLS Console
For these consoles, the key (for extension/line) assignment have to be programmed in the
system programming. But, DSS key can be set at the keyphone as he/she likes.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To monitor the extension’s status:
1. Look at the DSS key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1058+xxx, xxx = extension number)
<Status> LED ON: busy/ring, LED OFF: idle
To place intercom to the extension:
(When the LED shows OFF)
1. Press the DSS key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1058+xxx, xxx = extension nunber)
¾ 166 ¾
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns)
Description
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns) provide extension users with audible and
visual call status signals. This lets users tell the types of calls by listening to the
ringing/tones and watching the keys.
It also helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets
keyset users customize their Intercom and Trunk Line call ringing. This is helpful for users
that work together closely. For example, if several co-workers set their keysets to the
following tables at different pitches, the co-workers can always tell which calls are for
them.
Refer to the following tables at the beginning of this section:
Table 1-3 System Tones
Table l-5 System Ring Rates
Table l-6 System Rash Rates
Conditions
This feature available for Key Telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows selecting the incoming ring tones.
- An extension's Class of Service prevents checking the incoming ring tone choices.
- Trunk Line ring keysets with Ring Tone Range l, tone Medium (see Table 1-6).
- Extensions ring keysets with tone Medium.
- Calls ring Single Line Telephone sets with long bursts.
- Calls ring keysets with two bursts followed by a pause.
- Service Code of Trunk line incoming ring tone switching is dial 820.
- Service Code of ring tone is dial 811.
Options
None
¾ 167 ¾
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
No
Do you want to
change the range
for Trunk line
ringing?
Yes
In 0902, select the
ring tone range for
each Trunk line.
In 1001 Item 2, select
the trunk ring tone for
each keyset extension.
In 1001 Item 3, select
the Intercom ring tone for
each keyset extension.
In 1001 Item 6, select
the ring cycle for each
single line telephone.
Yes
In 1008, set the
incoming call ring cycle
for keyset extensions.
Do you want to change
the way Intercom?
These settings affect
both Intercom and trunk
call ringing.
No
Should keyset users be
able to change or check
the incoming ring tones?
Yes
Enable changing rones
in Class of Service
Program 0406 Item 59.
Enable changing rones
in Class of Service
Program 0406 Item 86.
No
Assign a Class of Service
to an extension Program.
Do you change the Service
Code for Check of Ring
Tone and Trunk Line
Incoming Ring Tone
Switching?
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Stop
¾ 168 ¾
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 59: Ringing Tone Selection
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
change the incoming ring tones.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 86: Checking incoming ring tone
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
check the selectable Ring tones.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 59: Trunk line incoming ring tone switching
Assign a service code of changing Trunk line incoming ring tone.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 80: Check of ringing tone
Assign a service code of ringing tone check.
> 0902 - Trunk Line Ring Tone
Set the ring tone range (1-4) for each Trunk Line.
> 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A)
Item 2: Trunk Line Incoming Ring Type
From the range specified in Program 0902, select the keyset extension's Trunk Line ring
tone (High = 1, Med = 2, Low = 3). Refer also to "Trunk Line Ring Tone" on Table l-6.
> 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: Extension Incoming Ring Type
Select the extension's intercom ring tone (High = l, Med = 2, Law = 3).
Refer to "Extension Ring Tone Range" on Table 1-6.
> 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Ringing Cycle
Select the incoming call ring cycle for Single Line Telephone sets.
The choices are 0 (short bursts) or 1 (long bursts).
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Ringing Tone Cycle
Set the incoming call ring cycle for each keyset extension. The choices are two bursts
with a pause (0), continues (1) or single short burst with a pause (2).
¾ 169 ¾
Distinctive Ringing (Tone & Flash Patterns) (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To listen to the incoming ring choices:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 811(
).
3. Dial 1 to check ringing for Intercom calls.
OR
Dial 2 to check ringing for Trunk Line calls.
4. For Intercom calls, select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium, 3 = Low) and the range (1-4)
you want to check.
Refer to Table 1-6 for the four Trunk Line Ringing Tone Ranges and the selections
within each range.
5. Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up.
To change the pitch of your incoming ring:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 820(
).
3. Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
OR
Dial 2 to change ringing for Trunk Line calls.
4. Select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium, 3 = Low).
5. Press SPK to hang up.
<Single Line Telephone>
This feature only available for Key Telephone.
¾ 170 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Description
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions or to place Trunk line calls
through the system or other few features.
The system allows 10 classes of Service for DISA and 15 passwords for DISA. A DISA
password can have a different Class at Service for DISA for each of the Night Service
modes.
This helps outside callers that know the extension numbers of the people and each feature
access code they want to reach. For example, a salesperson can call their in-house assistant
directly-without going through a company operator. To use DISA, the outside caller;
- Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line
- Waits for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
- Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
- Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code.
l
DUD/DISA Talkie
This system can be automatic announce to DISA caller from DUD/DISA Talkie.
DUD/DISA Talkie can be assigned 3 port ACI ,SLT port or VAU.
Audio system (ex. Tape recorder) connected to 3 port ACI. Automatic answer system
(ex. Automatic answering telephone) connected to SLT port. DUD/DISA Talkie
announces extension numbers and service codes to DISA caller for practical use.
To use DISA with DISA Talkie, the outside caller:
- Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line
- Waits for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
- Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
- Hears guidance message from DISA Talkie. (e.x. extension numbers for each
member and feature access service code.
- Hears unique dial tone again.
- Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code.
l Answering Extension Call for DISA
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key
for the DISA Trunk Line, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line
key, the call rings an idle CL key.
l Automatic Transfer to Incoming Ring Group conditionally
If DISA call is not completed due to dial tone time-over, busy/no-answer or wrong
number, the system automatically shall transfer it to incoming ring group as
programmed.
¾ 171 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
l
Night Service for Trunk Line Type
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode.
For example, a Trunk Line can be a normal Trunk Line during the day and a DISA
Trunk Line at night. You can also set the routing for DISA Trunk Line when the caller
dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
l
Trunk to Trunk Transfer for DISA
DISA caller can be transferred to another Trunk line by operating their telephone set.
DISA caller can place a call by:
- Dialing a Trunk Line Group Access Code
- Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing Code.
The system provides flexibility in the way each DISA Class No. can place Trunk to
Trunk Transferring Trunk line.
This system applies Toll Restriction according to User number for DISA password class.
l
Trunk to Trunk Transfer by Abbreviated Dialing
DISA caller can be dialing to another Trunk line by Common Abbreviated Dialing.
l
Continued Code for Trunk to Trunk Transfer
This system automatically disconnects call for Trunk to Trunk Transfer after DISA
Conversation time and DISA Disconnect time. When you would like continued
conversation, you dial Continued Code. To use DISA, the outside caller:
- Place a Trunk to Trunk Transfer for DISA.
- Heard 1 sec signal tone after DISA Conversation time.
- Dial Continued Code (1 digit) within DISA conversation disconnect time. Permitted
Conversation time renewed. (If you did not dial Continued Code, automatic
disconnected Trunk line for Trunk to Trunk Transfer.)
- When you would like finish conversation, dial disconnect code (1 digit). (If you did
not dial disconnect code, automatic disconnect Trunk lines for Trunk to Trunk
Transfer after DISA Conversation time and DISA Disconnect time.)
- On hook.
l
1 Digit Access on DUD / DISA (VAU)
Any extensions can be defined as 1 digit which to be dialed from outside caller on DUD
/ DISA with VAU Adaptor. The outside caller is able to access to the desired extension /
department group by dialing only 1 digit after the system automatically answered.
Note: If same number is used for 1st digit of extension number and 1digit access code
on DUD/DISA, out side caller can not access directly to the extension.
Example, if 1 digit access code “2” is assigned to department group “300”,
outside caller can not access to extension 200 to 299 directly.
Because outside caller tries to dial extension 200, however after dialing “2”, it
goes to department “300” immediately by 1 digit access function.
¾ 172 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Conditions
The DISA caller must use a telephone with DTMF sender.
This feature available for outside caller.
Default Setting
- No DTMF receive blocks reserved for analog trunk DTMF reception.
- The DTMF Receiver Active Time is 10 seconds.
- The DISA Dial Tone Time is seconds.
- The DISA No Answer Time is 10 seconds.
- The DISA Internal Paging Time is 30 seconds.
- The DISA External Paging Time is 30 seconds.
- DISA Trunk Line not programmed.
- No DISA password set.
- All DISA password have not Class of Service.
- All DISA class disabled all features.
- No assigned DISA Continued Code.
- No assigned DISA Disconnect Code.
- The DISA Trunk to Trunk Conversation duration is 30 seconds.
- The DISA Trunk to Trunk Conversation Disconnect duration is 15 seconds.
- DUD/DISA Talkie no assigned.
Options
DX2E-4DTDU-S1
DX2E-3ACI-A1 or DX2E-4ASTU-S1 (If you use DUD/DISA Talkie)
DX2E-VAU-A (If you use 1 digit Access on DUD/DISA(VAU) with Talkie )
DX2E-VAU-B (to be used to expand the talk path)
¾ 173 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 0901 Items 14-17, set
the circuit type for DISA
trunks (type 2).
The system can have up to
15 users. There is one
DISA Class of Service and
one password per user.
In 1801, set up the 6digit DISA password and
Class of Service for
each user.
Do you wish to set any
extension or extension
group to be called by one
digit from outside ?
Yes
Should dialing mistakes
from DISA callers cause
Transfer or disconnect?
Disconnect
To set DISA operation
mode to disconnect, in
1802 Items 1-3, enter 0.
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 174 ¾
Transfer
Assign data In program
2210 .
To set DISA operation
mode to Transfer, in
1802 Items 1-3, enter 1.
Item 1 = Timeout
Item 2 = RNA/busy
Item 3 = Mistake
in dialing
Set Transfer destination
(Ring Group) in 1803.
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Should DISA caller's
allow Trunk to Trunk
Transfer features?
Yes
In 0405 Item 74,
enter the waiting
time for DISA
Control Code dialing.
In 0517, assign a
DISA Control Code
for continue and
disconnect.
In 0405 Item 73, set
how long Line to
Line conversation.
In 0905, assign Trunk
to Trunk Line Group.
In 0412 Item 2, enter 0
to allow dial 9 access
to Trunk lines.
No
Should DISA caller's
Class of Service allow
dialing 9 for Trunk
Line Group Routing?
Yes
In 0412 Item 2, enter 1
to allow dial 9 access
to Trunk lines.
In 1811, assign DISA
class to routes set up
in 0906 for each Night
Service mode.
In 0412 Item 3,
enter 0 to prevent
dialing Trunk lines
via Service Code 804.
Continued
on following
page.
(B)
No
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow dialing
Service Code 804 and a
Trunk Line Group for
outside calls?
Continued
on following
page.
(A)
¾ 175 ¾
Yes
In 0412 Item 3,
enter 1 to allow
dialing Trunk lines
via Service Code 804.
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
(B)
Continued
from
previous
page.
(A)
In 0412 Item 4, enter
0 to prevent DISA
caller to use Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
Should DISA Caller's Yes
Class of Service allow
use of Common
Abbreviated Dialing?
In 0412 Item 4, enter
1 to allow DISA
caller to use Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
In 1811, set the
Trunk line Group
Route the DISA caller
access when Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
In 0412 Item 6, enter 0 to
allow DISA caller to dial
telephone system operator.
No
In 0412 Item 7, enter 0 to
allow DISA caller to use
Internal Page.
No
In 0412 Item 8, enter 0 to
allow DISA caller to use
External Page.
No
Should DISA Caller's
Class of Service allow
caller to dial telephone
system operator?
Should DISA Caller's
Class of Service allow
caller to use
Internal Page?
Should DISA Caller's
Class of Service allow
caller to use
External Page?
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 176 ¾
Yes
In 0412 Item 6, enter 1 to
allow DISA caller to dial
telephone system operator.
Yes
In 0412 Item 7, enter 1 to
allow DISA caller to use
Internal Page.
Yes
In 0412 Item 8, enter 1 to
allow DISA caller to use
External Page.
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Should the system Toll
Restrict calls the DISA
caller places over
system trunks?
Yes
In 1812, enter a Toll
Restriction Class (1-8)
for each DISA Class of
Service (1-10).
No
Set Toll Restriction in
Programs 0701 and 0702.
In 1804 Item 1 enter 0 to
no setting for DISA Talkie.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 2
to allow using ACI.
In 1804 Item 2, enter a
DISA Talkie ACI group
for each Trunk line.
In 1303, assign ACI
Group for DISA, Talkie.
ACI
Which DISA Talkie does
DISA caller need better, A.A.T
VAU, Automatic Answering
Telephone or ACI?
VAU
In 1804 Item 1, enter 1
to allow using Automatic
Answering Telephones.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 4
to allow using VAU.
In 1804 Item 2, enter a
DISA Talkie extension group
for each Trunk line.
In 2205, assign VAU
message.
In 1003, assign Extension
Group for Automatic
Answering Telephones.
In 0405 Item 55, enter
the Talkie ACI disconnect
interval.
In 0405 Item 53, enter
the Automatic Answering
Telephone set no answer
interval.
In 0405 Item 54, enter
the Automatic Answering
telephone set disconnect
interval.
Continued
of following
page.
¾ 177 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Yes
After the system
answers, does DISA caller
have adequate time to
dial their number?
No
Check the settings of:
0405 Item 17 - DTMF Receiver Active Time
0405 Item 34 - DISA Dial Tone Time
When DISA caller rings an
extension, does the system
ring for an adequate time
before setting the call as
Ring No Answer?
No
In 0405 Item 35,
change the DISA No
Answer Time.
No
In 0405 Item 75,
change the DISA
Internal Paging Time.
No
In 0405 Item 76,
change the DISA
External Paging Time.
Yes
When DISA caller makes an
Internal Page, does the
system allow the Page to
continue for an adequate
duration?
Yes
When DISA caller makes an
External Page, does the
system allow the Page to
continue for an adequate
duration?
Yes
Stop
¾ 178 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 17: DTMF receiver active timer
After answering the call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the DISA Trunk Line
for this interval (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 34: DUD, DISA dial tone
After answering the DISA trunk, the system waits this interval (0-64800 seconds) for the
caller to dial the first digit of password. If the caller to dial within this interval, the
system drops the call.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 35: DUD, DISA Answer
A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval (0-64800 seconds) before the
system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer routing (see Program 1802 below).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 53: Automatic answering telephone set no answer
Set the answering waiting time of automatic answering telephone after DISA caller dial
DISA password.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 54: Automatic answering telephone set disconnect
Set the announcement time of automatic answering extension, when incoming DUD
Trunk line (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 55: Talkie ACI disconnect
Set the message sending time from ACI.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 73; DISA Conversation
Set the time by the time heard next 1 sec signal tone after Continued Code dialing, when
DISA caller use Trunk to Trunk Transfer.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 74: DISA Conversation Disconnect
Set the waiting time for disconnect, if DISA caller should not dial Continued Code.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 75: DISA Internal Paging
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates
the DISA call.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 76: DISA External Paging
This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates
the DISA call.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 79: DUD/DISA answer delay timer
Setup the interval time, from the system receive the DUD/DISA incoming Call until the
system automatically answer.
> 0405 - System timers, Part A, Item 80: DUD/DISA Group Hunt no answer time
Setup the calling time for department groups pilot number.
> 0412 - COS for DISA Passwords
Enable or disable the following options for each DISA Class of Service
· Rout access for Trunk line
· Group access for Trunk line
· Common abbreviated dialing
· Operator call
¾ 179 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
· Internal paging
· External paging
0414 - System timers, part B, Item 3: DUD/DISA busy tome timer
Setup the busy tone sending time when outside Caller dial the busy extension.
0517 - DISA Control Code
Assign a DISA continue code and DISA disconnect code (up to one digit).
0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 14-17: Service Type
For DISA operation, set the Trunk Line service type to 02. You can have a different
service type for each Night Service mode.
1801 - DISA Password Setup
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit password and DISA Class of Service for each user.
There are 15 users, with one password and DISA Class of Service for each user. This
allows for up to 60 assignments. The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
You cannot use Programs 0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
1802 - DUD, DISA Operation Mode Setup
Set the operating mode. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller doesn't
dial (condition l), calls a busy or unanswered extension (condition 2), dial incorrectly
(condition 3).
The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (1). Set alternate
destination in program 1803.
1803 - DUD, DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup
If you set a DISA Trunk Line operating mode at 1, use this program to assign the ring
group that is the transfer destination. You make a different entry for each Night Service
mode.
1804 - DUD, DISA Talkie
Assign DUD, DISA Talkie type and extension group for Talkie.
1811 - Trunk Line Route Setting for DISA Trunk.
User this program to assign the Trunk Group Route (1-36) chosen when a user places a
DISA call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Line Group Routing in Program 0906.
The rout chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the
password the caller dials.
1812 - Setting of DISA Restriction
If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-8).
The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 0701. The Toll
Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class at Service, which
is determined by the password the caller dials. You cannot use Program 1004 to assign
Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
2205 - Automated Attendant Message assignment
Assign the VAU message number which is used Automated Attendant Message for DISA caller
from VAU.
¾ 180 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 2210 - VAU 1 Digit Code
Assign extension / department group to be called by 1 digit (1 to 0, * and #) from
outside caller per each VAU message (Command 2205).
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
A DISA caller can use Abbreviated Dialing for Trunk to Trunk Transfer call.
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing)
Direct Universal Dialing also allows outside callers to directly access system extensions.
Trunk Outgoing Call
An outside caller can use DISA to place Trunk Line calls through the system.
Paging, External
An outside caller can announcement for External Paging from DISA.
Paging, Internal
An outside caller can announcement for Internal Paging from DISA.
Automated Attendant for the DUD / DISA
When the system answered for incoming call automatically, pre-recorded voice / guidance
message can be sent to caller.
Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any SLT with DTMF sender)
when without DISA Talkie:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line.
Wait for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code). (Used DTMF tone)
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
Dial the system extension number or feature access service code. (Used DTMF tone)
To place a DISA call into the system (from any SLT with DTMF sender)
when with DISA Talkie:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA Trunk Line
Wait for the DISA Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code). (Used DTMF tone)
Hear guidance message from DISA Talkie. (e.x. extension numbers for each member
and feature access service code.)
5. Hear second unique dial tone again.
6. Dial the system extension directly or feature access service code. (Used DTMF tone)
¾ 181 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To place an extension call directly:
1. Hear second unique dial tone.
2. Dial a system extension directly.
To place an Operator call directly:
1. Hear second unique dial tone.
2. Dial an Operator access code.
To place an External Group Paging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hear second unique dial tone.
Dial 803(
).
Dial the group number (1-8 or 0 for All Call)
Make announcement.
To place an Internal Group Paging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hear second unique dial tone.
Dial 801(
).
Dial the group number (1-9 or 01-32).
Make announcement.
To place a call over a Trunk Line Group:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hear second unique dial tone.
Dial 804(
).
Dial line group number (1-9 or 01-32).
Dial telephone number.
To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing:
1. Hear second unique dial tone.
2. Dial 9(
) [Trunk Line Group Routing Code].
3. Dial telephone number.
To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. Hear second unique dial tone.
2. Dial 813(
).
3. Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code (000-399).
¾ 182 ¾
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To continued Trunk to Trunk conversation:
1. Conversation to another outside party.
2. Hear 1 sec signal tone.
3. Dial DISA Continue code within DISA conversation disconnect time.
(Up to one digit)
To disconnect Trunk to Trunk conversation:
1. Conversation to another outside party.
2. Dial DISA conversation disconnect code.
If DISA caller did not dial DISA conversation disconnect code, the system automatic
disconnect after DISA conversation time and DISA conversation disconnect time.
¾ 183 ¾
DLS Console
Description
Basically, DLS Console is designed for “Direct Line Selection” purpose. However, in the
software point of view, either DSS Console or DLS Console is treated as same terminal.
Only difference in between is physical number of “keys”. It means that 100 keys are
provided for DSS Console (except 10-functional keys), and 24 keys for DLS Console.
Actually, the program commands for DSS Console are basically used for DLS Console as
well. However, only the data for first-24-keys are effected for extensions or trunk lines. For
example, if DLS Console is simply connected to keyphone, then key1-key24 shows the
status of ext200-ext223 respectively according to command 1103 as default. In order to
change the status to trunk line 1-24, “24DLS Range Selection” key has to be assigned on a
function key at the keyphone.
<Caution> In the hardware point of view, DLS Console cannot be stayed with DSS
Console. It means the combination of KT+DSS+DLS is not allowed.
(KT+DSS(s) or KT+DLS is allowed)
Conditions
Only 24-key type of keyphones have connectivity of the DLS Console.
(24 Key Super Display Phone & 24 Key Executive Phone)
<Note> For previous keyphone models, 16TXH, 24TXH, 24TSXH and 32TXH provide the
connectivity.
Default Setting
- No DLS Consoles assigned.
Options
DX2E-24DL DLS
¾ 184 ¾
DLS Console (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 1101, assign
DLS Consoles to
extensions.
Do you want to
customize the DLS
Console’s keys for
extensions?
No
Do you want to
customize the DLS
Console's keys for
trunk lines?
No
Yes
In 1103, enter
extension number
for each key.
Yes
In 1106, enter
trunk line number
for each key.
In 1006, enter code1086
(24DLS Range Selection)
for any key.
Should the console
be called by unique
digit 0 or 9?
Yes
In 0501, assign
kind 7 on the digit
required.
No
In 1105, assign
station port.
Stop
¾ 185 ¾
DLS Console (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0501 - System Numbering
Assign kind 7 on the unique digit (maybe 0 or 9) as operator usage.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys, Code1086: 24DLS Range Selection
Assign the function key on keyphone for DLS Console in case that 2nd page data
(key101-124) are used.
> 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment
Designate the DLS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have DLS Consoles
connected to them).
> 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Assign Extension number to each DLS console keys.
> 1105 - Operator’s Extension
Enter extension port number for operator’s position to be called by unique digit 0/9.
> 1106 - DLS Console Key Assignments
Assign trunk line to each DLS Console keys.
Related Features
One-Touch Dialing
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DLS Console keys for Direct Station Selection
or Trunk Line Calling.
DSS Console
Basically, same functions are provided for one touch access to extension or trunk line,
except 10 functional keys of DSS Console.
¾ 186 ¾
DLS Console (Cont'd)
Operation
Calling an extension from your DLS Console: (as DSS key usage)
(Confirm “24DLS Range Selection” key shows OFF.)
1. Press DLS Console key.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1(
).
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
On
Off
Flashing fast
The assigned extension is...
Busy on a call
Idle
In Do Not Disturb
Placing a Trunk line call from your DLS Console (as DLS usage):
(Confirm “24DLS Range Selection” key shows ON.)
1. Press DLS Console key assigned for Trunk Line
2. Dial outside number.
Trunk Line Busy Lamp Field
When DLS key is...
On
Off
Flashing slowly
The assigned trunk line is ...
Busy on a call
Idle
Ringing
Answering a Trunk Line call from your DLS Console (as DLS usage):
(Confirm “24DLS Range Selection” key shows ON.)
1. Press flashing DLS Console key.
¾ 187 ¾
Do Not Disturb
Description
Do Not disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an
extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements.
When the user activates DND, incoming Trunk Line calls still flash the line keys. The user
may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
There are four Do Not Disturb options available at each extension:
1 = Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked DND EXTERNAL
2 = Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked DND INTERCOM
3 = Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked DND ALL
4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked DND TRANSFER
0 = CANCEL
Conditions
This feature available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows it to use Do Not Disturb.
- Service Code of Do Not Disturb is dial 847.
- Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 12: Do Not Disturb
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disturb (0) an extension's ability to use
Do Not Disturb.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 7: Do Not Disturb
Assign a service code of Do Not Disturb.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 10: Common Canceling service code
Assign a service code of common Canceling service code is dial 720.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 188 ¾
Do Not Disturb (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 12, enter 0 to
prevent extension from
using Do Not Disturb.
No Should extension be able Yes
to use Do Not Disturb?
In 0406 Item 12, enter 1 to
allow extension to use
Do Not Disturb.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Do Not Disturb and
Common Canceling
Service Code?
No
Stop
¾ 189 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Do Not Disturb (Cont'd)
Related Features
Call Forward
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from
forwarding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates
DND option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Call Forward/Do Not Disturb Override
An extension user can override Call Forward or Do Not Disturb (Bypass Call) at another
extension.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb at your extension:
1. Do not lift the handset.
2. Press DND key.
OR
Press idle CL key and dial 847(
).
3. Dial the DND option code
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked
2 = Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked
3 = Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked
4 = Transferred calls blocked
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To cancel Do Not Disturb:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel an alarm dock by dial 720, these features are canceled at same
time: DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text
Message.
¾ 190 ¾
Do Not Disturb (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb at your extension:
1. Do not lift the handset.
2. Off hook and dial 847 (
).
3. Dial the DND option code
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Line calls blocked
2 = Incoming Intercom and transferred Trunk Line calls blocked
3 = Incoming Trunk Line and Intercom calls blocked
4 = Transferred calls blocked
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To cancel Do Not Disturb:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. On hook.
When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720, these features are canceled at same
time, DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text
Message.
¾ 191 ¾
Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override
Description
An extension user can override Do Not Disturb or Call Forward at another extension.
This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get
through.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows initiating Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override.
- Service Code of Do Not Disturb Override/Call Forward is dial 807.
- One Digit Service Code of Bypass Call (DND/FWD Override) is no setting.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 4: DND Override/Call Forward (Bypass Call)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the initiate Call
Forward/DND Override.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Assign a service code for Bypass call (Item 2: dial 807)
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Part A Item 6: Bypass Call
Assign a One Digit Service Code for Bypass call (DND/FWD override).
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override (code 1022).
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function Keys simplify DND/FWD Override option.
¾ 192 ¾
Do Not Disturb/Call Forward Override (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 4,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to initiate DND/Call
Forward Override?
Yes
In 0406 Item 4,
enter 1.
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
DND/Call Forward
Override?
Yes
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, assign a DND
Call Forward Override
(code 1001).
Do you change the
Service Code for
DND/Call Forward
Override?
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
DND/Call Forward
Override?
In Program 0512 Service
No. 7, assign a One Digit
Service Code for DND/Call
Forward Override.
Stop
¾ 193 ¾
Do Not Disturb/ Call Forward Override (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To override an extension's Do Not Disturb or Call Forward :
1. DND extension or Call the forwarding.
2. Press Override key (PGM 1006 or SC 1022).
OR
Dial 807(
).
OR
One Digit Service Code (
).
<Single Line Telephone>
To override an extension's Do Not Disturb or Call Forward :
1. DND extension or Call the forwarding.
2. Dial 807(
).
OR
One Digit Service Code (
).
¾ 194 ¾
Door Lock Control
Description
A customer provided Door lock device can be installed with one of the Doorphone boxes
You can connect each circuit’s control relay to an electric door strike. So that the extension
user to remotely activate the door strike while taking to a visitor at the doorphone.
The control relays are normally open. .
Conditions
Door lock control requires a customer provided Electric door lock device connected to the
PGDU card. Refer to the System Hardware Manual.
Default Setting
Duration time for Door lock open is 10 seconds.
Option
DX2E-4PGDU-S1 and NT-S-D6 Doorphone
Programming
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 59: Door lock control time
Set the duration time for door lock open.
¾ 195 ¾
Door Lock Control (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Complete Doorphone
Installation and Programming
No
Refer to the Hardware Manual
for Door Lock control Relays.
No
Do you complete to
installed the Doorphone
box and set the basic
programming for
Doorphone function?
i t ll d?
Yes
Do you complete to
Installed the Electric
door strike?
Yes
Do you want to change
the duration time for
door lock open
(default:10s)?
No
Stop
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate the Doorphone strike:
1.
While talking to the Doorphone, press the Flash key.
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate the Doorphone strike:
1. While talking to the Doorphone, Hook/Flash.
¾ 196 ¾
Yes
In 0405 Item 59,
change the door lock
opening time.
Doorphone
Description
The Doorphone is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used for an entrance door. A
visitor at the door can press the Doorphone call button (like a door bell). The Doorphone
then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the
chime, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the
visitor at the Doorphone. The Doorphone is convenient to have at a delivery entrance; they
just answer the Doorphone chimes instead.
The system can have up to eight Doorphones.
l Door Lock Control
When you have an electric door lock, you can open an electric door lock from talking
key telephone.
Conditions
(A) For each Doorphone port, slide the selector switch on the PGDU card to the DH
position. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.
Default Setting
- All Doorphone ports use gain type 0 (0 dB gain).
- A user must answer the Doorphone chimes within 30 seconds.
- All Doorphones don't ring extensions.
- The system assigns Doorphone Chime patterns as follows:
- Service Code of Doorphone access is dial 802.
Options
DX2E-4PGDU-S1 and NT-S-D6 Doorphone
¾ 197 ¾
Doorphone (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
No
Refer to the Hardware Manual
for Doorphone installation.
Is Doorphone
installed?
Yes
In 1502, select the
station port you want to
have not ring and enter 0.
No
Should extensions ring
when Doorphone user
presses call button?
Is the Doorphone
caller's voice at
a normal level?
Yes
No
In 1502, select the
station port you want to
have ring and enter 1.
In 0120, assign a
Doorphone gain type that
either decreases or
increases the volume.
Yes
Use 0119 to customize the
gain entries you set in 0120.
Do Doorphones ring
No
extensions for the proper
amount of time?
In 0405 Item 14, change the
Doorphone Answer Time.
Yes
If the Doorphone chimes stop before
users can answer them, consider
extending the Doorphone Answer Time.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Doorphone access?
No
Stop
¾ 198 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Doorphone (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0119 - External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type
Set the five CODEC gain types for External Page and Doorphone Box ports.
> 0120 - External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type
Assign a CODEC gain type to the External Page and Doorphone Box ports.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 14: Doorphone Answer Time
Set the interval within which a user must answer the Doorphone Box chimes.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 18: Doorphone access
Assign a service code of Doorphone access.
> 1502 - Doorphone Ring Assignment
Determine which Doorphone Boxes should ring which extensions.
Related Features
Paging, External
If a PGDU card has a Doorphone connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
¾ 199 ¾
Doorphone (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To call a Doorphone:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 802(
).
3. Dial Doorphone Number (1-8).
To answer a Doorphone chime:
1. Lift handset.
<Single Line Telephone>
To call a Doorphone:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 802(
).
3. Dial Doorphone Number (1-8).
To answer a Doorphone chime:
1. Lift handset.
¾ 200 ¾
DSS Console
Description
The DSS Console gives an extension user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and one-button access
to extensions or Trunk Line. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing (e.g.,
operators or dispatchers).
The DSS Console simplifies:
- Calling extensions and Doorphones
- Placing answering and transferring outside calls
- Making an External or Internal Page
- Switching the Night Service mode
- Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer (Call Pick Up)
The system allows up to four extensions to have DSS Consoles. Each of the four extensions
can have two consoles daisy chained together for a system total of 8. If an extension has
two DSS Consoles, the 2nd console requires a separate power supply.
When one DSS Console is connected to a keyphone, the appearance with EXT.1 key shows
for DSS key, and EXT.2 key appearance is for DLS key usage.
In case of two DSS Consoles are connected to a keyphone, the 1st Console shows DSS key
appearance (regardless EXT.1 or EXT.2 key), and 2nd Console shows DLS key
appearance.
Conditions
Only 24-key type of keyphones have connectivity of the DSS console.
(24 Key Super Display Phone & 24 Key Executive Phone)
<Note> For previous keyphone models, 16TXH, 24TXH, 24TSXH and 32TXH provide the
connectivity.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows DSS Console Alternate Answer.
- No DSS Consoles assigned.
- All console key ranges are 1 (extension ports 1-200).
- Console cannot change Night Service mode.
- The system has 8 External Paging zones. Each zone requires customer-provided
equipment.
- The system has no Internal Paging zones programmed.
- No Doorphone installed.
Options
DX2E-110D DSS
¾ 201 ¾
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
DSS number corresponds to console
installation number. There are four
installations - with up to two consoles
connected at each installation.
In 1101, assign
DSS Consoles to
extensions.
Do you want to
customize the DSS
Console’s keys for
extensions?
Yes
In 1103, enter
extension numbers.
No
Do you want to
customize the DSS
Console's keys for
trunk lines?
Yes
In 1106, enter
trunk line number
for each key.
No
Does console
use Alternate
Answering?
Yes
No
In 1104, select 0
for the alternate
A
(Go to B an
next page)
¾ 202 ¾
In 1104, select
alternate destination's
console number.
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
B
(From A on
previous
page).
Do you want user to Yes
change Night Service
mode?
Refer to Night Service
feature for
programming details.
No
Do you want user to
make External and
Internal Paging?
Yes
Refer to Paging, External
and Paging, Internal
features for programming
details.
No
Do you want user to
call Door Boxes?
Yes
Refer to Door Box feature
for programming details.
Yes
In 0406 Item 28,
enter 1.
No
In 0406 Item 28,
enter 0.
No
Should the console
be able to use
Alternate Answer?
Should the console
be called by unique
digit 0 or 9?
Yes
In 0501, assign
kind 7 on the digit
required.
No
In 1105, assign
station port.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
¾ 203 ¾
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 28: Off-duty at setting for DSS console
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to use
DSS Console Alternate Answer.
> 0501 - System Numbering
Assign kind 6 on the unique digit (maybe 0 or 9) as operator usage.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign Class of Service (1-10) to extensions.
> 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment
Designate the DSS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have DSS Consoles
connected to them).
> 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Assign an Extension number to each DSS key.
> 1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering
If the console should have Alternate Answering, use this program to assign the Alternate
Answering Destination.
> 1106 - DLS Console Key Assignments
Assign trunk line to each DSS keys.
Related Features
Doorphone
The DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Doorphones.
Refer to the Doorphone Box Feature when programming Doorphones.
Trunk Line Calls, Answering and Outgoing
A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.
Night Service
The DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to the Night
Service feature when programming Night Service options.
One-Touch Calling
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection,
Trunk Line Calling and Service code access.
Paging, External and Internal
The DSS Console provides one-touch External and Infernal Page zone access. Refer the
External Paging and Internal Paging features when programming Paging.
¾ 204 ¾
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:
1. Press EXT.1 to select DSS appearance.
(in case of two DSS Consoles are connected, then use 1st Console for extension access)
2. Press DSS Console key for extension.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1(
).
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
On
Off
Flashing fast
The assigned extension is...
Busy on a call
Idle
In Do Not Disturb
Placing a Trunk Line call from your DSS Console (as DLS usage):
1. Press EXT.2 to select DLS appearance.
(in case of two DSS Consoles are connected, then use 2nd Console for trunk access)
2. Press DSS Console key for Trunk Line
3. Dial outside number.
Trunk Line Busy Lamp Field
When DSS key is...
On
Off
Flashing slowly
The assigned trunk line is ...
Busy on a call
Idle
Ringing
Answering a Trunk Line call from your DSS Console (as DLS usage):
1. Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to Trunk Line.
Calling a Doorphone from your DSS Console (as DLS usage):
1. Press DOOR.
2. Press DSS Console key for Doorphone you want to call (1-8).
Doorphone Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
On
Off
The assigned Doorphone is...
Busy or ringing in
Idle
¾ 205 ¾
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Transferring a call using your DSS Console:
1. Place or answer call.
If you are on an Intercom call, press HOLD before going to the next step.
2. Press DSS key for extension that will receive transfer.
You cannot Transfer to an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb.
3. (Optional) Announce call.
If called party doesn't want the call, press flashing line key to retrieve it.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
Making Extension Page using your DSS Console:
1. Press PAGE.
2. Press DSS Console Extension Page zone key (1-8).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
On
Off
The External Page zone is ...
Busy
Idle
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console:
1. Press GROUP.
2. Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Department Group key (1 -32)).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is,..
On
Off
The Internal Page zone is...
Busy
Idle
¾ 206 ¾
DSS Console (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console:
1. Press Night Service key (NIGHT, DAY, BREAK or NITE 2).
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
When this key is ON ...
NIGHT
DAY
BREAK
NITE2
The system is in the ...
Night Mode
Day Mode
Rest Mode
Midnight Mode
Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer:
1. Press ALT.
You hear a short confirmation tone.
If you hear a long tone, you cannot activate Alternate Answer.
In this case, another user has already activated your console as his/her Alternate
Answer destination.
Alternate Answer Busy Lamp Field
When the ALT key is ...
On
Off
Alternate Answer is ...
Enabled
Disabled
¾ 207 ¾
Dual Line Appearance
Description
Each keyset has two line appearance keys (CL1 and CL2) for placing and answering calls.
These line appearance keys, assigned to the extension's number, simplify operations for
busy users. For example, the user can easily process a new call on one appearance with a
call in progress on the other.
Conditions
This feature available for Key Telephone. (Without LC2 type key telephones)
Default Setting
All keysets have Dual Line Appearance
Options
None
Programming
None
Related Features
Override
Override call rings an extension's second line appearance when the first appearance is busy.
Operation
None
¾ 208 ¾
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing)
Description
DUD permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions. This helps outside callers
that know the extension numbers of the people they want to reach. For example, a
salesperson can call their in-house assistant directly-without going through a company
operator. To use DUD, the outside caller:
- Dials the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk Line
- Waits for the DUD Trunk Line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
- Dials the system extension directly
l
DUD/DISA Talkie
This system can be automatic announce to DUD caller from DUD/DISA Talkie.
DUD/DISA Talkie can be assigned 3 port ACI or SLT port. Audio system (ex. Tape
recorder) connected to 3 port ACI. Automatic answer system (ex. Automatic answering
telephone) connected to SLT port.
DUD/DISA Talkie announce extension number to DUD caller practical use.
To use DUD with DUD/DISA Talkie, the outside caller:
- Dials the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk line.
- Hears guidance message from DUD/DISA Talkie, (ex. extension numbers for each
number and feature access service code).
- Hears unique dial tone again.
- Dials the system extension directly or feature access service code.
l
Answering Extension Call for DUD
DUD calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key
for the DUD Trunk Line, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line
key, the call rings an idle CL key.
l
Answering Extension Call for DUD
DUD calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key
for the DUD Trunk Line, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line
key, the call rings an idle CL key.
l
Automatic Transfer to Incoming Ring Group conditionally
If DUD call is not completed due to dial tone time-over, busy/no-answer or wrong
number, the system automatically shall transfer it to incoming ring group as
programmed.
¾ 209 ¾
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
l Night Service for Trunk Line Type
You can set DUD operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a Trunk
line can be a normal Trunk Line during the day and a DUD Trunk Line at night. You can
also set the routing for DUD Trunk Line when the caller dials a busy or unanswered
extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
l Delayed DUD
For the incoming call, user can answer it as usual within pre-programmed period. However,
if the call is not answered (due to busy at Operator, etc...) within pre-programmed period,
the system automatically goes to answer it. And outside party shall hear voice-message /
music / dial-tone according to the following conditions :- If VAU adaptor is connected...: The system sends pre-recorded message from VAU.
- If DISA Talkie(s) is / are connected... : The system sends message / music from the
Talkie(s).
- If no equipment is connected for announcement...: The system sends the unique dial tone
to outside caller.
Note : DISA Talkie shall be provided by customer.
In other words, this feature means that the Normal Incoming Call mode will be changed to
the DUD mode after the pre-programmed period has been passed.
l 1 Digit Access on DUD / DISA (VAU)
Any extensions can be defined as 1 digit which to be dialed from outside caller on DUD /
DISA with VAU Adaptor. The outside caller is able to access to the desired extension /
department group by dialing only 1 digit after the system automatically answered.
Note: If same number is used for 1st digit of extension number and 1digit access code on
DUD/DISA, out side caller can not access directly to the extension.
Example, if 1 digit access code “2” is assigned to department group “300”,
outside caller can not access to extension 200 to 299 directly.
Because outside caller tries to dial extension 200, however after dialing “2”, it
goes to department “300” immediately by 1 digit access function.
Conditions
The DUD caller must use a DTMF telephone.
This feature available for outside caller.
¾ 210 ¾
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Default Setting
- No DTDU blocks reserved for analog Trunk line DTMF reception.
- The DTMF Receiver Active Time is 10 seconds.
- The DUD/DISA Dial Tone Time is 10 seconds.
-The DUD/DISA No Answer Time is 10 seconds.
- DUD/DISA will disconnect for timeout, busy and if the user makes a mistake in dialing.
- All service types of trunk lines are assigned as normal.
- Delayed DUD Timer is set to 10 seconds.
Options
DX2E-4DTDU-S1 (if VAU adaptor is not installed)
DX2E-4ASTU-S1 (for DISA Talkie, such as Answering Machine)
DX2E-3ACI-A(for DISA Talkie, such as CD player)
DX2E-VAU-A
DX2E-VAU-B1 (to be used to expand the talk path)
¾ 211 ¾
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
No
Type 1
In 0901 Items 14-17, set
the circuit type for DUD
trunks (type 1) or Delayed
DUD trunk (type 6)?.
Do you wish to set any
extension or extension
group to be called by one
digit from outside?
Yes
Assign data in
Program 2210.
Type 6
Do you specify the time for Yes
delay (10 sec : default)?
In Program 0414 Item 7,
Set the time
(0-64800 sec.)
No
In Program 0921
Item 2, enter 0
No
Does alarm signal generate
when delayed DUD call is
transferred to ring group
according to the setting at
Command 1802 and 1803.
Yes
Should dialing mistakes
from DUD callers cause
Transfer or disconnect?
Disconnect
Transfer
To set DUD operation
mode to disconnect, in
1802 Items l-3, enter 0.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 2
to allow using ACI.
In 1804 Item 2, enter a
DISA Talkie ACI group
for each Trunk line.
In 1303, assign ACI
Group for DISA Talkie.
In 0405 Item 55, enter
the Talkie ACI disconnect
interval.
ACI
Which DISA Talkie does
A.A.T
DISA caller need better,
VAU, Automatic Answering
Telephone or ACI?
VAU
In 1804 Item 1, enter 4
to allow using VAU.
In 2205,assign VAU
message .
In Program 0921
Item 2, enter 1
To set DUD operation
mode to Transfer, in
1802 Items 1-3, enter 1.
Item 1 = Timeout
Item 2 = RNA/busy
Item 3 = Mistake
in dialing
Set Transfer destination
(Ring Group) in 1803.
In 1804 Item 1, enter 1 to
allow using A.A.T.
In 1804 Item 2, enter a
DISA Talkie extension group
for each Trunk line.
In 1003, assign Extension
Group for A.A.T.
In 0405 Item 53, enter the
A.A.T set no answer interval.
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 212 ¾
In 0405 Item 54, enter
the A.A.T set disconnect
interval.
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Yes
After the system
answers, does DUD caller
have adequate time to
dial their number?
No
Check the settings of:
0405 Item 17 - DTMF Receiver Active Time
0405 Item 34 - DUD/DISA Dial Tone Time
When DUD caller rings an
extension, does the system
ring for an adequate time
before setting the call as
Ring No Answer?
No
Yes
Stop
¾ 213 ¾
In 0405 Item 35,
change the DUD No
Answer Time.
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 34: DUD, DISA Dial Tone
After answering the DUD trunk, the system waits this interval (0-64800 seconds) for the
caller to dial the first digit of extension number.
If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the system drops the call.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 35: DUD, DISA Answer
A DUD caller can ring an extension for this interval (0-64800 seconds) before the
system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer routing (see Program 1802 below).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 53: Automatic answering telephone set no answer
Set the answering waiting time of automatic answering extension, when incoming DUD
Trunk line (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 54: Automatic answering telephone set disconnect
Set the announcement time of automatic answering extension, when incoming DUD
Trunk line (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 55: Talkie ACI disconnect
Set the announcement time of Talkie ACI, when incoming DUD Trunk line (0-64800
seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 79: DUD/DISA answer delay timer
Setup the interval time, from the system receive the DUD/DISA incoming Call until the
system automatically answer.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 80: DUD/DISA Group Hunt no answer time
Setup the calling time for department groups pilot number.
> 0414 - System Timers, part B, Item 3: DUD/DISA busy tome timer
Setup the busy tone sending time when outside caller dial the busy extension.
> 0414 - System Timers, part B, Item 7: Delayed DUD answer timer
Assign the delay time from normal incoming status to DUD mode. If this time is set to
“0 sec”, this call will switch to DUD mode immediately.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 14-17: Service Type
For DISA operation, set the Trunk Line service type to 02. You can have a different
service type for each Night Service mode.
Type “6” defines the Delayed DUD on trunk line for Day / Night / Mid Night / Rest
mode.
> 0921 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part B Item 2: DUD,DISA transfer alarm
When DUD / DISA call is transferred to ring group according to the setting at
Command 1802 and 1803, alarm signal shall be generated if the data is set to “1”.
> 1802 - DUD, DISA Operation Made Setup
Set the operating mode of each DUD Trunk line. This sets what happens to the call
when the DUD caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either
disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (1). Set the alternate destination in
program 1802.
¾ 214 ¾
DUD (Direct Universal Dialing) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1803 - DUD, DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup
If you set a DISA Trunk Line operating mode at 1, use this program to assign the ring
group that is the transfer destination. You make a different entry for each Night Service
mode.
> 1804 - DUD, DISA Talkie
If you want to automate announcement to DUD caller when incoming DUD call, use
this program to assign connected port of the automated announcement extension (ACI or
SLT type). (e.x. Automatic answering telephone)
> 2205 - Automated Attendant Message assignment
Assign the VAU message number which is used Automated Attendant Message for DUD caller
from VAU.
> 2210 - VAU 1 Digit Code
Assign extension / department group to be called by 1 digit (1 to 0, * and #) from
outside caller per each VAU message (Command 2205).
Related Features
Trunk Outgoing Call
An outside caller cannot use DUD to place Trunk line through the system.
Direct Universal Dialing (DUD)
Outside caller can call to the desired extension directly from outside by adding the
extension number after the system automatically answered. Delayed DUD feature should
require the basic DUD assignment.
Automated Attendant for DUD / DISA (VAU)
When the system answered for incoming call automatically on DUD / DISA Line, prerecorded voice message / guidance can be sent to caller if VAU is connected. In case that
the voice message / guidance function is required, VAU assignment should be set.
Operation
To place a DUD call into the system (from any telephone with DTMF sender):
1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk line.
2. Wait for the DUD Trunk line to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3. Dial a system extension directly.
When the system has DUD Talkie.:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DUD Trunk line.
Wait for the DUD Talkie automatically answer.
Hear the automatic announcement.
Wait for a unique dial tone.
Dial a system extension directly.
¾ 215 ¾
External Alarm Sensor
Description
The system provides up to 8 alarm sensors that you can connect to customer-provide alarm
contacts. When the alarm contact activates, designated extensions broadcast a unique alert
tone. This lets the extension users know that the alarm has been activated. External Alarm
Sensors could help a receptionist, for example, that frequently has to leave the reception
desk to do some filing. When a visitor opens the company's door, an alarm contact on the
door could signal a telephone in the filing area. When the receptionist hears the alarm alert
tone, they know it's time to return to the reception area and greet the visitor. The alarm alert
tone continues as long as the door remains open.
Conditions
Each external alarm uses an alarm sensor circuit in the PGDU card. The PGDU alarm
sensor circuit requires 5 - 24 VDC power supply in series with the alarm contacts. Refer to
the hardware manual for additional details.
Default Setting
- PGDU sensors 1-8 (card 1&2) are set as alarm sensors.
- PGDU sensors are normally open.
- External alarms don't alert extensions.
Options
DX2E-4PGDU-S1
¾ 216 ¾
External Alarm Sensor (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 0304, make sure PGDU
sensors are type 0 (not used)
or 2 (for bridged fax operation).
In 0304 Additional
Information for each sensor,
assign the same alert
tone to each sensor.
In 0305, enter 0 for
each sensor connected
to a normally closed
relay.
In 1010, enter 0 for
each sensor that should
not alert extension.
No
No
Normally
closed
No
Do you need Yes
External Alarm
Sensors?
Should alarms provide Yes
distinctive alert tones
to extension?
Is sensor's
associated alarm
contact normally
open or normally
closed?
Do you want
extension to
broadcast an alert
tone when the
alarm activates?
Stop
¾ 217 ¾
In 0304, program PGDU sensors
for type 1 (alarm).
In 0304 Additional Information
for each sensor, assign one of
the three alert tones (1-3) to
each sensor.
Normally
Open
Yes
In 0305, enter 1 for
each sensor connected
to a normally open
relay.
In 1010, enter 1 for
each sensor that should
alert extension.
External Alarm Sensor (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0304 - Alarm Sensor/FAX Sensor Setup (PGDU Card)
For external alarm sensors, program the PGDU sensor for alarm (type 1) and alarm ring
tone (1-3).
> 0305 - Alarm Sensor Activation Mode (PGDU Card)
Program each alarm sensor for normally closed (0) or normally open (1) operation.
> 1010 - Alarm Sensor Ringing Extension Setup
Determine which alarms should alert which extensions. For each sensor, enter 1 to ring
extension or 0 to not ring extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
If you program an extension to activate for an alarm and the alarm occurs, the alarm alert
tone continues at the extension until the alarm condition goes away.
¾ 218 ¾
External Call Forward
Description
This feature allows specified incoming callers (ISDN, DUD/DISA, DIL, E&M and
Intercom) to be transferred automatically to the pre-programmed external party. The
destination telephone number for “External Call Forward” is stored in Common
Abbreviated Dial area. This feature may be used in case that the extension user is absent.
All incoming calls for him/her shall automatically be transferred to his/her desired external
party. (ex. Mobile-Phone)
Conditions
- This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone.
(Note1) This feature is not available for normal incoming call on the normal line. (090114_17=0)
(Note2) This feature is not available in case of “Chained-Call Forward”. (eg. Ext.A
forwards to Ext.B. Then, Ext.B sets “Call Forward” to “ABB001”.)
(Note3) After the calling party has connected to the desired external party, the system shall
take 2 deferent ways of disconnection procedure according to the type of incoming
line as below:l If incoming line type is DUD, DISA or DIL (0901-14_17=1,2 or 4) on
Analogue trunk, then the system sends alert tone on the conversation to
remind. (In case 0517 is completed, continue/discontinue code can be used,
except DIL feature.)
<Note> In case of Busy Tone Detection program is activated (0921Item10=0), then the trunk line shall automatically be cut when one of
parties hangs up, then.
l If incoming line type is ISDN or E&M, then the both parties can speak and
hung up simply without special operations.
Default Setting
- This feature is not assigned.
- Service code for “Call Forward” is 848.
- Function key code for “Call Forward” is 1055.
Option (Required Items)
- ISDN, DUD/DISA, DIL, E&M Facility
¾ 219 ¾
External Call Forward (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Complete Abbreviated
dial (Common)
Programming.
No
DIL, DUD/DISA, E&M and
ISDN programming has to
be entered accordingly.
Do you complete to set
the basic programming
for Abbreviated dial
(Common)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 79,
enter 0
No
Should extension be
able to use External
Call Forward ?
Yes
In 0406 Item 79,
enter 1
Should extension have
one-button access to
Call Forwarding ?
Yes
In 1006 assign a Call
Forward(code 1055)
No
In 0925, assign the
calling line route for each
incoming call.
In 0604, assign trunk
group for each
abbreviated number.
Is DISA feature used?
Yes
No
Are analogue trunk
lines used?
Yes
No
Do you want to change
the Service code for
Call Forward(848) ?
No
Stop
¾ 220 ¾
Yes
In 0517, define continue
and disconnect codes
In 0405 Item 73, set how
long later send a alarm
tone to caller.
In 0405 Item 74, set how
long later disconnect line,
if caller does not dial a
continue code.
In 0921-Item10, enter 1 for
Busy Detection.
In 0116-Item19_32, Tone
type2, enter appropriate
data for your Busy Tone
specification.
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature
External Call Forward (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0116 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup: (Item19 - Item32 for Tone type2)
If 0921-Item10 is set to 0 (for BT detection ON), then enter appropriate data of your
exchange busy tone.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Item 73 : DISA conversation
Item 74 : DISA conversation disconnect
Set the timers for DUD, DISA or DIL function on Analogue trunk.
> 0406 - Class Of Service Options
Item 79 : External Call Forward
In extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “External Call
Forward”.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 85 : Call Forward
Assign the Service Code for “Call Forward”.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 23 : Common abbreviated dial
Assign the Service Code for “Common Abbreviated Dial”.
> 0517 - DISA control code
Assign the code for continue/disconnect the conversation.
> 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part B : Item10 Busy Tone Detection
Enable(0) or disable (1) for busy tone detection for cutting off the paths
> 0925 - Route Table Setup for Trunk on External Call Forward
Assign the Exchange Line Route for “External Call Forward” for each incoming call.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys Function No. : 1055
One of the idle Function key is assigned as “Call Forward” key.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
The destination telephone number for “External Call Forward” is stored in Common
Abbreviated Dial area.
¾ 221 ¾
External Call Forward (Cont’d)
Operation
< Key Telephone >
To activate External Call Forward
1. Press idle CL key. Dial 848 (
) for Call Forward.
OR
Press Call Forward key. (Command 1006 : code 1055)
2. Dial “1” to setup.
3. Dial 813 (
) for Common Abbreviated dial access instead of extension No.
entering.
4. Dial target abbreviated dial number. (Confirmation Tone will be heard.)
5. Press SPK to finish.
To cancel External Call Forward
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 848 (
) for Call Forward.
OR
Press Call Forward key. (Command 1006 : code 1055)
3. Dial “0” to cancel. (Confirmation Tone will be heard.)
4. Press SPK to finish.
< Single Line Telephone >
To activate External Call Forward
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 848 (
) for Call Forward.
3. Dial “1” to setup.
4. Dial 813 (
) for Common Abbreviated dial access instead of extension No.
entering.
5. Dial target abbreviated No.. (Confirmation Tone will be heard.)
6. Hang up to finish.
To cancel External Call Forward
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 848 (
) for Call Forward.
3. Dial “0” to cancel. (Confirmation Tone will be heard.)
4. Hang up to finish.
¾ 222 ¾
External Music On Hold
Description
A customer provided music source (i.e., tape/CD player, radio) can be connected to the
system (through 32CPRU) for Music On Hold (MOH) purpose instead of internal
synthesized melody. Or 3ACI module provides the connectivity of the above music sources
as well.
For the details of switch setting or the connections, refer to Hardware manual.
Condition
The feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- All Trunk Lines use the internal Music on Hold source.
- ACI port type is no setting.
Options
Music Device or DX2E-3ACI-A
Programming
Start
Should MOH use
external or ACI for
source?
ACI
In 0914, assign ACI
software port (1-6) to
selected Trunk line.
External
(on CRPU)
Check short-pin setting
on 32CPRU unit.
In 0914, enter option
255 for selected
Trunk line.
In 1301, set ACI
software port assigned
above to input (1).
In 0302 Item 1,
enter 1 or 2 for
not No-tone.
No need to change 0302entering an ACI software
port in 0914 overrides it.
Stop
¾ 223 ¾
External Music On Hold (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup. Item 1: Music on Hold tone
Set the Music on Hold selection. The options are 0 (no tone), 1 (synthesized Minuet in
G), 2 (synthesized Nocturne). For external MOH purpose, don’t set “0”.
> 0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source
Set the Music on Hold source.
> 1301 - Basic ACI port setup
Set the ACI port type. The option are 0 (no setting), 1 (Input for ACI port), 2 (Output for
ACI port).
Related Feature
Music on Hold
Operation
None
¾ 224 ¾
Flash
Description
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting
Trunk Line loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever
features the connected public network or PBX offers. You must set appropriate Flash
parameters for compatibility with the connected public network or PBX lines.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone (by service code).
The system does not provide a ground flash.
Default Setting
Flash timer (Hooking 1) is 800 mS.
Open Loop Disconnect timer is 2.496 seconds.
A single line telephone extension's Class of Service enables Flash.
Flash is always set for open loop (not ground).
All Trunk Line use timed Flash mode (not open loop disconnect).
Options
None
Programming
Note: See programming flow chart on the following page.
> 0114 - Analog Trunk Line (ATRU Card) Timers, Item 9: Hooking Time 1 (for timed
flash)
Set the Flash duration (16-4080 mS) for analog Trunk Line (ATRU Card) circuits.
> 0114 - Analog Trunk Line (ATRU Card) Timers, Item 10: Hooking Time 2 (for
disconnection)
Set the open loop disconnect duration (16-4080 mS) for analog Trunk Line (ATRU
Card) circuits.
> 0402 - System Options, Part B, Item 2: Transfer Key Operating Mode
If TRFR key should access Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or 1.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 1: Hooking (SLT set)
In a single line telephone's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to
hookflash for system feature access.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 34: Hooking (Flashing)
Assign a service code of hooking (flashing).
¾ 225 ¾
Flash (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In Program 0901 Item 5,
always set the Flash type
for open loop (0).
In Program 0114 Item
10, set the open loop
disconnect duration.
Disconnect
Call
Should Flash access
trunk's feature or
disconnect call?
Trunk's
Features
In Program 0901 Item
6, set trunk for
disconnect (1).
In 0406 Item 1, disable
Flash for single line
telephones (0).
In Program 0114 Item
9, set the Flash
duration.
In Program 0901 Item
5, set trunk for open
loop Flash (0).
No
Should single line
telephone be able to
Flash Trunk lines?
Yes
In 0406 Item 1, enable
Flash for single line
telephones (1).
Yes
In Program 0402 Item
2, enter 2.
Assign a Class of Service
to single line telephones.
Should keyset TRFR
key activate Flash?
No
In Program 0402 Item 2,
enter 0 (for Transfer)
or 1 (for Serial Call).
Do you change the
Service Code for Flash?
No
Stop
¾ 226 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Flash (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A
Item 5: Hooking/Grounding
Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash (0).
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 6: Hooking Type
For each Trunk Line, indicate if Flash is for Flash (0) or open loop disconnect (1).
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
If the system is behind a PBX, Flash normally gives the extension user access to many
PBX features.
Toll Restriction
The system applies Toll Restriction (if applicable) to the number a user dials after
flashing a Trunk Line.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To flash the Trunk Line:
1. Press FLSH.
<Single Line Telephone>
To flash the Trunk Line:
1. Hooking
2. Dial 806(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
¾ 227 ¾
Flexible System Numbering
Description
Flexible System numbering lets you reassign the system's port-to-extension and Service
Code of function assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if
they move to a different office. And or usual used Service Code change to two digits
numbering.
In addition, factory technicians can make comprehensive changes to your system's number
plan. You can have factory technicians:
- Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension
numbers can be up to four digits long.
- Change your system's Service Code numbers.
- Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes.
Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.
You can also use Flexible System numbering to change the system's Trunk Line Group
Routing code. Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you can alter
the code if you have to.
Conditions
Programming follows a telephone's port number, not the extension number.
If you relocate a phone, you may need to change additional programming.
Default Setting
- Extensions are numbered consecutively from 200 (port 01) to 271 (port 72).
- Virtual Extension number not assigned.
- The Trunk Line Group Routing access code is 9.
- Operator access code is 0.
- For Service Code, first digit is 7 and 8, both are 3 digits long. (700-899)
Options
None
¾ 228 ¾
Flexible System Numbering (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Do you want to change
the telephone port's
extension number?
Yes
In 0501, select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
then enter the digits and type
(2: extension access).
No
In 0502, select telephone port
you want to change and then
enter the new extension.
No
Does the system
programming show
"Duplicate Data?"
Yes
The extension number you
entered is in use by another
port. You can only use
available (unassigned)
extension numbers.
Do you want to change
the digit used for
Trunk line Group
Routing?
Yes
In 0501, select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
then enter the digits and type
(6: Trunk line access).
No
In 0510, set the digit used for
Trunk Group Access.
Continued
on the next
page.
¾ 229 ¾
Flexible System Numbering (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Do you want to change
the Service Code ?
Yes
No
In 0501, select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
then enter the digits and type
( 1: service code access).
In 0511, select Service number
you want to change and then
enter the new Service Code.
No
Does the system
programming show
"Duplicate Data?"
Yes
The Service Code you entered
is in use by another feature
port. You can only use
available (unassigned)
Service Codes.
Do you want to change
the digit used for
Operator access code?
Yes
In 0501, select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
then enter the digits and type
(7: Operator access).
No
Stop
¾ 230 ¾
Flexible System Numbering (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0501 - System numbering
Assign first and second digits of system numbering, feature type of dial, and digit
length. (e.x. Extension number is three digits of first digit are 2. Feature access service
code is three digits of first digit are 8. Operator access is one digits of first digit is 0.)
> 0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Assign extension numbers to extension ports. The telephone's programming identity
follows the port number - not the extension number.
> 0510 - Trunk Line Access Code
Assign the Trunk Line Group Routing ("dial 9") access code.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Assign Service Code number of each feature.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B
Assign Service Code number of each feature.
Related features
None
Operation
Refer at the beginning section of this issue.
¾ 231 ¾
Follow Me
Description
While at a co-worker's desk, a user can have Follow Me redirect their calls to the coworker's extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker's desk longer
than expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Follow Me
from the co-worker's phone.
Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the initiating
(forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows the setting of Follow Me.
- Service Code of Follow Me is dial 846.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 26: Follow-Me
In an extension's Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Assign a service code for Follow Me (Item 9: dial 846)
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Follow Me (code 1001).
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Follow Me operation.
¾ 232 ¾
Follow Me (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 26,
enter 0.
No
Should extension
be able to use
Follow Me?
Yes
In 0406 Item 26,
enter 1.
No
Should extension
have one-button
access to
Follow Me?
Yes
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Follow Me?
No
Stop
¾ 233 ¾
In 1006, assign a
Follow Me key
(code 1001).
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Follow Me (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate Follow Me:
Use this procedure at the extension that will receive Forwarded calls (destination).
1. Press Follow Me key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1001).
OR
Press idle CL key and dial 846(
).
2. Dial 1 to set Call key Following.
3. Dial the extension who's calls you want to intercept (source).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
Repeat steps 1-3 to enable Call Following with Follow Me for additional extensions.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
To cancel or reroute Follow Me:
1. Press Follow Me key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1001)
OR
Press idle CL key and dial 846(
).
2. Dial 0.
3. Dial another extension number to change the source.
OR
Dial 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. Press SPK to hang up.
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate Follow Me:
Use this procedure at the extension that will receive Forwarded calls (destination).
1. Off hook and dial 846(
).
2. Dial 1 to set Call key Following.
3. Dial the extension who's calls you want to intercept (source),
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
Repeat steps 1-3 to enable Call Following with Follow Me for additional extensions.
4. On hook.
¾ 234 ¾
Follow Me (Cont'd)
Operation
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To cancel or reroute Call Forwarding with Follow Me:
1. Off hook and dial 846(
).
2. Dial 0.
3. Dial another extension number to change the source.
OR
Dial 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. On hook.
¾ 235 ¾
Forced Trunk Disconnection
Description
Forced Trunk Disconnection lets a user forced to disconnect for a busy trunk, if the system
have trouble which cannot disconnect trunk by on hook or if outside caller have long
conversation.
<Caution!> This feature may be assigned for only the system administrator
type of station(s). Assign this feature carefully.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Service Code for Forced Trunk Disconnection is dial 724.
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit it to be used Forced Trunk Disconnection.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options, Item 120: Forced Trunk Disconnection
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Trunk Disconnection.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 14: Forced Trunk Disconnection
Assign a service code for Forced Trunk Disconnection.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a class of service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
¾ 236 ¾
Forced Trunk Disconnection (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 120,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect?
Yes
In 0406 Item 120,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Forced Trunk
Disconnect?
No
Stop
¾ 237 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System numbering
feature.
Forced Trunk Disconnection (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To disconnect the busy trunk:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 805(
). <Trunk Line Access code>
3. Dial trunk port number (01-52).
(Busy tone is heard.)
4. Dial 724(
).
5. Press SPK to hang up.
<Single Line Telephone>
To disconnect the busy trunk:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 805(
). <Trunk Line Access code>
3. Dial trunk port number (01-52).
(Busy tone is heard.)
4. Dial 724(
).
5. On hook.
¾ 238 ¾
General Message (VAU)
Description
General Messages gives key telephone users to listen guidance, message, and etc. Key
telephone user can listen General Message on VAU when dial "4" without seizing internal
dial tone.
General Message can be recorded by user from key telephone.
Message waiting lamp of all extensions will be light on, when user records new General
Message. And then, an extension user listen General Message, message waiting lamp will
light off.
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A
Programming
> 2201 - VAU Reset
Erase the VAU Personal message and VAU message.
> 2202 - Message Length Assignment for VAU
Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message.
> 2203 - General Message Number Assignment
Assign the VAU Message number is used by General Message.
¾ 239 ¾
General Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Does the all VAU message
clear?
Yes
In 2201, enter 2 all VAU
message clear.
S i
i
No
Does the system allow
the General message for
an adequate duration?
Yes
In 2202, Item 1, change the
message length.
Yes
In 2203, assign the VAU
message number.
No
Does the system allow
the General message?
No
Should extension be
allowed to Operate the
General Message?
Yes
In 0406, Item 98, enter 1.
No
Should extension be
allowed to use the
General message?
Yes
In 0406, Item 97, enter 1.
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
General Message
operation and using?
Yes
No
Stop
¾ 240 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System numbering
feature.
General Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Related Features
Dial Number Preview
When you use VAU Adaptor, you can use Dial Number Preview feature after dial *.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To listen the General Message:
1. Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key.
2. Dial 4.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 711(
).
3. Listen General Message.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 712(
).
3. Dial 5.
4. Listen General Message.
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To operate the General Message
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 712(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. Press SPK to hang up. (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (cancel and listen: go to 4-b)
OR
Dial 7 (cancel and re-record: go to 4-c)
3-b. Dial 5 (listen).
4-b. listen General Message.
5-b. Press SPK to hang up. (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-b)
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c)
¾ 241 ¾
General Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To operate the General Message (Cont'd)
3-c. Dial 7 (re-record).
4-c. Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
OR
Hear three times of beep tone.
5-c. Press SPK to hang up. (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a)
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b)
<Single Line Telephone>
To listen the General Message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off-hook.
Dial 711(
).
Listen General Message.
On-hook.
To operate the General Message
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 712(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. On hook. (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (cancel and listen: go to 4-b)
OR
Dial 7 (cancel and re-record: go to 4-c)
3-b. Dial 5 (listen).
4-b. Listen General Message.
5-b. On hook. (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a)
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c)
¾ 242 ¾
General Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To operate the General Message (Cont'd)
3-c. Dial 7 (re-record).
4-c. Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
OR
Hear three times of beep tone.
5-c. On hook. (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a)
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b)
¾ 243 ¾
Group Hunt
Description
With Group Hunt, an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed
Department group by dialing the group's pilot number. The call would ring the first
available extension in the group.
For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales
department's pilot number. The caller would not have to know any of the Sales
department’s extension numbers.
There are two types of routing available with Group Hunt:
Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to
the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions ring only if all high priority
extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension. In a
Department Group with extensions 210 (Priority 1), 211 (Priority 2) and 212 (Priority 3)
- The first call rings 210.
- The second call rings 211.
- The third call rings 212.
- The fourth call rings 210 and the cycle repeats.
Note: When programming, the high priority extensions have low priority numbers. For
example, priority 1 has a higher priority than priority 10.
Priority Routing
¾ 244 ¾
Group Hunt (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
Group Hunt also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user
directly dials a busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route
the call to the first available group member. Meanwhile, All Ring mode is available.
l Department Group Withdrawing
A telephone can withdraw from belonging department group. An extension can not be
hunted at the department call while withdrawing from belonging group.
l Manual All ring Mode
During calling to the Department Group (only highest order extension shall be ringing), Ring
Mode can be changed to “All Ring Mode” by dialing Service Code.
l
Automatic All Ring mode
The Ring Mode can be fixed to “All Ring Mode” by programming. When the
internal caller accesses to the Department Group, all extensions which are
belonging to the Department Group shall ring without any Service Code dialing.
Note1: The ring mode of all extensions shall be “Signal” even if some Key
Telephones are assigned to “Voice”.
Note2 : The mode can not be changed from “All Ring Mode” to “Normal Mode”
during a call.
Circular Routing
<Special Note>
This section mainly describes for internal group access. However, in case of
outside caller’s access such as DUD/DISA, DIL, DDI to station group, the system
provides more flexible routing with voice announcement. For the details, refer to
“Incoming Queue Message (VAU)” and “DID (DDI) Capability”.
¾ 245 ¾
Group Hunt (Cont'd)
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows Group Hunt.
- A call to a Department Group rings the lowest extension first.
- Callers dialing a busy Department Group member hear busy tone.
- Department Group pilot numbers not assigned.
- All extensions are in Extension (Department) Group 1, with a priority the same as the
extension port number.
- Manual All Ring mode (by service code) is assigned.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 64: Pilot Number Called Extension
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Group Hunt.
> 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 1: Pilot Call
Set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.e., when a user dials the department
pilot number). The system can ring the highest priority extension available (Priority)
Routing, 0) or cycle in circular order through the group (Circular Routing, 1).
> 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 2: Extension Call
Set how the system routs an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member.
The caller can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first available Department Group
member (1). This option is for Intercom calls to an extension, not a pilot number.
> 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 4 : STG All Ring Mode
Assign “Manual All Ring Mode” (0) or “Automatic All Ring Mode” (1) for Department
Group Calling.
> 0506 - Department Group Numbers
Assign names and pilot numbers to the Extension (Department)
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Item 10 : STG All Ring Mode
Assign the One-Digit Service Code for “STG All Ring Mode”.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, part B Item 40 Department group withdrawing
Assign a service code of Department group withdrawing.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B, Item 60 : STG All Ring Mode
Assign the Service Code for “STG All Ring Mode”.
> 1003 - Extension (Department) Groups
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-8).
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function keys
Assign a function key for Department group withdrawing (Code 1074).
¾ 246 ¾
Group Hunt (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
No
In 0406 Item 64,
enter 0 to prevent
Group Hunt.
Should an extension
be allowed to call a
Department Group?
Yes
In 0406 Item 64,
enter 1 to allow Group
Hunt.
In 1005, assign a Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0410 Item 1,
enter 0 to enable
Priority Routing.
Priority
Routing
Should calls into a
Department Group use
Priority Routing or
Circular Routing?
Circular
Routing
In 0410 Item 1,
enter 1 to enable
Circular Routing.
The system allows up to
8 Department Groups.
In 1003, assign
extension to
Department Group 0
No
Extension users dial
pilot numbers to call
Department Groups.
This only applies to Intercom
calls to department members,
not pilot numbers.
In 0410 Item 2, 1.
Overflow
Should extension be
port of a Department
Group?
Yes
If you are using Priority
Routing, use 1003 to set
the extension's priority
within the group.
In 0506, assign pilot
numbers to each Department
Group set up in 1003.
In an extension user calls
a busy Department Group
number, should call
overflow or be busy?
Continue
to (A)
¾ 247 ¾
In 1003, assign
extension to
Department Group.
Busy
In 0410 Item 2, 0.
Group Hunt (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continue
from (A)
Automatically
In 0410 Item 4, 1.
Manually
When Department Group
number is called, should call
to all of stations manually or
automatically?
Do you change the
Service Code for
All Ring mode?
Yes
In 0410 Item 4, 0.
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
All Ring mode?
No
Stop
¾ 248 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512
Service No.10, assign a
One Digit Service code
for All Ring mode.
Group Hunt (Cont'd)
Related Features
Group Step Calling
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU)
If outside caller accesses to the station group directly by DUD/DISA, DIL or DID (DDI),
then more flexible routings are available.
DID (DDI) Capability
If outside caller accesses to the station group directly by DID (DDI), then more flexible
routings are available.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To call a department:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial department's extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.
To withdraw from department group
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 750(
).
3. Dial 1.
4. Press SPK to hang up
OR
1. Press Department Group Withdrawing key (SC851: 1074).
(Department group withdrawing key will be light on.)
To cancel the withdrawing from department group
1. Press idle CL key
2. Dial 750(
).
3. Dial 0.
4. Press SPK to hang up
OR
1. Press lighting Department Group Withdrawing key (SC851: 1074).
(Department group withdrawing key will be light off.)
¾ 249 ¾
Group Hunt (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To use “Manual All Ring Mode” :
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial department's extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.
3. Dial 780 (
) or One Digit Access code to call all of stations in the group..
<Single Line Telephone>
To call a department:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial department's extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.
To withdraw from department group
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 750(
).
3. Dial 1.
4. On hook.
To cancel the withdrawing from department group
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 750(
).
3. Dial 0.
4. On hook.
To use “Manual All Ring Mode” :
1. Off hook.
2. Dial department's extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.
3. Dial 780 (
) or One Digit Access code to call all of stations in the group..
¾ 250 ¾
Group Listening
Description
This feature enables you to listen the speech of other party through the speaker of digital
key telephone during handset conversation.
(Caution!) This feature is recommended to be used at ISDN lines or other Digital
lines. The speech quality shall not be guaranteed if this feature is used at
Analogue trunk lines.
Conditions
- This feature is available only for digital key telephone.
Default Setting
-
This feature is not assigned.
Options
None (digital key telephone)
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options, Item_105 : Group listening
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to
initiate Group Listening.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1 - 10) to extension.
Start
In Program 0406 Item
105, enter 0 to disable
Group Listening.
No
Should extension be
allowed to activate Group
Listening ?
In Program 1005,
assign Class of Service
to extensions.
Stop
¾ 251 ¾
Yes
In Program 0406 Item
105, enter 1 to enable
Group Listening.
Group Listening (Cont’d)
Related Features
None
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate Group Listening
1. Press SPK key during Handset Conversation
--- Other party’s speech is heard through Speaker --To deactivate Group Listening
1. Press SPK key during Group listening is activated
<Single Line Telephone>
This function is not available for Single Line Telephone.
¾ 252 ¾
Group Step Calling
Description
After calling a busy Group Hunt Group member, an extension user can have Group Step
Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and
place another Intercom call if first extension called is unavailable.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service permits Group Step Calling.
- No Group Step Calling keys defined.
- Service Code of Step Call is dial 808.
- One digit service code of Step Call is no setting.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 21: Department Group Step Call
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension's ability to use
Group Step Calling.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 60: Step Call
Assign a service code of Step Call.
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No. 1: Step call
Assign a one digit service code of Step Call.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key Group Step Calling (code 1021).
Related Features
Group Hunt
An extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group
by dialing the group's pilot number. Group Hunt also provides overflow routing for
extensions within the group - which simulates Step Calling.
¾ 253 ¾
Group Step Calling (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Set up Department
Groups. Refer to the
Group Hunt
feature.
No
Does system have
Department Groups
programmed?
Yes
In 0406 Item 21, enter 0
to disable Step Calling.
No
After calling a busy
Department Group
member, should caller be
able to step call to
another group member?
Yes
In 0406 Item 21, enter 1
to enable Step Calling.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, be sure not to
assign a Step Call key
(code 1021).
No
Should extension have
one-button Step Calling?
Do you change the
Service Code for
Step Call?
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign
a Step Call key
(code 1021).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
Step Call?
No
Stop
¾ 254 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512
Service No.1, assign a
One Digit Service code
for Step Call.
Group Step Calling (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To make a Step Call to an idle department member
(if the member you call is busy):
You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003.
1. Place call to busy department extension.
Dial the extension's number, not the Department Group Pilot Number.
2. Dial 808(
).
OR
Press Step Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1021).
OR
Dial One Digit Service Code.
3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
<Single Line Telephone>
To make a Step Call to an idle department member
(if the member you call is busy):
You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003.
1. Place call to busy department extension.
Dial the extension's number, not the Department Group Pilot Number.
2. Dial 808(
).
OR
Dial One Digit Service Code.
3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
¾ 255 ¾
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone)
Description
Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the
telephone (instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don't have
a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter
data with both hands while talking on the phone.
The system provides four variations of Handsfree operation:
Handsfree ......................................... User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK
instead of using the handset.
One Touch Trunk Access................ User can press a line or line appearance key without
first lifting the handset or pressing SPK.
Intercom Talkback .......................... User to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call
by speaking toward the phone without lift the handset.
Monitor............................................. User can place a call without lifting the handset, but
must lift the handset to speak.
Conditions
This feature available for Key Telephone with Handsfree circuit (See the table below).
Handsfree is only available on keysets with handsfree circuit. Keysets without handsfree
circuit have Intercom talk back and Monitor circuit.
Model Name
Previous Model
DX2E-0T TEL
DX2E-16T TEL
DX2E-16TXH TEL
DX2E-24TXH TEL
DX2E-24TSXH TEL
DX2E-32T TEL
DX2E-32TXH TEL
DX2E-16T-LC2 TEL
DX2E-16TXH-LC2 TEL
Function
Intercom Talkback and Monitor only
Intercom Talkback and Monitor only
Handsfree is available.
Handsfree is available.
Handsfree is available.
Intercom Talkback and Monitor only
Handsfree is available.
Intercom Talkback and Monitor only
Handsfree is available.
New Model
DX2E-12BTH TEL
DX2E-12BTXH TEL
DX2E-24BTUXH TEL
DX2E-24BTSXH TEL
Handsfree is available.
Handsfree is available.
Handsfree is available.
Handsfree is available.
Default Setting
- One Touch Line Access enabled.
¾ 256 ¾
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone) (Cont'd)
Options
None
Programming
> 0401 - System Options, Part A , Item 6: Pre-select/One-touch
Enable (1) or disable (0) One Touch Line access. If enabled, user can press a line or line
appearance key without first lifting the handset.
Related Features
None
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To enable Handsfree Answer back for your incoming Intercom calls:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 821(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
This disable Forced Intercom Ringing.
To talk Handsfree:
1. Press SPK, CL key or line key.
2. Place call.
3. Speak toward phone when called party answers.
To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:
1. Press SPK.
2. Press SPK to hang up.
Handsfree mode, when MIC LED is off.
Monitor mode, when MIC LED is light on.
Press MIC key, when you change the mode
To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:
1. Lift handset.
¾ 257 ¾
Headset Operation
Description
A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using
Handsfree, using the handset frees up the user's hands for other work. However, Headset
Operation provides privacy not available from Handsfree.
An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming
callers. The headset extension can be:
l
l
Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy
(i.e., Override prevented)
OR
Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy
(i.e., Override allowed)
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is
busy.
- No headset keys defined.
- Service Code of Head-set mode switching is dial 834.
- Service Code of Common canceling service code is dial 720.
Options
Headset. (Agreed headset type is Profile 1861-00, 1862-00 and 1863-00 made by GN
Netcom. Connecting cable code number is 8800-01-01 and 8800-00-01.)
¾ 258 ¾
Headset Operation (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0401 Item 22,
enter 1.
Both
Should headset extension be
appearances busy when one appearance
is busy or when both
appearances are busy?
One
appearance
In 0401 Item 22,
enter 0.
In 1006, assign function
key for Headset Operation
(code 1028).
Do you change the
Service Code For Head-set
mode switching and Common
Canceling Service Code?
No
Stop
¾ 259 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature
Headset Operation (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A,
Item 22: Headset mode judge of busy service setting
Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming
callers:
- The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension
appearance is busy (0)
OR
- Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances
are busy (1).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 47: Head-set mode switching
Assign a service code of Head-set mode switching.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 10: Common Canceling service code
Assign a service code of common Canceling service code.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Headset operation (code 1028).
Related Features
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone)
While in the headset mode, do not use the Speakerphone for calls.
Operation
While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.
To enable the headset mode:
1. Unplug the telephone handset.
2. Plug in the headset.
3. Press the Headset key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028).
OR
Press idle CL key and dial 834(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
You hear a confirmation beep.
The Headset key lights when you enable headset mode.
When in the headset mode:
- Press a line key to make a Trunk Line call.
OR
- Press SPK to get Intercom dial tone.
OR
- If on a call, press SPK to hang up.
¾ 260 ¾
Headset Operation (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To disable the headset mode:
1. Unplug the headset.
2. Plug in the telephone handset.
3. Press the Headset key PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028).
OR
Press idle CL key and dial 834(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
The Headset key goes out when you disable headset mode.
To cancel headset mode:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel of Headset Mode by dial 720, these features are cancelled at same
time, DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Alarm Clock and Text
Message.
¾ 261 ¾
Hold
Description
Hold lets an extension user put a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence
or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user's work area. While the call waits
on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold
too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold.
There are five types of Hold:
l Normal Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other
keysets. Any keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
l Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold.
The Trunk Line appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the Trunk Line.
Exclusive hold is important if a user doesn't want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
l Group Hold
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code
to pick up the call. These let members of a department easily pick up each other's calls.
l Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at
any other extension.
l On Hook Holding for SLT
A single line telephone user can on hook when holding. On hook holing possible to get
dialing Service Code after hooking.
For Normal Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group Hold, the user can re-answer the hold line by
simply pressing TRFR key.
Conditions
This feature available key telephone and single line telephone.
¾ 262 ¾
Hold (Cont’d)
Default Setting
- The HOLD key activates System Hold.
- Exclusive Hold Recall Time is 90 seconds.
- Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds.
- Hold Recall Time is 90 seconds.
- Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds.
- Forced Release of Held Calls is disabled.
- Group Hold is enabled (all extensions are in-group 1).
- No Exclusive hold keys assigned.
- Service Code of group hold is dial 832.
- Service Code of pick up group hold is dial 862.
- Service Code of Enabled on hook when holding (SLT) is dial 849.
- Service Code of Answer on hook when holding (SLT) is dial 859.
- All Key Telephone users can re-answer the last hold line by pressing TRFR key.
Options
None
¾ 263 ¾
Hold (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0402 Item 4,
enter 0.
System
Should extension's HOLD
key be for System or
Exclusive Hold.
Do calls left on System Hold
too long recall after an
acceptable interval?
Exclusive
In 0402 Item 4,
enter 1.
No
In 0405 Item 22, set
the Hold Recall Time.
No
In 0405 Item 27, set
the Hold Recall
Callback Time.
Yes
Do Trunk lines on
System Hold recalling an
extension ring the extension
for an acceptable interval?
Yes
Do calls left on Exclusive
Hold too long recall after
an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 2, set
the Exclusive Hold
Recall Time.
Yes
Do Trunk lines on
Exclusive Hold recalling an
extension ring the extension
for an acceptable interval?
Yes
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 264 ¾
No
In 0405 Item 3, set
the Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback Time.
Hold (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0901 Item 20,
enter 0 to disable
Forced Release of
Held Call for
Trunk line.
No
Should calls left on
Hold too long
automatically disconnect?
Yes
In 0901 Item 20, enter
1 to enable Forced
Release of Held Call
for Trunk line.
In 0405 Item 40, set
the Forced Release of
Held Calls Interval.
With Group Hold, another
Department Group member
can pick up the call.
Should extensions have
Group Hold Capability?
Yes
In 1003, assign
extensions to
Department Groups.
No
In 0406 Item 35,
enter 0.
No
In 0406 Item 36,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension in a
Department Group be able to
put a call on Group Hold
(Service Code 832)?
Should an extension in a
Department Group be able to
pick up a call on Group
Hold (Service Code 862)?
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to extensions.
Continued
on the next
page.
¾ 265 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 35,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 36,
enter 1.
Hold (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If an extension puts a
Trunk line call on Hold,
should they be able to
retrieve from Hold?
Yes
In 0911 for each Access
Map, select the access
options for each Trunk
line (3, 4, 5 or 7).
No
In 0912, assign
extensions to
Access Maps.
In 1006, do not
assign a function
key for Exclusive
Hold (code 1044).
No
Does extension need
one-button Exclusive Hold
access?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key for
Exclusive Hold
(code 1044).
You may need to do this if you have
reassigned Hold keys in 0402 Item 4.
In 1006, do not
assign a function
key for System
Hold (coda 1043).
No
Does extension need
one-button (function key)
System Hold access?
Do you change the
Service Code for
Group Hold and Answer
for Group Hold.
No
Stop
¾ 266 ¾
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key for
System Hold
(code 1043).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Hold (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0402 - System Options, Part B, Item 4: Hold key operating mode
Set the function of the extension's HOLD key: System (0) or Exclusive (1) Hold.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 2: Exclusive Hold Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Exclusive Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 3: Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A Trunk Line recalling from Hold rings an
extension for this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 22: Normal Hold Recall Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 27: Normal Hold Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A Trunk Line recalling from Hold rings an
extension for this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 40: Forced Release of Long Hold Condition Time
Set the Forced Release of Held Calls interval (0-64800 seconds). If enabled in Program
0901 (Item 20), the system disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this interval.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 35: Group Hold Initiate
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
initiate Group Hold (Service Code 832).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 36: Group Hold Answer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to pick
up a call placed on Group Hold. (Service Code 832)
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 57: Group hold Assign a service code of Group
hold.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 58: Answer for group hold
Assign a service code of answer for group hold.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 96: Enabled on hook when holding (SLT)
Assign a service code of On Hook Holding for SLT.
¾ 267 ¾
Hold (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 97: Answer on hook when holding (SLT)
Assign a service code of Answer for On Hook Holding for SLT.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A
Item 20: Long-time Holding Forced Disconnection
Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16). This sets the access options for Trunk lines
on Hold.
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16). This sets the access options for trunks on
Hold.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16) to extensions.
> 1003 - Extension (Department) Groups
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-8)
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 1044). If an extension has its fixed Hold
key reassigned (in Program 0402 Item 4), assign a function key for System Hold (code
1043).
Related Features
Music on Hold
Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold, if programmed.
Programmable Function Key
An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
¾ 268 ¾
Hold (Cont'd)
Operation
Normal Hold
<Key Telephone>
To place an outside call on System Hold:
1. Press HOLD
A line key flashes slowly while on Hold; flashes fast when recalling.
To pick up an outside call on System Hold:
1. Press flashing line key.
OR
1. Press TRFR key to re-answer.
<Single Line Telephone>
This feature only available for key telephone.
Exclusive Hold
<Key Telephone>
To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
1. Press Exclusive Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1044).
A line key flashes slowly while on Hold, flashes fast when recalling.
To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
1. Press flashing line key.
OR
1. Press TRFR key to re-answer.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place an outside call on System Hold:
1. Hook/Flash.
To pick up an outside call an System Hold:
1. Hook/Flash.
¾ 269 ¾
Hold (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Group Hold
<Key Telephone>
To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial 832(
).
3. Press SPK to hang up.
To pick up a call on Group Hold:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 862(
).
OR
1. Press TRFR key to re-answer.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up:
1. Hook/Flash.
2. Dial 832(
).
3. On hook.
To pick up a call on Group Hold:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 862(
).
Intercom Hold
<Key Telephone>
To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Press SPK to hang up.
To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1. Press SPK.
2. Press flashing CL key.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1. Hook/Flash.
To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1. Hook/Flash.
¾ 270 ¾
Hold (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
On Hook Holding for SLT
<Single Line Telephone>
To on hook when holding:
1. When you holding.
2. Dial 849(
).
3. On hook.
To answer on hook holding:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 859(
).
¾ 271 ¾
Hot Line
Description
With a Hot Line, a user can call another extension or outside party by just lifting the
handset. The call automatically goes through -- there is no need for the user to dial digits or
press additional keys. Hot Line is generally used for between internal frequent parties to
talk with, or for the external calls to information desk or the security center, and so on.
After the Hot Line user lifts the handset, Automatic Extension Call/Outside call occurs after
a programmable interval. Depending on the setting of this interval, the extension user may
be able to place other calls before the Automatic Extension Call/Outside call goes through.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
(A) Hot Line has no effect on an extension's current (active) call.
(B) The Hot Line user must lift the handset for Automatic Extension Call /Automatic
outside call to work.
(C) External Hot Line automatic call to system programmed common abbreviated dial
number.
Default Setting
- The Hot Line Timer is 5 seconds.
- Automatic Extension Call disabled in an extension's Class of Service.
- No Hot Lines programmed.
Options
None
¾ 272 ¾
Hot Line (Cont'd)
Programming
Automatic Extension call
Start
In Program 0406 Item
41, disable ringdown
Should extension
be allowed to use
Hot Line-Off Hook
Access?
No
Yes
In Program 0406 Item
41, enable ringdown.
In Program 1005, assign
Class of Service that
allows Hot Line-Off Hook
Access.
In Program 0405 Item 16,
set Hot Line call start
timer to 0.
Immediate
Should Hot Line
call occur
immediately or
delayed?
Delayed
In Program 1013, assign
Hot line number (1-50)
originator extension
number and target
extension number.
Stop
¾ 273 ¾
In Program 0405 Item 16,
set Hot Line call start
Timer to desired delay
interval (64800 seconds)
Hot Line (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Automatic outside call
Start
Assign the
Abbreviated
Dialing
feature.
No
Do you finish the
setting for Abbreviated
Dialing setup
Programming?
Yes
In 1024, assign Hot Line
Number (1-5) originator
extension number and calling
common abbreviated number.
Stop
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 16: Hot Line Call Start Timer
After the user lifts the handset, the extension automatically calls the Automatic
Extension Call destination after this interval (0-64800 seconds).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 41: Intercom Hot Line
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Extension Call. If
disabled in Class of Service, the setting in Program 1013 below has no effect.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
> 1013 - Hot Line Assignments
Program the (Hot Line) source and destination (target) extension numbers. The allows
up to source/target pairs.
> 1024 - External Hot Line
Set the calling common abbreviated number and originating extension number, which is
use External Hot Line. The system can be set up to five External Hot Line originator.
External Hot Line originator can be call to setting outside caller by just lift the handset.
¾ 274 ¾
Hot Line (Cont'd)
Related Features
Call Forward
Hot Line follows Call Forwarding. For example, the Automatic Extension Call
destination can forward their calls. When the Hot Line user lifts the handset, they can
Camp On to the destination, leave a Callback or activate Off Hook Signaling.
Camp On, Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
If the Hot Line user hears busy tone when they lift the handset, they can Camp On to the
destination, leave a Callback or activate off-hook signaling.
Do Not Disturb
The Automatic Extension Call destination user can activate Do Not Disturb. When the
Hot Line user lifts the handset, they hear DND. If the destination extension has Forced
Intercom Ringing enabled, the call will ring.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place a call if your extension has Automatic Extension programmed:
1. Lift handset.
If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call, press a line key before lifting the
handset. Depending on the setting of your Automatic Extension Call timer, you may
be able to dial an Intercom call before your Automatic Extension Call goes through.
If the destination has Handsfree Answer-back enabled, your call will voice announce.
If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring
To place a call if your extension has Automatic outside Call programmed:
1. Lift handset.
To bypass Hot Line (if enabled for your extension):
1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press CL.
3. Place Intercom or Trunk Line call.
To answer a call if you are another extension's Automatic Extension Call
destination:
1. Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice-announcement.
2. Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call.
¾ 275 ¾
Hot Line (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call if your extension has Automatic Extension programmed:
1. Lift handset.
If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call, dial Trunk line access code within hot
line timer. Depending on the setting of your Hot Line timer, you may be able to dial
an Intercom call before your Hot Line Call goes through.
To place a call if your extension has Automatic outside Call programmed:
1. Lift handset.
If you want to place a Trunk Line follows call, dial Trunk line access code within hot
line timer. If you want to intercom call, dial extension number within hot line timer.
To bypass Hot Line (if enabled for your extension):
This feature only available for key telephone.
To answer a call if you are another extension's Hot Line Call destination:
1. Off hook.
¾ 276 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU)
Description
1) For an unanswered normal incoming call, VAU will send a Message if no telephone
answers within the pre-programmed time. It is also possible that the Message can be sent
manually by VAU for an unanswered normal incoming call.
2) For a DDI incoming call which has been in waiting state because of ALL BUSY in
station group address, VAU will send a message if there is no idle telephone occurred
within the pre-programmed time.
It is possible to switch the Incoming Queue Message (VAU) from the 1st message to the
2nd messages (2 types of messages).
A message used for Incoming Queue Message (VAU) is recorded to VAU message (1 16). Recording, playback, and elimination of a message is done by using Service code
716(Command 0514 Item_6).
A sending interval of the VAU message follows a time setting of Command : 0414
Timer_4.
If the Fixed Message is prohibited by the Command 0401 Item_31, VAU does not send the
Fixed Message.
If the pre-programmed time (Command 2213/2214 : 2nd message sending time) has passed
after sending 2nd message, the Queue Message process will finish and the external line will
be cut.
Conditions
- Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be sent in the following cases Case 1) When Normal trunk line (Command 0901 Item_14...17 = 0) receives an external
incoming call
Case 2) When DDI trunk line (Command 0901 Item_14...17 = 3) receives a DDI call which
be transferred to a Incoming Ring Group by Command 1809,1814,1815.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be sent automatically by Programmed Command
2213. Also, the Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be sent by pressing a flashing line
key (i.e., receiving an incoming call) after pressing the Incoming Queue Message (VAU)
key (code 1082). Incoming Queue Message (VAU) key is effective for the pre-programmed
time (Command : 0405 Timer_15) after pressing the key.
If the pre-programmed time (Command : 0405 Timer_43) has passed after sending
Incoming Queue Message (VAU), the Queue Message process will finish and the external
line will be cut.
If the pre-programmed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 0919.
¾ 277 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Conditions (Cont’d)
Case 3) When DDI trunk line (Command 0901 Item_14...17 = 3) receives a station group
DDI call in All busy
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be automatically sent by the Command 2214.
If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) process, the Queue Message process will finish.
If the pre-programmed time (Command : 0414 Timer_9) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 1809, 1810 ,1814 and 1815 respectively.
Case 4) When DUD/DISA trunk line (Command 0901 Item_14...17 = 1 or 2) receives a
station group address in All busy.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be automatically sent by the Command 2214.
If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) process, the Queue Message process will finish.
If the pre-programmed time (Command : 0405 Timer_35) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 1802 and 1803 respectively.
Case 5) When DIL trunk line (Command 0901 Item_14...17 = 4) receives a station group
address in All busy.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) will be automatically sent by the Command 2214.
If there will be one idle station in the accessed Station Group during the Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) process, the Queue Message process will finish.
If the pre-programmed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 0919.
Default Setting
- This feature is not assigned.
- Fixed Waiting Message is assigned as 1st and 2nd Waiting Message.
¾ 278 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming
For Case 1) and 2)
Start
In 2213 MSG1,
enter 0.
No
Should incoming call be
received first Incoming
Queue Message (VAU) from
VAU ?
Yes
In 2213 MSG1_TIME,
enter 0.
In 2213 MSG2,
enter 0.
In 2213 MSG1, enter 1 to
16 for your recorded VAU
message or 17 for Fixed
message.
In 2213 MSG1_TIME, assign
the duration time to send a
first delay message after
receive a call.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
No
Should incoming call be
received second Incoming
Queue Message (VAU) from
VAU ?
In 2213 MSG2_TIME,
enter 0.
Yes
In 2213 MSG2, enter 1 to 16
for your recorded VAU
message or 17 for Fixed
message.
In 2213 MSG2_TIME, assign
the duration time to send a
second delay message after
receive a call or after start a
first delay message.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
Go to the following
page (A)
¾ 279 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from
previous page (A)
In 2213 DISC_TIME,
enter 0.
No
Should incoming call be
disconnected after receive
second Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) ?
Yes
In 2213 DISC_TIME,
assign the duration time to
disconnect a call after start
a second delay message.
In 0414 Timer 4, assign the
interval time between
message and message.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
RBT
Should outside caller listen
RBT, Int-MOH or Ext-MOH
between message and
message ?
Ext-MOH
Int-MOH
In 2213 TONE, enter 0 to
send a Ring Back Tone.
In 2213 TONE, enter 1 to
send a Internal Music On
Hold tone.
Go to the following
page (B)
¾ 280 ¾
In 2213 TONE, enter 2 to
send a External Music
On Hold tone.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from previous
page (B)
Should extension be allowed
to activate Manual Incoming
Queue Message (VAU) for
incoming call ?
Yes
In 1006, assign the
Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) key.
(code 1082)
No
Do you want to change the
Service Code for operation of
VAU Message ?
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
“3”
In Program 0919assign
transferred Incoming
Ring Group.
No
Which is type of exchange
line activated Incoming
Queue Message (VAU),
normal line ”0” or DDI on
ISDN “3” in Program 0901
Item 14 to 17.
“0”
Stop
¾ 281 ¾
In 0405 Timer 62,assign
DIL transfer time.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
For Case 3), 4) and 5)
Start
In 2214 MSG1,
enter 0.
No
Should incoming call be
received first Incoming
Queue Message (VAU) from
VAU ?
Yes
In 2214 MSG1_TIME,
enter 0.
In 2214 MSG2,
enter 0.
In 2214 MSG1, enter 1 to
16 for your recorded VAU
message or 17 for Fixed
message.
In 2214 MSG1_TIME, assign
the duration time to send a
first delay message after
receive a call.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
No
Should incoming call be
received second Incoming
Queue Message (VAU) from
VAU ?
In 2214 MSG2_TIME,
enter 0.
Yes
In 2214 MSG2, enter 1 to 16
for your recorded VAU
message or 17 for Fix
message.
In 2214 MSG2_TIME, assign
the duration time to send a
second delay message after
receive a call or after start a
first delay message.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
Go to the following
page (C)
¾ 282 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from
previous page (C)
In 2214 DISC_TIME,
enter 0.
No
Should incoming call be
disconnected after receive
second Incoming Queue
Message (VAU) ?
Yes
In 2214 DISC_TIME,
assign the duration time to
disconnect a call after start
a second delay message.
In 0414 Timer 4, assign the
interval time between
message and message.
(0 - 64800 sec.)
RBT
Should outside caller listen
RBT, Int-MOH or Ext-MOH
between message and
message ?
Ext-MOH
Int-MOH
In 2214 TONE, enter 0 to
send a Ring Back Tone.
In 2214 TONE, enter 1 to
send a Internal Music On
Hold tone.
Go to the following
page (D)
¾ 283 ¾
In 2214 TONE, enter 2 to
send a External Music
On Hold tone.
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from
previous page (D)
“1” or “2”
Which is type of exchange
line activated Incoming
Queue Message (VAU)
DUD/DISA line “1” or “2”,
DDI ”3” or DIL line “4” in
CMD 0901 ?
“4”
“3”
In 1802 and 1803, assign
a transferred Incoming
Ring Group, if nobody
answers to the incoming
call .
In 1809,1810,1814 and
1815 assign a transferred
Incoming Ring Group, if
nobody answers to the
incoming call.
In 0919, assign a
transferred Incoming
Ring Group, if nobody
answers to the incoming
Ring Group.
In 0405 Timer 35, assign
DUD/DISA transfer time.
In 0414 Timer 9, assign
DDI transfer time.
In 0405 Timer 62, assign
DIL transfer time.
Stop
¾ 284 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Case 1, 2)
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Timer_15 : Pre-selection time
Define the effective duration time of the Incoming Queue Message (VAU) key.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Timer_43 : Disconnect after VAU answers
Define the duration time from “VAU answers” to “the line is terminated”.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Timer_62 : No answer time at Normal or DIL call
Define the duration time for no answer for DIL line.
> 0414 - System Timers, Part B Timer_04 : VAU overflow message interval
Define the duration time between message and message.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item_06 : Operation for VAU message
By using this service code, all VAU messages are operated. (recording, listening,
erasing)
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part A Item_14...17 : Service type (Day,Night,
Midnight, Rest)
Assign the service type of each exchange line.
> 0919 - Transfer Incoming Ring Group if Normal or DIL call is no answer
For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
To have the manual Incoming Queue Message (VAU) key, program a line key it. (code
1082)
> 2213 - VAU Incoming Queue Message Setup for IRG
Define the several timers (1st message connection timer, etc.), and assign the VAU
Message No. which is used for 1st / 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone
for each Incoming Ring Group.
Case 3)
> 0414 - System Timers, Part B Timer_04 : VAU overflow message interval
Define the duration time between message and message.
> 0414 - System Timers, Part B Timer_09 : No answer time at Station Group DDI call
Define the duration time between “receive a incoming call” and “transferring
a call”.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item_06 : Operation for VAU message
By using this service code, all VAU messages are operated. (recording, listening,
erasing)
¾ 285 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
>
>
>
>
>
>
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part A Item_14...17 : Service type (Day, Night,
Midnight, Rest)
Assign the service type of each exchange line.
2214 - VAU Incoming Queue Message Setup for Extension Group
Define the several timers (1st message connection timer, etc.), and assign the VAU
Message No. which is used for 1st / 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone
for each Department Group.
1809 - DDI Transfer Ring Group (Trunk Group basis)
1810 - DDI Operation mode Setup
1814 - DDI Transfer Ring Group Table-1 (Trunk Group basis)
1815 - DDI Transfer Ring Group Table-2 (Trunk Group basis)
Setup the DDI facility by using above commands. Queue message process will finish
and this queuing message call will be transferred by above commands.
Case 4)
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Timer_35 : No answer time at DUD/DISA call
Define the duration time between “receive a incoming call” and “transferring a call”.
> 0414 - System Timers, Part B Timer_04 : VAU overflow message interval
Define the duration time between message and message.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item_06 : Operation for VAU message
By using this service code, all VAU messages are operated. (recording, listening,
erasing)
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part A Item_14...17 : Service type (Day,Night,
Midnight,Rest)
Assign the service type of each exchange line.
> 2214 - Incoming Queue Message (VAU) for Incoming Ring Group
Define the several timers (1st message connection timer, etc.), and assign the VAU
Message No. which is used for 1st / 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone
for each Department Group.
> 1802 - DUD/DISA Operation Mode Setup
> 1803 - DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group Setup
Setup the DUD/DISA facility by using above commands. Queue message process will
finish and this queuing message call will be transferred by above commands.
¾ 286 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Case 5)
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A Timer_62 : No answer time at Normal or DIL call
Define the duration time between “receive a incoming call” and “transferring a call”.
> 0414 - System Timers, Part B Timer_04 : VAU overflow message interval
Define the duration time between message and messages.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item_06 : Operation for VAU message
By using this service code, all VAU message are operated. (recording, listening, erasing)
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part A Item_14...17 : Service type (Day, Night,
Midnight, Rest)
Assign the service type of each exchange line.
> 0919 - Transfer Incoming Ring Group if Normal or DIL call is no answer
For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group.
> 2214 - Incoming Queue Message (VAU) for Incoming Ring Group
Define the several timers (1st message connection timer, etc.), and assign the VAU
Message No. which is used for 1st / 2nd Waiting Message and the kind of Waiting Tone
for each Department Group.
Operation
Automatic Incoming Queue Message (VAU)
1. Incoming call.
2. All extensions are busy / no answer. (Pre-programmed time passed.)
3. VAU automatically answers then send the 1st Waiting Message or Fixed Message.
4. This line is automatically held.
Manual Incoming Queue Message (VAU)
1. Incoming call.
2. All extensions are busy / no answer.
3. Press “Incoming Queue Message (VAU)” key and the line key.
4. VAU answers then send the 1st Waiting Message or Fixed Message.
5. This line is automatically held.
¾ 287 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Appendix. - Incoming Queue Message (VAU) 1st message connection
2nd message connection
2nd message sending time
1st message No.
2nd message No.
: MSG1_TIME
: MSG2_TIME
: DISC_TIME
: MSG1
: MSG2
1. Incoming Ring Group Call ( Automatic or Manual )
1-1. 1st message to 2nd message
= 1...64800)
(MSG1 = 1..17, MSG2 = 1...17, MSG2_TIME
(A) Automatic & Manual (MSG1_TIME = 1...64800)
Manual
Operation
MSG1
MSG1_TIME
MSG1
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2_TIME
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
DISC_TIME *1
CMD_0405 ITEM43
(B) Manual only (MSG1_TIME = 0)
Manual
Operation
MSG1
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2_TIME
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
CMD_0405 ITEM43
¾ 288 ¾
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
DISC_TIME *1
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
Note1) If DISC_TIME = 0 , a queuing call will not be cut after 2nd message has been sent, and the
2nd message process will be continue.
Note2) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_43) has passed after sending
Incoming Queue Message (VAU), the Queue Message process will finish and the external
line will be cut.
Note3) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 0919.
1-2. 1st message only (MSG1 = 1...64800, MSG2 = 0 or MSG2_TIME = 0
(A) Automatic & Manual
(MSG1_TIME = 1...64800)
Manual
Operation
MSG1
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG1_TIME
(B) Manual only
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
CMD_0405 ITEM43
(MSG1_TIME = 0)
Manual
Operation
MSG1
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
CMD_0405 ITEM43
Note1) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_43) has passed after sending
Incoming Queue Message (VAU), the Queue Message process will finish and the external
line will be cut.
Note2) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 0919.
¾ 289 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
1-3. 2nd message only (MSG1 = 0, MSG2 = 1...17)
(A) Automatic & Manual
(MSG2_TIME = 1...17)
Manual
Operation
MSG2
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2_TIME
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
DISC_TIME *1
CMD_0405 ITEM43
(B) Manual only
(MSG2_TIME = 0)
Manual
Operation
MSG2
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
DISC_TIME *1
CMD_0405 ITEM43
Note1) If DISC_TIME = 0 , a queuing call will not be cut after 2nd message has been sent, and
the
2nd message process will be continue.
Note2) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_43) has passed after sending
Incoming Queue Message (VAU), the Queue Message process will finish and the external
line will be cut.
Note3) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received an
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will be
transferred by Command 0919.
¾ 290 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
2. STG Call (Timer Only)
2-1. 1st message to 2nd message (MSG1 = 1...17, MSG1_TIME = 1...64800,
MSG2 = 1...17, MSG2_TIME 1...64800)
MSG1
MSG1
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2_TIME
MSG1_TIME
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
DISC_TIME
CMD_0405 DUD,DISA-ITEM35 / DIL-ITEM62 / CMD_0414 DDI-ITEM 9
2-2. 1st message only (MSG1 = 1...17, MSG1_TIME = 1...64800, MSG2 = 0 or
MSG2_TIME = 0)
MSG1
MSG1_TIME
MSG1
MSG1
CMD_0414
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
ITEM 4
CMD_0405 DUD,DISA-ITEM35 / DIL-ITEM62 / CMD_0414 DDI-ITEM 9
2-3. 2nd message only (MSG1 = 0 or MSG1_TIME = 0, MSG2 = 1...17,
MSG2_TIME = 1...64800)
MSG2
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
MSG2_TIME
MSG2
CMD_0414
ITEM 4
*1
DISC_TIME
CMD_0405 DUD,DISA-ITEM35 / DIL-ITEM62 / CMD_0414 DDI-ITEM 9
¾ 291 ¾
Incoming Queue Message (VAU) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
Note1) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_35) has passed after received
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will
transferred by Command 1802 and 1803 respectively.
Note2) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0405 Timer_62) has passed after received
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will
transferred by Command 0919.
Note3) If the preprogrammed time (Command : 0414 Timer_9) has passed after received
incoming call, the Queue Message process will finish and this queuing call will
transferred by Command 1809, 1810 ,1814 and 1815 respectively.
¾ 292 ¾
an
be
an
be
an
be
Intercom
Description
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with
complete internal calling capability.
Intercom calls can ring or be voice-announced at the called extension.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Intercom Interdigit Time 10 seconds.
- Extension Dial Tone Time is 10 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service allows the placing of Intercom calls.
- An extension's Class of service allows setting Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom
Ringing.
- An extension's Class of Service allows setting Intercom Talkback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
- One Digit Service Code for Switching of voice/signal call is dial 1.
- The operator's extension is 200 (port 1).
Options
None
Programming
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 10: Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the Intercom Interdigit Time (0-64800 seconds). When placing Intercom calls, users
must dial each digit within this interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 28: Extension Dial Tone Sending Time
Set the Intercom Interdigit Time (0-64800 seconds). After getting Intercom dial tone, a
keyset user has this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 61; Intrusion Tone
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to place
Intercom calls.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 68: Setting of signal/voice called
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or an extension's ability to set Handsfree
Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823).
¾ 293 ¾
Intercom (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 72: Switching of signal/voice call
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability for
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (Service
Code 812).
> 0408 - System Cycle setup, Item 3: Intercom call
Set the ring cycle for Intercom calls.
> 0501 - System Numberring
Assign first digit and second digits for extension number.
> 0502 - Extension Numbers and names
Assign an extension number and names for each extension port.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 32: Incoming intercom mode setting (voice)
Assign a service code of handsfree answerback for your incoming intercom calls.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 33: Incoming intercom mode setting (signal)
Assign a service code of forced intercom ringing for your incoming intercom calls.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 40: switching of voice call and signal call
Assign a service code of change the way your intercom call signals the extension you
are calling.
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No. 3: Switching of voice/signal call
Assign a one digit service code of switching of voice/signal call.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1105 - Operator's Extension
Assign the operator's extension.
¾ 294 ¾
Intercom (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0501, select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
then enter to digits and type
(2: extension access).
In 0502, select telephone port
you want to change and then
enter the new extension and
extension name.
In 0406 Item 61,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 72,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be able
to place Intercom calls?
Yes
No
Should an extension be able
to set Intercom Talkback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for
Incoming Intercom calls?
Yes
Should an extension be able
to set Intercom Talkback or
Forced Intercom Ring for
outgoing Intercom calls ?
Yes
No
Should extension be able to
set One Digit Service code for
switching of Voice/signal call?
No
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 295 ¾
In 0406 Item 61,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 72,
enter 1.
Yes In 0512 Item 3, enter
one digit service
code.
Intercom (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1105, does not assign
the operator extension port.
No
Should System have a
different operator (attendant)
extension?
Yes
Is the time the system
allows for users to dial
Intercom numbers acceptable?
No
In 1105, assign the
operator extension
port.
In 0405 Item 10, set
the Intercom Interdigit
Time to correct the
problem.
Yes
After getting Intercom dial
tone, do users have adequate
time to dial the first
Intercom digit?
In 0405 Item 28,
extend the Extension
Dial Tone Time.
No
Yes
Do you change the
Operator access code.
No
Stop
¾ 296 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Intercom (Cont'd)
Related Features
Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or Trunk Line calls
when the user lifts the handset.
Name Storing (Trunk & Station)
An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers.
Operator Calling
Operator access can be dial normal operator's extension number or operator calling
number.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place an Intercom call:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial extension number.
Your call may voice-announce or ring the called extension. To force your Intercom
call to ring, dial 1(
) or dial 812(
) after the extension number.
If the extension you call is busy or doesn't answer, you can dial another extension
without hanging up.
To answer an Intercom call:
1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.
Your telephone picks up your voice.
OR
If your telephone rings, lift handset.
To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 821(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
This disable Forced Intercom Ringing.
¾ 297 ¾
Intercom (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 823(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
This disables Handsfree Answerback.
To check your extension's data:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press CL1.
You display shows your telephone's extension number, port number and
extension/Department Group.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place an Intercom call:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial extension number (or 0 for your operator).
Your call to key telephone may voice-announce or ring the called extension. To force
your Intercom call to ring, dial 1(
) or dial 812(
) after the extension
number.
If the extension you call is busy or doesn't answer, you can dial another extension
without on hook.
To answer an Intercom call:
1. Off hook.
To check your extension's data:
This feature is only available for key telephone.
¾ 298 ¾
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Description
Intercom Abandoned Call Display shows a display extensions user a lift of Intercom calls
placed to them that they did not answer. This is a convenience if a user has to temporarily
leave their desk. When they return, they can display the list to find out who called while
they were out.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
Default Setting
- Intercom Abandoned Call Display enabled.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 13: Intercom abandoned Call Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Intercom Abandoned Call Display.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
Intercom
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions.
Operation
To display the list of Intercom calls you did not answer:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press CL2.
Repeatedly press CL2 until no more calls display.
3. Press CLEAR to return to the normal Time and Date display.
¾ 299 ¾
Intercom Abandoned Call Display (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 13,
enter 0.
No
Should extension user be able
to display list of Intercom
calls they did not answer?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 300 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 13,
enter 1.
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
When a user calls to an extension busy on a call, he/she can send an off-hook signal
indicating he/she is trying to get through. This is one of “Override” functionality that is not
cut in to the established conversation, but to send the ring to the speaker of keyphone, or to
send short beep tone to the handset of single line telephone.
<Note> By the same operation procedure, but it may go to the speaker of keyphone
verbally. This is due to the CDHF-A installation in the keyphone at the called side.
The functionality is described as “Voice Over” in this issue.
The system provides the following “Intercom Off-hook Signaling” options:
l
Called Extension Block
The called extension's Class of Service may block incoming off-hook signaling
attempts. This is beneficial to users that don't want to have interruptions while on a call.
l
Automatic Off-hook Signaling
Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off-hook signaling. This option is set in
the calling extension's Class of Service.
l
Manual Off-hook Signaling
When the above option is not set, then system provides this option. In case of reaching
to a busy extension, the caller can dial service code or press function key to send Offhook Signaling to the called keyphone manually.
l
Prefer Off-hook Signaling at the keyphone with CDHF-A
If the keyphone (with CDHF-A) user sets this mode by service code, called mode shall
be Off-hook Signaling, not Voice Over.
Conditions
The Off-hook Signal call is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
When single line telephone receives Off-hook signaling, short beep tone is heard.
Default Setting
- An extension's COS allows it to receive Off-hook Signaling.
- An extension's COS prevents it from automatically sending Off-hook Signaling.
- Off-hook Signaling is muted (Program 1008 Item 5 = 0).
- Service code for Off-hook Signaling is dial 809.
- Service code for setting of forced Off-hook Signaling is dial 893.
- One digit service code for Off-hook Signaling is no setting.
¾ 301 ¾
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling (Cont’d)
Programming
An extension user can dial
Service Code 892 to change
the mode to Voice Over.
In Program 0401 Item
11, enter 1.
Set Program 0406
Item 5 to 0.
Set Program 0406
Item 6 to 0.
An extension user can dial
Service Code 893 to change
the mode to Ring.
Voice
Over
In Program 0401 Item
Start
Ring
No
Manually
Should Override ring
or voice over?
11, enter 0.
Should extension be
able to receive
Off-hook Signaling?
Yes
Set Program 0406
Item 5 to 1.
Should extension send Automatically
Off-hook signal manually
or automatically?
Set Program 0406
Item 6 to 1.
In 1005, assign a
Class of Service to
an extension.
Should extension have
one-button sending for
Off-hook Signaling?
Yes
In Program 1006, assign a
function key for Override
(code 1018).
No
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 2.
Normal
Should the level of
Off-hook Signal be normal,
muted or no tone?
No Tone
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 1.
Muted
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 0.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Off-hook Signaling?
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
Off-hook Signaling?
No
Stop
¾ 302 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512 Service
No. 4, assign a One
Digit Service Code for
Off-hook Signaling?
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 11: Called mode setting for override.
Enter 1 to have off-hook signal ring at the called busy extension.
Enter 0 to have Voice Over to the called busy extension. An extension user can override
these settings by dialing Service Code 892 (for voice over) or 893 (for off-hook signal).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 5: Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to
automatically send override call.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to
automatically send override call to an extension busy on a handset call.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Item 15: Override
Assign a service code for Override.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 83: Setting of signal called for override
Assign a service code for setting of signal called override.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 82: Setting of Voice Over called for override
Assign a service code for setting of voice-announce called for override.
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No. 4: Override
Assign a one digit service code for override.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for override (code 1018).
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 5: Override Call
For each extension, set Override type: 0 (muted), 1 (no tone) or 2 (normal).
Options
None
¾ 303 ¾
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling (Cont'd)
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Override has
already gone through.
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone)
You cannot send override to an extension busy on a Handsfree (Speakerphone) call.
The called extension's idle CL key flashes fast, with no ringing.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place Off-hook Signaling to an extension busy on a handset call:
1. Call to busy keyphone.
You hear busy tone
2. Dial 809(
).
OR
Press Override key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1018).
OR
Dial one digit service code for override(
).
You hear ring-back tone
To set Off-hook Signaling mode at your extension (with CDHF-A):
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 893(
).to set.
To answer the signal, you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place Off-hook Signaling to an extension busy on a handset call:
1. Call to busy keyphone.
You hear busy tone.
2. Dial 809(
).
OR
Dial one digit service code for override(
You hear ring-back tone.
).
To set Off-hook Signaling mode at your extension:
This feature is only available for key telephone.
¾ 304 ¾
ISDN Compatibility (Euro)
Description
This system provides the connectivity with ISDN trunks for both BRI (Basic Rate
Interface: 2B+D) and PRI (Primary Rate Interface: 30B+D) under Euro specification.
Hardware options are as follows:- (refer to Hardware Manual for dX-Z24 / dX-Z96)
DX2E-4BRIU-S1 / DX2E-2BRIU-S1 for BRI
DX2E-PRIU-S1 for PRI
For the details of programming, refer to the separate issue as follows:dX-Z96 Euro-ISDN Manual (Basic Rate Interface) (T-point / S-point support)
dX-Z96 Euro-ISDN Manual (Primary Rate Interface)
¾ 305 ¾
Key Touch Tone
Description
For an extension with Key Touch Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time upon they
press a dial key pad. This is helpful to users that prefer the additional audible confirmation.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service prevents if from turning Key Touch tone on and off.
- Key Touch Tone is initially off at all extensions.
- Service Code of Key Touch Tone is dial 824.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 56: Key Touch Tone
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to turn
Dial Pad Confirmation tone on and off.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 53: Key touch tone
Assign a service code for Dial Pad Confirmation Tone.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To enable/disable Key Touch Tone:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 824(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
¾ 306 ¾
Key Touch Tone (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 56, enter 0
to disable turning Key
Touch Tone on and off.
No
Should extension be able
to turn the Key Touch
Tone on and off?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 307 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 56, enter 1
to enable turning Key
Touch Tone on and off.
Last Number Dialing
Description
Last Number Dialing allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For
example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing
the digits.
Last Number Dialing saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials. The number
can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system normally uses the same Trunk
Line group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific Trunk
Line if desired.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows Last Number Dialing.
- Service Code of Last Number Dialing is dial 816.
- Service Code of Clear Last Number Dialing is dial 876.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 48: Last Number Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Last Number Dialing.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 13: Last Number Dialing
Assign a service code of Last Number Dialing.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 54: Clear Last Number Dialing
Assign a service code of clear Last Number Dialing.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
Automatic Repeat Dialing
The system can periodically redial an unanswered Trunk Line call.
¾ 308 ¾
Last Number Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 48,
enter 0.
Should an extension be able
to use Last Number Dialing?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 309 ¾
In 0406 Item 48,
enter 1.
Last Number Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To redial your last call:
1. (Optional) Press idle line key.
If you skip, the system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as
your original call.
2. Press LND.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 816(
).
The system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original
call.
To check the number kept for Last Number Dialing
(This feature only available for key telephone with display):
1. Press LND.
The stored number displays for six seconds.
The stored number dials out if you:
- lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CL key, or
- Press SPK
2. Press CLEAR.
To erase the kept number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 876(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
<Single Line Telephone>
To redial your last call:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 816(
).
The system automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group as your original
call.
To check the number kept for Last Number Dialing:
This feature only available for key telephone with display
To erase the kept number;
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 876(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
¾ 310 ¾
LCR (Least Cost Routing)
Description
Nowadays, not only one carrier (public exchange supplier) may provide the trunk lines to
subscriber sites. If one of local carriers offers you special discount, then the system
manager may think that all of the calls should be routed to the carrier’s line. In this case, if
the first digit for outside trunk is started from either 0 or 1, then LCR (Least Cost Routing)
function shall control (add/delete/change) the digits for the line.
Conditions
The feature is available for keyphone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- The feature is not provided for any trunk lines.
Options
None
Programming
> 0901 – Basic Trunk Port Setup Part A, Item32: Least Cost Routing
Enter 1 (LCR ON) or 2 (LCR ON, Cost Center Code only) for the LCR trunk lines.
> 3001 – Digit Analyze Table
> 3002 – Carrier Table
> 3003 – Authorization Code Table
> 3004 – Manual Code Table
> 3005 – Manual Exemption Table
¾ 311 ¾
LCR (Least Cost Routing) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
No
Dial 2-9, *, #
Should the trunk
line be controlled
with LCR for
outgoing call?
Yes
Analyze the first
digit for outside line
whether 0 or 1 or
others?
Dial 0
Dial 1
Receive 2 more digits
No
Do the 3 digits
match to Manual
Code Table in
3004?
Yes
Receive 1 more digit
Delete
3 digits.
Yes
Do the digits match
to Manual
Exemption Table in
3004?
No
How many digits
are received?
Send All digits to
the trunk line.
Less than
4 digits
4 digits
Get Carrier Table
Number.
B
¾ 312 ¾
In 0901, Item32 enter 1
(ON) or 2 (ON, Cost
Center Code only)
A
LCR (Least Cost Routing) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
A
Receive 1 more digit
Get Carrier Table
Number.
Yes
Do the digits match
to an entry data in
Digit Analyze Table
in 3001?
No
How many digits
are received?
Less than
6 digits
6 digits
Carrier Table Number = No.1
(Fixed Setting)
B
¾ 313 ¾
LCR (Least Cost Routing) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
B
This part of programming shall
be applied to UK market
basically.
Dial Access Code to the
Trunk Line by 3002
(Change to DTMF)
(Pause)
Get Authorization Code
Table Number from 3002
Yes
Is Authorization
Code set?
No
Dial Authorization Code
(from 3003) to the trunk line
Dial Cost Center Code
(from 3002) to the trunk line
Yes
Is Cost Center
Code set?
No
Repeat all dialed digits to the
trunk line
Related Features
None
Operation
Normal outgoing operations by user.
¾ 314 ¾
Line Preference
Description
Line Preference determines how a keyset user places and answers calls.
There are two types of Line Preference: Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line
Preference.
Incoming line Preference
Incoming Line Preference establishes how a keyset user answers calls.
When a call rings the keyset, lifting the handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing
Line Preference) or seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide
either Intercom or Trunk Line dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference below). Ringing
Line Preference helps users who's primary function is to answer calls (such as a
receptionist). Idle Line Preference is an aid to users who's primary function is to place calls
(such as a telemarketer).
Outgoing Line Preference
Outgoing Line Preference sets how a keyset user places calls. If a keyset has Outgoing
Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a
keyset has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference, the user hears Trunk Line dial tone when they
lift the handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with
Idle Line Preference. The user hears either Trunk Line ("dial 9") or Intercom dial tone.
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer
Trunk Line calls that ring other extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has
to answer calls for co-workers that are away from their desks. When the user lifts the
handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Line Group Routing
programming. The extension user's own ringing calls, however, always have priority over
calls ringing other co-worker's extensions.
Conditions
If a keyset extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line Preference
answers the calls on a first-in first-answered basis.
¾ 315 ¾
Line Preference (Cont'd)
Default Setting
- Ringing Trunk Line calls have answer priority over ringing Intercom calls.
- Trunk Line doesn’t ring extensions.
- All extensions have full access to all Trunk Lines.
- Extension users hear Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset.
- Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines not set.
Options
None
Programming
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 8: Priority for incoming call
Determine if ringing Intercom calls (0) or ringing Trunk Line calls should have answer
priority. See the table below for interaction.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 12: Auto Answer to Incoming Call from Extension
Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for Intercom calls. See the table below
for interaction.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 13: Auto answer to incoming Trunk line call
Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for Trunk line calls. See the table below
for interaction.
Program 0401
Ringing Ringing
Intercom Trunk
Call
Call
Item 12
(Intercom
Preference
)
Item 12
(Intercom
Preference
)
0
0
X
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
0
X
—
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
0
—
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
1
X
X
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk.
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes idle line appearance.
0
1
X
—
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk.
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes idle line appearance.
0
1
—
X
Answers ringing trunk.
1
0
X
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
1
0
X
—
Answers ringing line appearance.
1
0
—
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
1
1
X
X
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk. Intercom
call then rings second line appearance.
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, answers ringing line
appearance.
1
1
X
—
Answers ringing intercom call.
(Line appearance).
1
1
—
X
Answers ringing line appearance.
Lifting the handset....
<Chart A>
¾ 316 ¾
Line Preference (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Incoming Line Preference
Start
In Program
0401 Item 12,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0401 Item 13,
enter 0.
No
In Program
0401 Item 8,
enter 0.
Intercom
When users lift handset,
should they answer
ringing Intercom call?
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 12,
enter 1.
When users lift handset, Yes
should they answer ringing
Trunk line call?
In Program
0401 Item 13,
enter 1.
With both Intercom and
Trunk line call
ringing, which should
have priority?
In Program 0909, assign
extensions to Ring Groups.
In Program 0910, assign
Trunk lines to Ring
Groups.
Stop
¾ 317 ¾
Trunk
line
In Program
0401 Item 8,
enter 1.
Line Preference (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Outgoing Line Preference
Start
Also see the Prime Line
Selection feature.
In Program
1008 Item 3,
enter 0.
In Program
1008 Item 2,
enter 1.
Intercom
dial tone
When user lifts handset,
should they get Intercom
dial tone or trunk dial tone?
Trunk
dial tone
In Program
1008 Item 3,
enter 1.
Program Trunk Line Group Routing:
- Assign Trunk lines to groups in 0905.
- Assign Trunk line groups to routes in 0906.
- Assign routes to extensions in 0907.
For additional interaction
between Program 1008 Item 2
and 3, see the chart below.
In Program 0911, set up
the Trunk line
access map.
In Program 0912, assign
Trunk line access
maps to extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for Answer
of non-ringing line?
No
Stop
¾ 318 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Line Preference (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
Start
Is the Trunk line
you want to be
non-ringing currently
ringing?
Yes
In Programs 0909 and 0910,
set Trunk line to not
ring extension. Refer to
the Ring Group feature.
No
In Programs 0911 and 0912,
make sure extension has
incoming access to
non-ringing Trunk.
No
Does extension have
access to non-ringing
Trunk line?
Yes
In Program 0905, assign
trunks to groups. Refer to
the Trunk Group feature.
No
Is Trunk Line Group
Routing programmed?
Yes
In Program 0906, program
the Trunk Line Group
Routing table. Refer to
the Trunk Line Group
Routing feature.
In Program 1015, select
the routing sequence for
auto-answer of non-ringing
lines.
Stop
¾ 319 ¾
Choose from the routes you
programmed in Trunk Line
Group Routing (Program 0906).
Make one entry for each
Night Service mode.
Line Preference (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 94: Answer of non-ringing lines
Assign a service code of answer of non-ringing lines.
> 0905 - Trunk Line Groups
For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign Trunk Line to Trunk Line groups. This
is part of Trunk Line Group Routing programming.
> 0906 - Trunk Line Group Routing (Dial 9)
For Auto Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, program the Trunk Line Group Routing table.
Auto Answer uses this table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls.
> 0909 - Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension
Assign extension to ring groups (1-16). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works
for Trunk Lines that do not ring an extension.
> 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
Assign Trunk Line to ring groups (1-16). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only
works for Trunk Line that does not ring an extension.
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Assignment
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the Trunk
Line access maps (1-16).
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign Trunk
Line access maps to extensions.
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 2: Auto Extension Size
Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Intercom Line Preference for extensions. See the
table below for interaction.
Outgoing Line Preference (Program 1008, item 2 and 3)
Item 2
Item 3
After lifting handset at idle phone...
0
0
You hear nothing.
0
1
You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9" routing).
1
0
You hear intercom dial tone.
1
1
You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9" routing).
<Chart B>
¾ 320 ¾
Line Preference (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Auto Trunk Line Size
Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions.
See the table below for interaction.
> 1015 - Ringing Line Preference
For each extension, select the route that it will use for Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing
Lines. The routes correspond to the Trunk Line Group Routing table set in Program
0906.
Related Features
Direct Inward Line
DILs do not affect Incoming: Line Preference operation.
Ring Groups
Trunk Line ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Trunk Line Group Routing
If an extension gets Trunk Line dial tone when the user lifts the handset, the system uses
the "dial 9" routing to select the Trunk Line.
Operation
To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference:
1. Refer to <Chart A>.
To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference:
1. Refer to <Chart B>.
¾ 321 ¾
Long Conversation Cutoff
Description
This system can forcedly disconnect for Trunk Line caller that they have been on the call
longer duration. Setting of Long Conversation Cutoff needs for extension and Trunk line.
There are two types of Long Conversation Cutoff: One of the conversation Cutoff for
incoming call, another one for outgoing call.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff
for incoming.
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff
for outgoing.
- A trunk port's condition does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for
incoming.
- A trunk port's condition does not permit it to be assigned long conversation Cutoff for
outgoing.
- The long conversation Cutoff timer for incoming is no setting.
- The long conversation Cutoff timer for outgoing is no setting.
Options
None
¾ 322 ¾
Long Conversation Cutoff (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0921 Item 1,
enter 0.
No
In 0406 Item 107,
enter 0.
No
For each Trunk Line,
should the system be able
to automatic Cutoff for
long conversation?
Do you want an extension
to use automatic Cutoff
for long conversation
to incoming call?
Yes
In 0921 Item 1,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 107,
enter 1.
In 0405 Timer 77, set
the Long Conversation
for incoming call
Cutoff interval
(0-64800 seconds).
In 0406 Item 108,
enter 0.
No
Do you want an extension
to use automatic Cutoff
for long conversation
to outgoing call?
Yes
In 0406 Item 108,
enter 1.
In 0405 Timer 78, set
the Long Conversation
for outgoing call
Cutoff interval
(0-64800 seconds).
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 323 ¾
Long Conversation Cutoff (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers,
Item (Timer) 77: Long conversation Cutoff timer for incoming
After a user answers a Trunk Line call, the system forcedly disconnect for incoming
Trunk line after the interval (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers,
Item (Timer) 78: Long conversation Cutoff timer for outgoing
After a user places a Trunk Line call, the system forcedly disconnect for outgoing Trunk
line after the interval (0-64800 seconds).
> 0406 - Class of Service Options,
Item 107: Long conversation Cutoff for incoming
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) long conversation Cutoff for
incoming.
> 0406 - Class of Service Options,
Item 108: Long conversation Cutoff for outgoing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) long conversation Cutoff for
outgoing.
> 0921 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part B
Item 1 Long conversation Cutoff
For each Trunk line, allow (1) or prevent (0) long conversation Cutoff.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a class of service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
None
¾ 324 ¾
Long Conversation Warning
Description
The system can broadcast warning tones to a Trunk Line caller warning them that they have
been on the call too long. The tones are just a reminder -- the user can disregard the tones
and continue talking if they choose. The outside caller does not hear the warning tones. In
addition, warning tones do not occur for Intercom calls and incoming Trunk Line calls.
There are two types of warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2.
Alarm Tone 1 is the first set of tones that occur after the user initially places a Trunk Line
call. Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodically after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder.
Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- The first warning tone occurs after 170 seconds.
- Additional warning tones occur every 180 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service enables Long Conversation Warning.
Options
None
¾ 325 ¾
Long Conversation Warning (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In Program 0406
Item 3, enter 0.
No
Do you want an extension
to have Warning Tone for
Long Conversation?
Yes
In Program 0406
Item 3, enter 1.
In Program 1005, assign
a Class of Service to
the extension.
In program 0405 Timer 24,
set the Long Conversation
Alarm 1 interval
(0-64800 seconds).
Entering 0 disables the
timer - which also disables
Long Conversation Alarm 2.
In Program 0405 Time
25, enter the Long
Conversation Alarm 2
interval (1-64800 seconds).
No
Do you want to disable
just Long Conversation
Alarm 2?
Stop
¾ 326 ¾
Yes
In Program 0405
Timer 25, enter 0.
Long Conversation Warning (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to Programming Flowchart on the following page.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item (Timer) 24: Long conversation alarm 1
After a user places a Trunk Line call, the system sends the first warning tone to their
extension after this interval (0-64800 seconds).
> 0405 - System Timers, Item (Timer) 25: Long conversation alarm 2
After hearing the first warning tone, the system sends the first warning tones after this
interval (0-64800 seconds). The warning tones continue, spaced by this interval, until
the user hangs up.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 3: Long conversation alarm
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Long Conversation Warning.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
Trunk Line Calls, Answering
Long Conversation Warning does not occur for incoming Trunk Line calls.
Trunk Line Calls, Placing/Toll Restriction
Long Conversation Warning occurs for all outgoing Trunk Line calls, regardless of how
they are placed or other outgoing restrictions.
Intercom
Long Conversation Warning does not occur for Intercom calls.
Operation
Long Conversation Warning is automatic if programmed.
¾ 327 ¾
Meet Me Paging Answer
Description
Meet Me Paging Answer allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and meet with them
on a Page zone. The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. Meet
Me
Paging is a good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the coworker can hear the Page, they can join in the conversation.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Meet Me Paging Answer only permits two-party conversations.
Default Setting
- Meet Me Paging Answer Time is 90 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service permits initiating Meet Me Paging Answer.
- No Paging keys assigned.
Options
(DX2E-4PGDU-S1: When you use Meet Me External Paging.)
Programming
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and
Paging Internal features.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 44: Meet me answer to specified internal group paging
Assign a service code of Meet me answer to specified internal group paging.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 45: Meet me answer to external paging
Assign a service code of Meet me answer to external paging.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 46: Meet me answer to internal paging
Assign a service code of Meet me answer to internal paging.
¾ 328 ¾
Meet Me Paging Answer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 14,
enter 0.
No
Yes
Should extension be able to
initiate a Meet Me Page?
In 0406 Item 14,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
You can simplify Meet Me
Paging operation be assigning
the following function keys in
1006: External Zone Paging
(code 1004), External All Call
Paging (code 1005) and Internal
Zone Paging Answer (code 1006).
Is the time users have
to join a Meet Me
Page adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 11,
set the Meet Me
Paging Time.
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System numbering
feature.
Yes
Do you change the
Service Code?
No
Stop
¾ 329 ¾
Meet Me Paging Answer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call
Paging (code 1005) and Internal Paging Zone Answer (code 1006 + zone).
Related Features
Meet Me Paging Answer Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other
inside parties.
Programmable Function Key
Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging Answer operation.
Operation
Meet Me External Page
<Key Telephone>
To make a Meet Me External Page:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 803(
). And then dial the External Paging Group code
(1-4 or 0 for all Call).
OR
Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 & 1005).
3. Announce the zone.
To join a Meet Me External Page:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-4).
You connect to the other party.
<Single Line Telephone>
To make a Meet Me External Page:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 803(
). And then the External Paging Group Code
(1-4 or 0 for All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
¾ 330 ¾
Meet Me Paging Answer (Cont'd)
Operation
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To join a Meet Me External Page:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-4).
You connect to the other party.
Meet Me Internal Page
<Key Telephone>
To make a Meet Me Internal Page:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 801(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Announce the zone.
To join a Meet Me Internal Page:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 863(
) (if your extension is in the group called).
OR
Dial 864(
) and the group number (if your extension is not in the group called).
OR
Press the Internal Paging Group Answer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your
extension is in the group called.
<Single Line Telephone>
To make a Meet Me Internal Page:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 801 (
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Announce the zone.
To join a Meet Me Internal Page:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 863(
OR
Dial 864(
) (if your extension is in the group called).
) and the group number (if your extension is not in the group called).
¾ 331 ¾
Meet Me Paging Conference
Description
With Meet Me Paging Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their
current call and up to six other inside parties. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a
Meet Me Paging code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting
- Without leaving the office.
The system permits up to eight parties to join in a Meet Me Paging Conference.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- The system allows 8 four-party conferences.
- Meet Me Paging Conference Time is 90 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service permits initiating Meet Me Paging Conference.
- No Conference or Paging keys assigned.
Options
DX2E-PGDU-S1: When you use Meet Me External Paging Conference feature.
¾ 332 ¾
Meet Me Paging Conference (Cont'd)
Programming
Note: For additional programming information on Paging and Conference, refer to the
Paging Internal, Paging External and Conference features.
> 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup
Set the Conference mode. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences (0) or 4
eight-party conferences (1) per option card.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 9: Privacy Release timer
Set the Meet Me Paging Conference Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates
Meet Me Paging Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join
the conversation.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Conference (code 1016), External Zone Paging (code 1004),
External all Call Paging (code 1005) and Internal Paging Zone Answer (code 1006).
Related Features
Meet Me paging
An extension user can have a telephone meeting with a co-worker on a Page zone.
Conference
An extension user can be conference with another extension user and outside party.
¾ 333 ¾
Meet Me Paging Conference (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
Meet Me External Conference
To make a Meet Me External Paging Conference:
1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2. Dial 803(
) and the External Paging Group code ( 1-4 or 0 for All Call)
OR
Press Page key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 & 1005).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
To join a Meet Me External Conference:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-4).
You connect to the other parties.
Meet Me Internal Conference:
To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:
1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2. Dial 863(
) (if your extension is in the group called).
OR
Dial 864(
) and the group number (if your extension is not in the group called).
OR
Press the Internal Paging group Answer key (PGM 1006 or SC851: 1010) if your
extension is in the group called.
<Single Line Telephone>
Meet Me External Conference
To make a Meet Me External Paging Conference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
While on a call
Hook/Flash and dial 826(
).
Dial 803(
) and the External Paging Group code (1-4 or 0 for All Call)
Announce the zone.
When co-worker answers your page, hook/flash twice.
Repeat steps 2-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
¾ 334 ¾
Meet Me Paging Conference (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
Meet Me External Conference
To join a Meet Me External Conference:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-4).
You connect to the other parties.
Meet Me Internal Conference:
To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:
1. While on a call
2. Hook/Flash and dial 826(
).
3. Dial 863(
) (if your extension is in the group called).
OR
Dial 864(
) and the group number (if your extension is not in the group called).
¾ 335 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Description
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they don't know where the co-worker
is, they can use Meet Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can
Page the co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answer
the Page. Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both Internal and External Paging, a
call can be quickly extended to a co-worker anywhere in the facility.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Meet Me Paging Transfer only permits two-party conversations.
Default Setting
- Meet Me Paging Time is 90 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service Permits initiating Meet Me Paging.
- No Paging keys assigned.
Options
(DX2E-4PGDU-S1: When you use External Paging.)
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and
Paging Internal features.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004), External all Call Paging
(code 1005) and Internal Paging Zone Answer (code 1006).
¾ 336 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Do you want to have
Meet Me Internal
Paging Transfer?
Yes
Program
External Paging.
Refer to the External
Paging feature.
Yes
Program
Internal Paging.
Refer to the Internal
Paging feature.
No
Do you want to have
Meet Me Internal
Paging Transfer?
No
Be sure Meet Me Paging Time (Program
0405 Item 11) allows adequate time
for the transfers to complete.
In COS, enable/disable Meet Me
Conference and Paging (Program 0406
Item 14). Assign COS in Program 1005.
Should extension have
Function Key access to
Meet Me Paging Transfer?
Yes
No
Stop
¾ 337 ¾
In Program 1006, assign function
keys for Paging: External Zone = 1004,
External All Call = 1005, Internal
Zone Answer = 1006.
Meet Me Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
Related Features
Meet Me Paging
An extension user can Page a co-worker and meet with them on a Page zone.
Meet Me Paging Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other
inside parties.
Paging, External
With External Paging, an extension user can broadcast announcement over Paging
equipment connected to external Paging zones.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keysets.
Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer
<Key Telephone>
To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial 803(
). And then dial the External Paging Group code
(1-4 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 & 1005).
3. Announce the call.
4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-4).
You connect to the Paging party.
4. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
¾ 338 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Meet Me External Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hook/Flash.
Dial 803(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-4 or 0 for All Call).
Announce the call.
When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 865(
).
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-4).
You connect to the Paging party.
4. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer
<Key Telephone>
To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press HOLD.
Dial 801(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Announce the call.
When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 863(
) (if your extension is the group called).
OR
Dial 864(
) and the group number (if your extension is not the group called).
OR
Press the Internal Paging group Answer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your
extension is in the group called.
3. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
¾ 339 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hook/Flash.
Dial 801(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Announce the call.
When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 863(
) (if your extension is the group called).
OR
Dial 864(
) and the group number (if your extension is not the group called).
If your extension is in the group called.
3. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
¾ 340 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
Description
Paging with Personal Message permits incoming ring status will be informed by using
recorded Personal Message through external paging speaker or internal paging zone
phones.
Condition
This feature is available for key telephone.
(A) If appointed paging zone is busy, system will wait until paging zone becomes idle.
(B) If busy status of paging zone or VAU channel will continue over pre-programmed
duration (VAU no-answer timer), system will transfer the incoming call to preprogrammed station.
Default Setting
- All External Paging ports have gain number 1 (0 dB).
- Maximum duration of Paging announcement is 120 seconds.
- Maximum duration of personal message time is 20 seconds.
- An extension’s Class of Service permits initiating External Paging.
- An extension’s Class of Service not permit Personal message.
- All External Paging Zones are broadcasted a splash tone before the page announcement.
- Service Code for External Paging with personal message is dial 713.
- Service Code for Direct Extension call pickup is dial 715.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A
DX2E-4PGDU-S1
(When you use Meet Me External Paging Transfer with Personal
message.)
¾ 341 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Assign the
Paging External,
Meet Me Paging,
Call Forward and
Call Pickup
features.
No
Do you finish the setting for
Paging External, Meet Me
Paging, Call Forward and Call
Pickup setup programming?
Yes
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 0.
No
Should extensions be able
to use Meet Me Paging
Transfer by Personal
Message?
Yes
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 1.
In 2204 enter 0 to
does not allow the
transfer.
In 0401 Item 31,
enter 1.
No
If the all VAU path are busy
when the VAU send the
transferring message to
DUD/DISA caller, does the
system allow automatic
transfer to incoming ring
group?
Yes
In 2204 enter 0 to does
not allow the transfer.
enter 0.
In 0405 Timer 63, enter
DUD/DISA
calling set transferring
interval, when VAU
path are busy.
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 342 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from previous
page.
Does the all VAU
Personal Message clear?
Yes
In 2201 enter 1 all VAU
personal message
clear.
Yes
In 2202 Item 2, change
the message length.
Yes
In 0405 Item 64, assign
the re-sending interval
time.
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System numbering
feature.
No
Does the system allow the
Personal Message for
adequate duration?
No
When nobody answer to
paging does the system allow
the re-try to page by personal
message?
No
Do you change the Service
Code for Meet Me Paging
Transfer by Personal
Message ?
No
Stop
¾ 343 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 31: VAU fixed message
Set the use (0) or not use (1) VAU fixed message for VAU features.
When you set to not use (1), you can not use Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal
Message feature.
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A, Item 63: VAU no-answer time (VAU)
Set the waiting time (0 – 64800 seconds) of Paging Transfer for incoming call from
outside caller, when all VAU path are busy. If all VAU path are busy while waiting
time,
Incoming call transfer to transferring ring group (CMD 2204).
> 0405 - System Timers, Part A,
Item 64: Message re-send duration time for paging (VAU)
Set the duration time, when no-answer to Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal
Message, re-send the personal message for paging speaker.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 99: Personal Message (VAU)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to
initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU).
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B, Item 3: Call forward with personal Message (VAU)
Assign a service code of call forward with personal message.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B, Item 5: direct extension call pickup
Assign a service code of direct extension call pickup.
> 2201 - VAU Reset
Erase the VAU personal message and VAU message.
> 2202 - Message length Assignment for VAU
Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message.
> 2204 - Transfer ring group Setup when VAU No Answer
Assign a transfer ring group number, when all VAU path are busy for DUD/DISA
caller.
¾ 344 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer
<Key Telephone>
To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 713(
).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for caller)
Dial 803(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for paging)
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a of "To operate").
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b of "To operate").
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c of "To operate").
¾ 345 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 715(
) and specified extension number.
To operate the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-b. Dial 5 (listen).
5-b. Listen the recorded Personal Message (for caller).
6-b. Listen the recorded Personal Message (for paging).
7-b. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
¾ 346 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
(Cont'd)
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
9-c.
10-c.
11-c.
Dial 7 (re-record).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for caller).
Dial 803(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 347 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Off hook.
Dial 713(
).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for caller)
Dial 803(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for paging)
On hook (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a of "To operate").
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b of "To operate").
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c of "To operate").
To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 715(
) and specified extension number.
To operate the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
¾ 348 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To active the Meet Me External Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
(Cont'd)
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
7-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for caller).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
9-c.
10-c.
11-c.
Dial 7 (re-record).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for caller).
Dial 803(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 349 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer
<Key Telephone>
To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 713(
).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for caller)
Dial 801(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for paging)
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a of "To operate").
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b of "To operate").
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c of "To operate").
To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 715(
) and specified extension number.
To operate the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
¾ 350 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message: (Cont'd)
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
7-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for caller).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
9-c.
10-c.
11-c.
Dial 7 (re-record).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for caller).
Dial 803(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 351 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Off hook.
Dial 713(
).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for caller)
Dial 801(
).
Dial the Internal Paging Group code (1-8).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message. (for paging)
On hook (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a of "To operate").
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b of "To operate").
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c of "To operate").
To answer Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 715(
) and specified extension number.
To operate the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 713(
).
3. Hear "To re-record dial 7, to listen dial 5, to erase dial 3".
4-a. Dial 3 (erase).
5-a. Press SPK to hang (Finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
¾ 352 ¾
Meet Me Paging Transfer by Personal Message (VAU)
(Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To active the Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer by Personal Message: (Cont'd)
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
7-b.
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
8-c.
9-c.
10-c.
11-c.
Dial 5 (listen).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for caller).
Listen the recorded Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 5-c).
Dial 7 (re-record).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for caller).
Dial 801(
).
Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording Personal Message (for paging).
Press SPK to hang up (Finish).
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 5-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 5-b).
¾ 353 ¾
Memo Dial
Description
While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets an extension user store an important number for
easy redialing later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial
Directory Assistance and ask for a client's telephone number. When Directory Assistance
plays back the requested number, the caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in
the telephone's memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after hanging up.
When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the Trunk
Line. Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
When Memo Dial calls out, it outside the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not
automatically strip out Trunk Line or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored
number.
Default Setting
- Memo Dial enabled.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 47: Memo Dial
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Memo Dial.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Memo Dialing (code 1015).
¾ 354 ¾
Memo Dial (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 47,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Memo Dial?
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, assign a Memo
Dial key (code 1015).
Stop
¾ 355 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 47,
enter 1.
Memo Dial (Cont'd)
Related Features
Last Number Dialing
Quickly redial the last number dialed.
Saved Last Number Dialing
Save the last outside number dialed.
Operation
To store a number while you are on a call:
1. While on a call, press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
2. Dial number you want to store.
3. Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation.
To call a stored Memo Dial number:
1. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
2. Press idle CL key.
The stored number dials out only if you store a Trunk Line access code before the
number.
OR
Press line key.
The stored number dials out.
To check to see the stored Memo Dial number:
1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
The stored number displays.
To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
¾ 356 ¾
Message Waiting
Description
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered
extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called
extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message
Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message Waiting
ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended.
Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:
- View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display key telephone only)
- Cancel all message left at their extension (key telephone only)
- Cancel messages they left at other extensions (key telephone only)
An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions.
Also, any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
A key telephone can be received Message Waiting. A single line telephone cannot be
received Message Waiting.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service permits leaving Message Waiting.
- Service Code of Message Waiting is dial 841.
- Service Code of Cancel All Message Waiting is dial 873.
- Service Code of Cancel Message Waiting is dial 871.
- Service Code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720.
- Not setting a One Digit Service Code of Message Waiting.
Options
None
¾ 357 ¾
Message Waiting (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 15,
enter 0.
No
Yes
Should extension be able to
leave a Message Waiting?
In 0406 Item 15,
enter 1.
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, do not
assign a function
key for Message
Waiting (code 1023).
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
Message Waiting?
Yes
Do you change the Service
Code for Message Waiting,
Cancel All Message Waiting,
Cancel Message Waiting and
Common Canceling Code?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key for
Message Waiting
(code 1023).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
Message Waiting?
No
Stop
¾ 358 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512 Service
No. 7, assign a One
Digit Service Code for
Message Waiting.
Message Waiting (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 15: Message Waiting
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to leave
Massage Waiting.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 10: Message Waiting
Assign a service code of message waiting.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 11: Cancel All Message Waiting
Assign a service code of all message waiting.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 12: Cancel Message Waiting
Assign a service code of cancel the message waiting you left at a specific extension.
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No.7: Message Waiting
Assign a one digit service code for message waiting.
> 0514 - Service code Setup, Part B
Item 10: Common Canceling service code
Assign a service code of common Canceling service code.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Message Waiting (code 1023).
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
When a user responds to a Message Waiting, the system does not cancel the Message
Waiting indication if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback. The system cancels
the indication only if the called party lifts the handset or presses SPK.
Programmable Function Key
A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature's operation.
¾ 359 ¾
Message Waiting (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To leave a Message Waiting:
This feature only available for key telephone.
1. Call busy or unanswered extension.
2. Dial 841(
)
OR
Press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023)
OR
Dial One Digit Service Code for Message Waiting.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
Your MW LED lights.
To answer a Message Waiting:
1. Press idle CL key and dial 841(
).
OR
Press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023).
To display your Message Waiting list:
There are the messages left by other users at your extension.
1. Press CHECK.
2. Dial 841(
).
3. Press VOL s or VOL t to scroll through your messages.
Press your Messages Waiting key or and idle CL key to call the displayed extension.
4. Press CLEAR to return to the time and date display.
To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 871(
).
3. Dial number of extension you don't want to have your messages.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 360 ¾
Message Waiting (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To cancel all your Message Waiting:
This includes message you have left for other extensions and messages other
extension have left for you.
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 873(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel of Message Waiting by dial 720, these features are cancelled at
same time for DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, alarm clock, Headset Mode and
Text Message.
<Single Line Telephone>
To leave a Message Waiting:
1. Call busy or unanswered extension (for key telephone).
2. Dial 841(
) or One digit service code for Message Waiting.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. On hook.
To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 871(
).
3. Dial number of extension you don't want to have your messages.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
4. On hook.
¾ 361 ¾
Message Waiting (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont'd)
To cancel all your Message Waiting:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 873(
).
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
3. On hook.
OR
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 720 (
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. On hook.
When you cancel of Message Waiting by dial 720, these features are cancelled at
same time for DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, alarm clock, Headset Mode and
Text Message.
To answer a Message Waiting:
To display your Message Waiting list:
These features only available for key telephone with display.
¾ 362 ¾
Music on Hold
Description
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the
caller know that his call is waiting, not forgotten.
Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls. Music on Hold
is generated from the internal music source.
Optionally, customer’s music device such as CD player or Radio can be used as the source.
For the details, refer to “External Music on Hold”.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Default password for changing MOH is 0000.
- The Music on Hold selection is Minuet.
- An extension's Class of Service permits changing the Music on Hold tone.
- All Trunk Line use the internal Music on Hold source.
Options
None.
Programming
> 0202 - Setting the User Password, Item 1: Setting of Data and Time, and Changing the
Music on Hold Tone
Set the password for a user must dial before changing the Music on Hold tone (four
digits).
> 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup. Item 1: Music on Hold tone
Set the Music on Hold selection. The options are 0 (no tone or external), 1 (synthesized
Minuet in G), 2 (synthesized Nocturne).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 45: Changing the Music on Hold Tone
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
change the Music on Hold tone (Service Code 881).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 1: Change of music on hold tone
Assign a Service Code for change of music on hold tone.
> 0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source
Set the Music on Hold source.
> 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 363 ¾
Music on Hold (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
External
(CPU Terminals)
In 0914, enter option
255 for selected
Trunk line.
ACI
Should MOH use
internal, external or
ACI for source?
In 0914, assign ACI
software port (1-6) to
selected Trunk line.
Internal
In 0914, enter option
254 for selected
Trunk line.
In 1301, set ACI
software port assigned
above to input (1).
In 0302 Item 1,
enter 0 for
external.
In 0302 Item 1, enter 1
(for Minuet in G) or 2
(for Nocturne).
No need to change 0302entering an ACI software
port in 0914 overrides it.
If you enter 0 with no
external source connected,
MOH doesn't occur.
Should extension user be
able to change the Music
on Hold tone (by dialing
Service Code 881)?
Yes
In 0202, set the Music on
Hold/Time and Date
password (normally 0000).
No
In 0406 Item 45, enter 0
to enable dialing Service
Code 881.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 364 ¾
In 0406 Item 45, enter
1 to enable dialing
Service Code 881.
Music on Hold (Cont'd)
Related Features
None
Operation
To change the Music on Hold tone:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 881 (
).
Dial the password (normally 0000).
Dial Music on Hold tone code:
0: No tone
1: Minuet
2: Nocturne
5. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 365 ¾
Name Storing (Trunk & Station)
Description
Extensions and Trunk Line can have names instead of physical circuit port numbers. These
names show on an extension's display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and
Trunk Line names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a
directory when processing calls. A name can be up to 10 digits long, consisting of
alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
Default Setting
- Set by an extension's Class of Service:
Trunk Line names display when the Trunk Line starts ringing or when the user seizes
the Trunk Line. Extension names display when intercom call rings in, is voice
announced or is answered by the user.
Extensions may program their names.
- “EXT xxx” for extensions. (xxx: 200-271)
- “LINE yyy” for trunk lines. (yyy: 01-52)
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 37: Trunk Line No. and Name Display
(seizing)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a Trunk
Line's name/number when the user seizes the Trunk line (incoming or outgoing).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 38: Trunk Line No. and Name Display
(incoming)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a Trunk
Line's name/number when the Trunk line is ringing.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 39: Extension No. and Name Display
(conversation)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the
incoming Intercom callers name/number after the extension user answers the call. (The
user answers by pressing SPK or lifting the handset.)
¾ 366 ¾
Name Storing (Trunk & Station) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0903, do not
assign names to
Trunk line ports
01-52.
No
In 0406 Item 37,
enter 0.
No
In 0406 Item 38,
enter 0.
No
In 0502, do not
assign names to
extension ports
01-72.
In 0406 Item 85,
enter 0.
No
No
Do you want
Trunk Lines to
have names?
Do you want a Trunk
line's name/number
displayed when a user
seizes the Trunk line?
Do you want a Trunk
line's name to display
while it is ringing?
Do you want extensions
to have names?
Do you want an
extension to be able
to program their own
name?
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 367 ¾
Yes
In 0903, assign
names to
Trunk line
ports 01-52.
Yes
In 0406 Item 37,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 38,
enter 1.
Yes
Yes
In 0502, assign
names to extension
ports 01-72.
In 0406 Item 85,
enter 1.
Name Storing (Trunk & Station) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0406 Item 39,
enter 0.
No
Answering the call means the called
user presses SPK or lifts the handset.
After a user answers
an Intercom call,
should caller's
name/number display?
Yes
In 0406 Item 39,
enter 1.
This is for the pre-answer
and Handsfree Answer-back
display.
In 0406 Item 40,
enter 0.
No
Should extension user see
the name/number of an
incoming Intercom caller
before answering the call?
Yes
In 0406 Item 40,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Extension Number
Program?
No
Stop
¾ 368 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Name Storing (Trunk & Station) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 40: Extension No. and Name Display (incoming)
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the
incoming Intercom callers name/number. This is for the pre-answer and Handsfree
Answer-back display.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 85: Extension name input
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
program their name.
> 0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Program names for system extensions (port 01-72).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 79: Extension name program
Assign a service code for extension name program.
> 0903 - Trunk Line Names
Program names for system Trunk Lines (01-52).
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
Directory Dialing
Digital Key Telephones with Larger Display use extension names for Directory Dialing.
Operation
To program your extension's name:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 800(
).
3. Enter name (see below).
Your name can be up to 10 digits max.
4. Press HOLD.
5. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 369 ¾
Night Service (Manual / Auto)
Description
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes.
Night Service redirects calls to their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and
Universal Night Answer programming. A user typically activates Night Service after
normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. The system
also provides external contacts to enable Night Service.
There are four Night Service modes:
- Day Mode - for normal working hours
- Night Mode - after hours (evening)
- Midnight Mode - after hours (late evening to midnight)
- Rest Mode - interval usually used for lunch
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
With Assigned Night Answer, Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned
Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications,
this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer. For example, you could
program Trunk Line to ring the security station telephone during off hours.
Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers.
With UNA, an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key.
Conditions
Night service feature is system wide.
Manual day/night mode change is available for key telephone
Default Setting
- Night Service user password is 0000.
- Manual Night Mode Switch allowed.
- Automatic Night Mode Switch allowed.
- An extension's Class of Service not allowed Manual Night Mode Switch.
¾ 370 ¾
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont’d)
Programming
For example:
Use Ring Group 16 for Night
Mode, 15 for Midnight Mode
and 14 for Rest Mode.
Start
In 0910, assign Trunk
lines to Ring Groups that
you won't use for night
ringing. Trunk lines that
ring the same way should be
in the same Ring Group.
No
Should system
have Assigned Night
Answer (ANA)?
Yes
In 0910, assign Trunk
lines to Ring Groups for
night ringing. Trunk
lines that ring the same way
at night should be in the
same Ring Group.
In 0909, select night
ringing Ring Group
(e.g., 16), assign
extensions to that group
and make them ring (1).
In 1605, do not assign
Trunk lines to External
Paging zones.
No
Should system
have Universal Night
Answer (UNA)?
Refer also to the
External Paging feature.
In 1006, assign
function keys to the
UNA Trunk
lines (01-52).
Continued
on the next
page.
¾ 371 ¾
Yes
In 1605, indicate which
Trunk lines should ring
External Paging zones.
In 0911, make sure UNA
Trunk lines are in
Access Maps that allow
Incoming access.
In 0912, make sure the
Access Maps the extension
uses at night allow
incoming access for the
UNA Trunk lines.
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0802, assign entry 0
to each day of the week.
No
Should system have
Automatic Night
Service switching?
Yes
In 0801, set the Automatic
Night Service patterns
(time periods).
In 0802, assign the
patterns set in 0801 to
days of the week.
In 0401 Item
2, enter 1.
In 0401 Item
1, enter 0.
In 0406 Item
2, enter 0.
No
No
Should system have
Manual Night
Service switching?
Should extensions be
able to switch the night
Mode (i.e., dial Service
Code 818 or press
function key)?
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 372 ¾
In 0803, set the
Automatic Night Service
patterns to holidays.
Yes
Yes
In 0401 Item
1, enter 1.
In 0406 Item
2, enter 1.
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Should extension user
be able to change the
Night Mode by pressing
a function key?
Yes
For Day Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1039 (plus password).
No
In 1006, do not assign
a function key to codes
1039-l042.
For Night Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1040 (plus password).
For Midnight Mode switching,
in 1006 assign a function key
code 1041 (plus password).
For Rest Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1042 (plus password).
The default password
is 0000.
In 0202 Item 2, set the
Night Service Password.
Stop
¾ 373 ¾
The system requires the password
for function keys 1039-1042 and
Service code 818.
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont'd)
Options
None
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0202 - Setting the User Password, Item 2: Switching of Night Mode
Set the password an extension user must dial before activating Night Service (four
digits).
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 1: Manual Night Service Enable
Allow (1) or prevent (0) from activating Night Service.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 2: Automatic Night service Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Night Mode switching.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 2: Manual Night Service Switching
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an ability to manually switch
the Night Mode (Service Code 818).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 5: Night-mode switching
Assign a service code for night-mode switching
> 0801 - Automatic Night Service Patterns
Configure the Automatic Night Service patterns.
> 0802 - Weekly Night Service Switching
Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns programmed in 0801 to each
day of the week.
> 0803 - Holding Night Service Switching
Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays.
> 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment,
To have Trunk lines ring extension during the different Night Service modes (for ANA),
assign extension to Ring Groups (1-16). For each extension in the Ring Group, indicate
if Trunk line should ring (1) or not ring(0).
> 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
To have Trunk lines ring extensions for ANA, assign Trunk lines to Ring Groups.
You make a different entry for each Night Service mode.
¾ 374 ¾
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
To allow for UNA answering, set up the Trunk line Access Maps (1-16). For UNA,
extension must have incoming access to Trunk line ringing the External Paging
speakers.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
For UNA answering, assign Trunk line Access Maps (1-16) to extensions. Make one
entry for each Night Service mode.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign Night Service function keys to extensions:
Day Mode = 1039 + password
Night Mode = 1040 + password
Mid Night Mode = 1041 + password
Rest Mode = 1042 + password
> 1605 - Universal Night Answer
For each Night Service Mode, assign which Trunk Lines should ring which External
Paging Zones.
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups
There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night
Service mode (Day, Night, Midnight, and Rest).
Paging, External
When Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Key
For each Night Service Mode, assign which Trunk lines should ring which External
Paging Zones.
¾ 375 ¾
Night Service (Manual / Auto) (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To activate Night Service by dialing codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 818(
).
Dial Night Service Password (default 0000).
Dial Night Service code:
0: Day mode
1: Night mode
2: Midnight mode
3: Rest mode
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:
1. Press Night Service key (see below).
Day mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1039 + password)
Night mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1040 + password)
Midnight mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1041 + password)
Rest mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1042 + password)
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
<Single Line Telephone>
To activate Night Service by dialing codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 818(
).
Dial Night Service Password (default 0000).
Dial Night Service code:
0: Day mode
1: Night mode
2: Midnight mode
3: Rest mode
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
5. On hook.
To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:
This feature only available for key telephone.
¾ 376 ¾
One-Touch Dialing
Description
One-Touch Dialing gives an extension user one button access to extensions, Trunk Lines
and selected system features. This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and
features they use most often.
Instead of dialing a series of codes, the user needs only press the One-Touch Key.
An extension user can have One-Touch Keys programmed for:
- Direct Station Selection - one button access to extensions
- Trunk Line Calling - one button access to Trunk Lines or Trunk Line groups
- Abbreviated Dialing - one button access to stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers
- Service Code - one button access to specific Service Code
An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can store their
bank's automated number in one key and their security code in another. After the bank
answers, the user just presses the second key to enter their security code. The digits output
exactly as entered (i.e., Service Code 818 outputs as digits 818).
One-Touch Dialing is the first level of operation of One-Touch Keys. In other words, OneTouch Dialing occurs when the user just presses the key.
There is a second level of One-Touch Key operation called One-Touch Serial Calling. The
user access these functions by first pressing the Serial Operation key. Refer to the OneTouch Serial Operation feature.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone. (except DSLT )
One-Touch Keys do not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).
Default Setting
- One-Touch Keys have no assigned functions.
- Service Code of one touch dial number saving is dial 855.
¾ 377 ¾
One-Touch Dialing (Cont'd)
Options
None
Programming
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 27: One touch dial number saving
Assign a service code for one touch dial number saving.
> 1007 - Programming One-Touch Keys
Set the functions of an extension's One-Touch Keys. An extension user can also
program their One-Touch Keys.
Related Features
One-Touch Serial Operation
An extension user can use One-Touch Keys to store a series of operations.
Programmable Function Key
Function keys can also give an extension user one-touch access to selected system
features.
Transfer
When transferring a call, an extension user can press a One-Touch Key instead of
dialing the extension number.
Operation
To program a One-Touch Key for Direct Station Selection (extension) calling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key and dial 855(
).
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
Dial extension number you want assign to that key.
Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 378 ¾
One-Touch Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To program a One-Touch Key for Trunk Line calling:
1. Press idle CL key and dial 855(
).
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial general Trunk Line access code (9).
OR
Dial Specific Trunk Line Service Code (805) plus the Trunk Line number.
(e.g., 05)
OR
Dial Trunk Line Group Service Code (804) plus the Trunk Line group number
(e.g., 1).
4. Dial number you want to call.
To enter a pause, press MIC.
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To program a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing:
1. Press idle CL key and dial 855(
).
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial 813(
) to store a Common Abbreviated Dialing number.
OR
Dial 814(
) to store a group Abbreviated Dialing number.
4. Dial Abbreviated Dialing number storage code (e.g., 001).
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To assign a Service Code to a One-touch Key:
1.
2.
3.
4.
This lets you make your own set of one-touch feature keys.
Press idle CL key and dial 855(
).
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
Dial Service Code you want stored.
For example, if you want a One-Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number
Dialing, enter 876.
Press SPK to hang up.
To use a One-Touch Key:
1. Press One-Touch Key.
If you press a line key before pressing a One-Touch Key for Trunk Line calling, the
system automatically strips the Trunk Line code before dialing the number.
¾ 379 ¾
One-Touch Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To chain One-Touch Keys:
1. Press first One-Touch Key.
Last the stored function dial out.
2. Press another One-Touch Key.
The stored digits dial out.
To check the function of a One-Touch Key:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press One-Touch Key.
The stored function displays.
Repeat this step to check other keys. If you cannot see the entire number stored, dial
*.
3. Press CLEAR.
¾ 380 ¾
One-Touch Serial Operation
Description
An extension user have One-Touch Serial Operation store a series of feature steps under a
One-Touch Key. This simplifies extension operation by giving each user the ability to have
customized feature keys. For example, an extension user could have a One-Touch Serial
Operations Key automatically forward all their calls to extension 210. One-Touch Serial
Operation can store up to 24 of the following operations:
Allowed Serial Operations
Service Codes
Digits 0-9, # and *
One-Touch Keys
Function Keys
SPK, DND, VOL s and
VOL t, CL, HOLD
DC, FLSH, LND, TRFR,
CHECK, and CLEAR
keys
Pause (by pressing MIC)
One-Touch Serial Operation is the second level of operation of One-Touch keys. The user
must press the Serial Operation key before the One-Touch Key. The first level of operation
is One-Touch Dialing, which occurs when the user just presses the key. Refer to the OneTouch Dialing feature.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone. (except DSLT )
(A) One-Touch Serial Operation does not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).
(B) If a user stores a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses the first
level (One-Touch function). If there is a serial operation stored under the key
selected, the system ignores it.
Default Setting
- No Serial Operation key programmed.
- Service Code for Serial operation registration to one touch key is dial 852.
Options
None
¾ 381 ¾
One-Touch Serial Operation (Cont'd)
Programming
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 43: Serial operation registration to one touch key
Assign a service code for serial operation registration to one touch key.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function keys for Serial Operation (code 1034).
Related Features
One-Touch Dialing
One-Touch Dialing gives an extension user one button access to extensions, Trunk Line
and selected system features.
Programmable Function Key
One-touch Serial Operation requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Operation
To store a series of operations in a One-Touch key:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 852(
).
Press the One-Touch Key you want to program.
Enter the sequence of operations you want to store (up to 24 entries).
You can store the following operations:
Service Codes
Digits 0-9, # and *
SPK, DND, VOL s and VOL t, CL, HOLD
DC, FLSH, LND, TRFR, CHECK, and CLEAR keys
One-Touch Keys
Function Keys
Pause (by pressing MIC)
5. Press the Serial Operations key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034)
6. Press SPK to hang up.
To dial using One-Touch Serial Operation;
1. Press Serial Operation key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034).
2. Press One-Touch Key.
The stored serial operation dials out.
¾ 382 ¾
One-Touch Serial Operation (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To check the serial operation stored in a One-Touch Key:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press One-Touch Key twice.
The stored serial operation displays.
To check another key, press it twice before going to step 3.
If the stored number does not fit in the display, dial * to see the entire number.
3. Press CLEAR.
To clear a One-Touch Serial Operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 852(
).
Press One-Touch Key you want to delete.
Press the Serial Operations key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034).
Press SPK to hang up.
If you store a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses first level
(One-Touch) function.
¾ 383 ¾
Paging
Description
The system allows the following types of paging;
· Internal Paging
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users. The
system allows up to 8 separate Internal Paging Zones and allows one internal all call paging
group which not correspond to normal internal paging groups. When a user makes a Page
announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions (key telephone) in the
zone dialed. An extension can be a member of one Internal Paging Zone. Like External
Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement
without calling each extension individually.
· External Paging
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment
connected to external Paging zones. When a user pages one of these external zones, the
system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging, External
Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling
each extension individually.
The system allows up to eight External Paging zones. Each zone requires a port on a PGDU
option cards and customer-provided Paging equipment.
· Paging Combine
With Paging Combine, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment
connected to external zones and other keyset users in an extension group at the same time.
Each external paging zone can has one internal paging group which is called Paging
Combine at the same time.
Conditions
· This feature available for key telephones and single line telephones.
· Single line telephones cannot received internal paging call.
· Internal Paging does not require a PGDU card.
· External Paging requires the installation of PGDU Cards and customer-provided Paging
equipment.
Options
DX2E-4PGDU-S1
¾ 384 ¾
Paging (Cont’d)
Related Features
Doorphone
If PGDU card has four Doorphone connected par a card, you cannot use the port for
External Paging.
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
Outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.
Default Setting
- No Internal Paging Groups programmed.
- An extension's Class of Service allows Internal Paging.
- No Internal Paging Zone keys assigned.
- Service code for internal group paging is dial 801.
- All External Paging ports have gain number 1 (0 dB).
- Maximum duration of Paging announcement is 120 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service permits initiating External Paging.
- All External Paging Zones broadcast a splash tone before the page announcement.
- External Paging Zone numbers are the same as the External Paging Group numbers.
- Service Code for External paging is dial 803.
¾ 385 ¾
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming
Internal Paging
Start
Refer to the system
Hardware Manual.
No
Stop
No
In 1604 Item 1,
enter 0.
In 1604 Item 3,
enter 0.
Yes
Set up PGDU PCB for
External Paging.
In 1606, assign the
External Zones set in
1603 to External
Paging Groups 1-8.
This is used for
calling the zones.
In 1604 Item 2,
enter 0.
Should system have
External Paging?
No
No
Should two beeps (i.e.,
splash tone) precede
External Paging
announcements?
Yes
When an External Paging zone
is idle, should it broadcast
Background Music?
When an External Paging
zone is idle, should it
broadcast Alarms?
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 386 ¾
Yes
Yes
In 1604 Item 1,
enter 1.
In 1604 Item 2,
enter 1.
In 1604 Item 3,
enter 1.
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Internal Paging (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If necessary, you can set up
the PGDU CODEC gain
types in 0119.
After adjusting the Paging
amplifier and the PGDU
volume controls, is the
External Paging volume
adequate?
No
In 0120, select a different
CODEC gain type for the
PGDU ports.
Yes
Too short a setting can cut
off Pages in progress.
Is the Page duration
setting adequate?
No
In 0405, Item 18, adjust
the Page Announcement
Duration.
Yes
In 0406 Item 22,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 22,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use External
Paging?
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
assign keys for External
Zone Paging (code 1004 +
zone) and External All
Call Paging (code 1005).
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
External Paging?
Do you change the
Service Code for
External Paging?
No
Stop
¾ 387 ¾
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign function
keys for External Zone
Paging (code 1004 + zone)
and External All Call
Paging (code 1005).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
External Paging
In 1601, enter 0.
In 1602, do not program
names for the Internal
Paging zones (1-8).
In 1607, enter 2 for
beeps.
Do not assign more than 50
extensions to the
same Paging Zone.
Start
No
Should extension be in an
Internal Paging zone?
Yes
Number When Paging, should user Name
see a Paging zone name
or the zone number on
the telephone display?
Turned
off
Should the tones that
precede an Internal Page
be normal volume, muted
or turned off?
The system mutes the
tones only if the user
sets the telephone
volume control switch
to medium or high.
Normal
In 1601, assign an
extension to an Internal
Paging zone (1-8).
In 1602, program names
for the Internal Paging
zones (1-8).
In 1607, enter 0 for
normal volume.
Muted
In 1607, enter 1 for
muted volume.
If the interval is too short, Internal
Paging announcements may be cut off.
Is the maximum duration
setting for Internal
Paging adequate?
Yes
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 388 ¾
No
In 0405 Item 18, set the
Page Announcement
Duration.
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
External Paging (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0406 Item 52,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Internal Paging?
Yes
In 0406 Item 52,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
function keys for Internal
Paging Zones (code 1006
+ 1-8).
In 1608 for each
extension, enter 0.
In 1609, do not assign
a name to the All Call
Internal Paging Zone.
No
No
Standard
Display
Should extension have
one-button Internal
Zone Paging?
Should extension be
able to use All Call
(All Zone) Internal
Paging?
When All Call Paging,
should extension
paging see All Call
Paging name or
standard display?
Do you change the
Service Code for
Internal Group
Paging?
No
Stop
¾ 389 ¾
Yes
Yes
Name
Yes
In 1006, assign function
keys for Internal Paging
Zones (code 1006 + 1-8).
In 1608 for each
extension, enter 1.
In 1609, assign a
name to the All Call
Internal Paging Zone.
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0119 - External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Type
Set the five CODEC gain types for External Page and Door Box ports.
> 0120 - External Page and Doorphone CODEC Gain Setup
Assign a CODEC gain type from Program 0119 to external Page and Door Box Ports.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 18: Paging announcement duration
Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 22: External Paging
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use External Paging.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 52: Internal Group Paging
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Internal
Paging.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 19: External paging
Assign a service code for external paging.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 26: Internal group paging
Assign a service code for internal group paging.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Paging zones (1004) and External All Page (1005).
> 1601 - Internal Paging Groups
Assign a extensions to use of 8 Internal Paging Groups.
> 1602 - Internal Paging Group Names
Program names for the Internal Paging Groups.
> 1604 - External Paging Zone Control
Assign options for each External Paging Zone (1-8): Splash Tone before Page,
Background Music when idle and Alarm 1-8.
> 1606 - External Paging Zone Group
Assign each External Paging Zone (1-8) to an External Paging Group (1-8) used for
accessing the zone.
> 1607 - Internal Paging Group Splash Tone Setup
For each Internal Paging Group (1-8), have normal (0), muted (1) or no (2) Internal
Paging alert tones. If enabled (0 or 1), extensions hear two beeps before Paging
announcements. If disabled, the extensions hear the announcement without the beeps.
Muted tones can occur only if the extension user sets the telephone volume control
switch to medium or high.
¾ 390 ¾
Paging (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1608 - Internal All Call Paging Setup
Allow (1) or prevent (0) All Call Internal Paging for each extension.
If allowed, extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If
prevented, extension can only make All Call Internal Paging announcements. Do not
assign more than 50 extensions to the same All Call Paging Group. Internal All Call
Paging Group member must participated in the normal internal paging groups.
> 1609 - Internal All Call Paging Name
Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Group. The name shows on the display of
the telephone making the announcement.
Operation
Internal Paging
<Key Telephone>
To Page a Paging Group:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press the group's Internal Paging key
(PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1006 or SC 851: 1006 + 1-8).
OR
Dial 801(
) and the Paging group number (1-8).
3. Make announcement.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
To Page a Internal All Call Paging:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press the group's Internal Paging key
(PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1006+0) and dial 0.
OR
Dial 801(
) and the All Call Internal Group number (0).
3. Make announcement.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
<Single Line Telephone>
To Page a Paging Group:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 801(
) and the Paging group number (1-8).
Make announcement.
On hook.
¾ 391 ¾
Paging (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
Internal Paging (Cont’d)
To Page a Internal All Call Paging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 801(
) and the All Call Internal Group number (0).
Make announcement.
Press SPK to hang up.
External Paging
<Key Telephone>
To Page into an external zone:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 803(
).
3. Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Press External Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 for External Paging zones or
1005 for External All Call Paging).
<Single Line Telephone>
To Page into an external zone:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 803(
).
3. Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
Paging Combine
<Key Telephone>
To Page the Paging Combine:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 751(
).
3. Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8).
<Single Line Telephone>
To Page the Paging Combine:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 751(
).
3. Dial the External Paging Group code (1-8).
¾ 392 ¾
Park Hold
Description
Park Hold places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may
pick it up. The system has up to 8 Park Hold Orbits. After parking a call in orbit, a user can
Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a
programmed Park Hold Orbit key to pick up the call. With Park Hold, it is not necessary to
locate a person to handle their calls.
The held line will automatically be transferred to the other extension by going on-hook
after dial the desired extension number.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
An extension can park a call in any of the 8 Park Hold Orbits. However, an extension can
only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park Hold group (see Program 1014).
Default Setting
- Hold Recall Callback Time is 30 seconds.
- Park Hold Time is 30 seconds.
- All extensions in Park Hold Group 1.
- No Park Hold Orbit keys defined.
- All extension users can use On-Hook Auto Transfer feature.
Options
None
¾ 393 ¾
Park Hold (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 1014, assign all
extensions to different
Park Groups (1-8).
In 1006, do not assign
function keys for Park
Orbits (code 1033 + Orbit
number 1-8).
In 0406, item 77,
enter 0.
No
Should extension user
be able to pick up any
parked call?
Yes
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
Park Orbits?
Yes
No
Should extension have
On-Hook Auto Transfer?
Yes
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions..
Is the time that
unretrieved calls
remain parked
adequate?
In 1014, assign all
extensions to the same
Park Group (e.g., 01).
In 1006, assign function
keys for Park Orbits
(code 1033 + Orbit
number 1-8).
In 0406, item 77,
enter 1.
If the Park Hold Time is too
short, calls recall before the
paged callers can pick them up.
In 0405 Item 66,
change the Park
Hold Time.
No
Yes
Is a parked call recalls,
does it ring the extension
that parked it for an
adequate time?
No
In 0405 Item 27,
change the Hold Recall
Callback Time.
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Yes
Do you change the
Service Code for
Park Hold and Answer
for Park Hold?
No
Stop
¾ 394 ¾
Park Hold (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 27: Normal hold callback timer
A call left park held too long recalls the extension that initially park held it for this
interval.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 66: Park hold callback time
Set the Park Hold Timer (0-64800 seconds). A call left park held longer than interval
will recall the extension that initially park held it.
> 0406 - Class of Service Options, Item 77: On-Hook auto transfer (Park Hold)
“On-hook auto transfer for Park Hold” is defined either enable(1) or disable (0) in
extension’s Class of Service.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 55: Park hold
Assign a service code for park hold is dial 831.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 56: Answer for park hold
Assign a service code for answer for park hold.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a keys as a Park Hold Orbit key (code 1033 plus Park Hold Group number).
> 1014 - Park Hold Group
Assign an extension to a Park Hold Group (1-8). An extension can only pick up a call
Parked by a member of its own Park Hold Group.
Related Features
Hold
A user can place a call in a temporary waiting state without putting it in orbit.
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Park Hold operation.
¾ 395 ¾
Park Hold (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To Park Hold a call:
You can Park Hold Intercom of Trunk Line calls.
1. Press Park Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033).
2. Use Paging to announce call.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
OR
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial 831 (
).
3. Dial Park Hold orbit (1-8).
4. Use Paging to announce call.
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To pick up a park held call.
1. Lift handset.
2. Press Park Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033).
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 861(
).
3. Dial announced Park orbit (1-8).
<Single Line Telephone>
To Park Hold a call:
You can Park Hold Intercom or Trunk Line calls.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press HOLD.
Dial 831 (
).
Dial Park Hold orbit (1-8).
Use Paging to announce call.
Press SPK to hang up.
To pick up a parked call.
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 861(
).
3. Dial announced Park orbit (1-8).
¾ 396 ¾
Park Hold (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone>
To use On-hook auto transfer feature to transfer a call:
1. Make conversation with outside party.
2. Press Park Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033).
3. Dial desired extension number.
4. Hang up or press “TRFR” key. (This call shall be transferred)
<Single Line Telephone>
To use On-hook auto transfer feature to transfer a call:
1. Make conversation with outside party.
1. Do hook-flash for hold the line.
2. Dial 831 (
).
3. Dial Park Hold orbit (1-8).
4. Dial desired extension number.
5. Hang up. (This call shall be transferred)
¾ 397 ¾
PBX Compatibility
Description
You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to telco Trunk
line circuits. This makes the trunk inputs into the system single line telephone compatible
Centrex/PBX extensions, rather than telco circuits. PBX Compatibility lets the system be a
node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private telephone network. To place outside calls when the
system is behind a PBX, phone system users must first dial the PBX's trunk access code
(usually 9).
The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:
· PBX Trunk Access Code Screening
The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes.
The system can screen for up to 4 trunk access codes. The codes can be one or two digits
long, consisting of the digits 0-9, # and *. (You use the FLSH key as a wild card entry.)
· PBX Trunk Line Toll Restriction
The system can provide the Toll Restriction, for the PBX Trunk Line, or restriction can
be handled solely by the connected PBX. If the phone system provides the restriction, it
restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code.
· PBX Call Restriction
When the phone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from
dialing PBX extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those dialed after the
PBX trunk access code. The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the
PBX's outside Trunk Lines.
· Automatic Pause
The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual
dialing, Abbreviated Dialing, Last Number Dialing, Automatic Repeat Dialing and Save
number Dialed. This gives the connected PBX time to set up its Trunk Line circuits.
Conditions
None
¾ 398 ¾
PBX Compatibility (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In Program 0901 Items
7- 10, designate PBX
trunks (entry 1 ).
Make an entry for each
Night Service mode.
Check Program 0901 Items
1, 2 and 3 for compatibility
with the connected PBX.
In Program 0901 Item 19,
enter 0 to enable system
Toll Restriction.
System
Should system or PBX
Toil Restrict trunk?
PBX
In Program 0901 Item 19,
enter 1 to disable system
Toll Restriction.
In Program 0702
Item 9, enter the PBX
access codes.
Go to
A
Calls are unrestricted unless
user dials PBX access code.
In Program 0701 Item 10,
enter 0. Restriction
begins after user dials
PBX access code.
User must dial access code.
User cannot call PBX
extensions.
No
Should calls on the PBX
trunk be restricted to
outside calls only?
Yes
In Program 1004, assign
Toll Restriction Class
to extensions.
Do extension users
want one-button PBX
transfer?
In Program 0701 Item 10,
enter 1. Restriction
begins after user dials
PBX access code.
A
Yes
In 0402 Item 2, assign
the TRFR key for flash
(entry 2).
No
In 0114 Item 9, set
the flash duration.
Stop
¾ 399 ¾
PBX Compatibility (Cont'd)
Default Setting
- PBX call restriction disabled.
- No PBX access codes entered.
- Trunk Lines are DTMF, have immediate ring detect and use CODEC gain 1.
- Trunk Lines are stand-alone (not set for behind PBX).
- Toll Restriction enabled for all PBX Trunk Lines.
Options
None
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
> 0114 - Analog Trunk Line (ATRU Card) Timers
If the TRFR key is set for transfer (in Program 0402, Item 2), use this program to set the
duration of the flash that occurs when a user presses the TRFR key.
> 0402 - System Options, Part B, Item 2: Transfer key operating mode
To simplify PBX transfer assign the TRFR key for flash (entry 2). Set the duration of the
flash in Program 0114 Item 9.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 10: Restriction of Calls Within PBX
For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to restrict calls on the PBX Trunk Line to
outside calls only. Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX extensions.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 9: Trunk Line Access Code of PBX
Enter the system PBX access codes. The system can have up to 10 codes.
A code can be one or two digits long. Valid enters are 0-9, # and *.
Use the FLSH key as a "don't care" digit.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A
Items 1(DP/DTMF), 2(Incoming Type) and 3(CODEC Cain Type)
Set these options for compatibility with the connected PBX.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Items 7-10: Behind PBX
For each PBX Trunk Line port. enable (0) or disable (1) Toll Restriction.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 19: Restrict
Assign a restrict or non-restrict for each PBX line (Trunk line).
> 1004 - Toll Restriction
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-8) to each extension.
¾ 400 ¾
PBX Compatibility (Cont'd)
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
· The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in an Abbreviated
Dialing bin.
· If Abbreviated Dialing routes a call to a PBX Trunk Line, it does not automatically
insert a PBX access code. It outdials the digits just as they are stored.
Trunk Line Calls, Answering and Ring Groups
Users answer incoming calls on PBX Trunk Lines, it does not automatically insert a
PBX access and Ring Group programming applies.
Refer to these features for more details.
Trunk Line Calls, Placing
Except for dialing the PBX access code, users place calls on PBX Trunk Lines just like
other Trunk Lines. All of the relevant access programming applies. Refer to the Central
Office Calls Placing feature for more details.
Direct Inward Lines
You can have DILs route from the connected PBX. Users can access these Trunk Lines
for outgoing PBX calls. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
Flash
Flash may allow access to certain PBX features-like Transfer. Make sure you program
Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX.
Pulse to Conversion
The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the
PBX Trunk Line access code.
Toll Restriction
PBX Trunk Lines can follow normal system Toll Restriction. Refer to the programming
chart on the previous page.
Trunk Line Groups and Trunk Line Group Routing
· Users can get outbound access to PBX Trunk Lines through Trunk Line Groups and/or
Trunk Line Group Routing. All Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
· If the system routes a call to a PBX Trunk Line, it does not automatically insert the PBX
access code. It outdials the call just as the user dialed it.
¾ 401 ¾
PBX Compatibility (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place a call over a PBX Trunk Line:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 804(
).
Dial PBX Trunk Line group number (1-9 or 01-16).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press PBX Trunk Line group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press idle CL key.
Dial 9(
).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press PBX Trunk Line Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press idle CL key.
Dial 805(
).
Dial PBX Trunk Line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press PBX Trunk Line key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1 to 52).
Dial PBX access code and number.
Note: In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.
¾ 402 ¾
PBX Compatibility (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call over a PBX Trunk Line:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 804(
).
Dial PBX Trunk Line group number (1-9 or 01-16).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press idle CL key.
Dial 9(
).
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
Press idle CL key.
Dial 805(
).
Dial PBX Trunk Line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
Dial PBX access code and number.
Note: In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.
¾ 403 ¾
PC Attendant
Description
Your PC can be performed as like operator console.
For the installation, PC Attendant interface board should be inserted in your PC. And either
headset or handset shall be connected with the board. The board shall be connected to one
of DSTU port. By installing PC Attendant software in the PC, then the PC can be
performed as computer assisted operator console.
Conditions
This feature is specially available for PC Attendant package.
Default Setting
No PC Attendant is set.
Options
PC Attendant package
Related Features
None
Programming
> 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment
Enter extension port number for PC Attendant interface board is connected on DSTU.
> 2501 - PC Attendant Port Setup
Enter extension port number for PC Attendant interface board is connected on DSTU.
> 2503 - PC Attendant Operation, Item1 Attendant Camp on
Enter disable (0) or enable (1) for Attendant camp on function.
¾ 404 ¾
PC Attendant (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Stop
In 2503, Item 1,
enter 0.
No
Should PC Attendant
Yes
In 2501, assign
extension (DSTU) port
number
Yes
In 2503, Item 1,
enter 1.
Console is installed?
No
Should PC Attendant
activate camp on?
In 1101, assign PC
Attendant port number.
Stop
Operation
Refere to “PC ATTENDANT CONSOLE USER’S MANUAL” for the details.
¾ 405 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series)
Description
The Voice Mail Integration feature allows a third party Voice Mail system to be connected
to the dX-Z system. The third party Voice Mail system must be connected to the analogue
extension ports of the dX-Z system. The analogue extension ports must be configured as
VX ports (Voice Mail ports). The dX-Z can be configured to provide up to 16 Voice Mail
ports. The level of integration between the Voice Mail system and the dX-Z is dependant
on the features the Voice Mail system supports. The features available with the dX-Z Voice
Mail Integration are;- Call Forwarding
- Forward all calls to the Voice Mail system
- Forward calls on Ring No Answer to the Voice Mail system
- Forward calls on Busy to the Voice Mail system
- Forward Calls on Ring No Answer/Busy to the Voice Mail system
- Message Waiting
- Key Telephone message waiting indication given on Message Key
- Key Telephone number of messages (01-32)
- Single Line Telephone distinctive message waiting dial tone
- Conversation Recording
- Key Telephones can record external calls into an individual mailbox
- Disconnect Detect
- Incoming caller disconnect detection for ISDN trunks, E&M trunks, Internal calls and
Analogue trunks with disconnect clearing
¾ 406 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Conditions
Call forwarding options are available for Key Telephones and single line telephones. A call
forward on busy and ring no answer can be set simultaneously (the key telephone display
shows forward on no answer).
Key Telephones give message waiting on the Message key, if no Message key is
programmed message waiting will be given on the MW lamp. Display Key Telephones also
give the number of messages if the voice mail system provides this information.
Call forwarding diverts internal calls, DDI calls and Tie Line calls to the Voice Mail
system. Calls presented at the SLT or key telephone as Ringing Groups, Department Group
calls or ACD group calls are not diverted to the Voice Mail system.
Conversation recording requires a conference block to be assigned.
Default Settings
No ports are assigned as Voice Mail ports.
Conversation Recording Warn Tone is off
Options
- DX2E-4ASTU-A1
¾ 407 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In Program 0401 Item 18,
enter “1” to assign the
“Hooking + Service code” for
SLT answering mode.
In Program 1001 Item 5,
enter 1 for all of PC based
voice mail ports.
In Program 1017,enter the all
of PC based voice mail port
Number.
In Program 0516, assign a
pilot number to access to PC
based voice mail.
Should change the tone
for SLT which is heard, if
SLT receive a message on
voice mail?
Yes
In Program 0108 Item 48,
assign a new tone number.
No
Should extension have onebutton access to the voice Yes
mail and/or conversation
recording?
In Program 1006 assign
VMB access (code 1059)
and conversation
recording (code 1060).
No
Should change the
duration of the alert tone
for the conversation
recording?
No
Stop
¾ 408 ¾
Yes
In Program 0405 Timer 65,
assign the duration time.
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0108 - Tone 48 : Single Line Telephone Voice Mail Message Waiting Tone
> 0401 - System Options, Part A Item 18 : SLT Answering mode
Enter 1 for this option to enable Conversation Record
> 0405 - System Timers (Part A) Item 65 : Record Alert Tone Interval Time. Sets the
interval between record warning tone sent to line
Item 1 : Delayed Call Forwarding Time. Sets the Ring No Answer
Forward time.
> 0516 - Voice Mail Ports Dial Number : Assign a Voice Mail pilot number.
Do not assign the same number the extension number of PC based voice mail ports.
> 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup Item 5 : Terminal Type
Set all ASTU ports used for Voice Mail as type 1
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Voice Mail Key to a Key Telephone (code 1059).
Optional :- Assign a Conversation Record key to a Key Telephone
> 1017 - Assign Voice Mail Ports
Assign one or more ports for connection of the Voice Mail system.
(code 1060).
Related Features
Forwarding calls to the Voice Mail system uses the existing call forward features.
One Touch keys can be used to simplify the call forwarding operation.
Programmable Function Key
There are two keys specifically for Voice Mail system operation:
A function key defined as a Message key gives Voice Mail message waiting indication and
simplifies both transferring calls to the Voice Mail system and accessing the Voice Mail
system.
A function key defined as a Conversation Recording key allows Key Telephone users to
record conversations with external callers to the Voice Mail system.
¾ 409 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Operation
<Key telephone>
To Activate Call Forward to Voice Mail System ;1. Press idle CL key
2. Dial call forwarding code;
843 (
) for Divert on Busy
845 (
) for Divert on Ring No Answer
848 (
) for All Call Forward
OR
Press Call Forwarding key.
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1002 for Divert on Busy
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1003 for Divert on Ring No Answer
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1055 for All Call Forward
3. Dial 1 plus the pilot number of the Voice Mail system
4. Press SPK to hang up.
To Cancel Call Forwarding ;1. Press an idle CL key.
2. Dial call forwarding code;
843 (
) for Divert on Busy
845 (
) for Divert on Ring No Answer
848 (
) for All Call Forward
OR
Press Call Forwarding key.
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1002 for Divert on Busy
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1003 for Divert on Ring No Answer
PGM 1006 or 851 : code 1055 for All Call Forward
3. Dial 0 to cancel
4. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 410 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Single Line Telephone>
To Activate Call Forward to Voice Mail System ;1. Off Hook
2. Dial call forwarding code;
843 (
) for Divert on Busy
845 (
) for Divert on Ring No Answer
848 (
) for All Call Forward
3. Dial 1 plus the pilot number of the Voice Mail system
4. On Hook.
To Cancel Call Forwarding
1. Off Hook
2. Dial call forwarding code;
843 (
) for Divert on Busy
845 (
) for Divert on Ring No Answer
848 (
) for All Call Forward
3. Dial 0 to cancel
4. On Hook.
<Key Telephone>
Voice Mail Message Waiting Indication
When the Voice Mail systems sets message waiting for the key telephone the Message key
flashes red. If a Message key is not assigned the MW lamp flashes red.
Display your Message Waiting list
If the Voice Mail system provides information on the number of voice mail messages the
list can be interrogated by;
1. Press CHECK.
2. Dial 841 ( ).
3. Press VOL (up) or VOL (down) to scroll through your messages
The number of Voice Mail messages are shown first on the list followed by message
waiting set by other extensions.
4. Press CLEAR to return to the time and date display.
¾ 411 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Single Line Telephone>
Voice Mail Message Waiting Indication
When the Voice Mail systems sets message waiting for the single line telephone the Signal
Line Telephone dial tone changes to indicate there is a message waiting.
<Key Telephone>
Accessing the Voice Mail system
1. Press your Message key
OR
Dial the Voice Mail system pilot number
This establishes a call to the Voice Mail system.
<Single Line Telephone>
Accessing the Voice Mail system
1. Dial the Voice Mail system pilot number
This establishes a call to the Voice Mail system.
<Key Telephone>
Calling an extension and leaving a message in their mail box
1. Dial the extension number
2. The extension is Busy or Ring No Answer
3. Press the Message key.
Pressing the Message key will take you directly into their mail box.
4. Leave your message
5. Go on hook
¾ 412 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone>
Transferring a call to someone else’s mail box
Method 1 : You do not know they are unavailable until you call them ;1. Place the caller on hold, by pressing the Hold key
2. Dial the required extension number
3. If there is ring no answer or they are busy press your Message key.
4. Wait for the voice mail system to answer then press the transfer key (TRFR).
Method 2 : You know they are unavailable before you call them ;1. Place the caller on hold, by pressing the Hold key
2. Press your Message key
3. Dial the required extension number
4. Press the transfer key (TRFR)
<Key Telephone>
Conversation Recording (External calls only)
1. Answer incoming call by going off hook
2. To start Conversation Recording press the Conversation Recording key.
The Conversation Recording key flashes red and the key telephone display indicates
recording has started.
3. To end conversation record;Press the Conversation Recording key.
The Conversation Recording key goes idle (stops flashing red) and the recording
message on the display ends.
OR
End the conversation by going on hook.
¾ 413 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Appendix
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION PROTOCOL
Function
Code
Voice Mail System Plan
Reason for Connection to
VM System
1.)Remote Log On
(Internal)
***1XXX
Connect user to prompting routine for
unknown user
2.)Direct Log-On
#XXX
Connect user to voice mail box for
extension XXX. Request password if
required.
3.) Transfer
Message
***2TTTYYY
or *YYY
Record a message to be placed in voice mail
box of extension YYY.
4.) Record
Message for Called
Extension
***2XXXYYY
Record a message to be placed in voice mail
box of extension YYY. Store source
extension number XXX for automatic reply
feature.
Internal call to voice mail system
from extension XXX dialling master
extension number of voice mail
system. User has not indicated intent
to enter a voice mail box and must
be queried as to which voice mail
box he wishes to enter.
External call with user keying
#XXX, or internal call to voice mail
system from extension XXX by
dialling a pre-programmed voice
mail key, hereafter called
MESSAGE key. User desires to
enter voice mail box for extension
XXX.
User is transferring a trunk call to
voice mail system to leave a message
for voice mail box of extension
YYY. May be activated in DX2E by
key sequence: Transfer; Message;
YYY.
User has placed a call from
extension XXX to extension YYY,
which is busy or does not answer,
and wishes to leave a message in the
mail box of extension YYY.
5.) Forward - All
Calls
***3UUUZZZ
6.) Forward - Busy
***4UUUZZZ
7.) Forward - RNA
***5UUUZZZ
8.) Message Status
Lamp Update
Off Hook
Receive Dial
Tone #XXXNN,
Receive Dial
Tone
#XXXNN, ...
***6TTT
Play Personal Greeting and/or record a
message to be placed in the voice mail box
of extension ZZZ. Store source
extension/trunk UUU for automatic reply
feature.
Play Personal Greeting and/or record a
message to be placed in the voice mail box
of extension ZZZ. Store source
extension/trunk UUU for automatic reply
feature.
Play Personal Greeting and/or record a
message to be placed in the voice mail box
of extension ZZZ. Store source
extension/trunk UUU for automatic reply
feature.
Transmit message lamp status for each
voice mail box. Updates may be sent
individually or concatenated with pauses
and dial tone detection between status
updates
9.) Remote LogOn
10.) DX2E Reset
***7
Play welcome greeting and connect user to
prompting routine for unknown user.
Update message status lamps
¾ 414 ¾
Extension or trunk UUU called
extension ZZZ and was forwarded
by the DX2E to the voice mail box
of extension ZZZ.
Extension or trunk UUU called
extension ZZZ, which is busy, and
was forwarded by the DX2E to the
voice mail box of extension ZZZ.
Extension or trunk UUU called
extension ZZZ, which does not
answer, and was forwarded by the
DX2E to the voice mail box of
extension ZZZ.
Voice Mail System is updating
message status lamps. NN=00 means
no messages and turns off NN=00
turns lamp on. Display sets may be
equipped to display NN when
messages are left.
External (trunk) call to voice mail
system from trunk TTT. User has not
indicated intent to enter voice mail
box and must be queried as to which
voice mail box he wishes to enter.
The DX2E requests a complete
update of message status lamps
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION PROTOCOL (Cont’d)
Function
Code
Voice Mail System Plan
Reason for Connection to
VM System
11.) Conversation
Record
***8NNN
Record a message to be placed in voice mail
box of extension NNN. Warning tones
should be played every 15 seconds
12.) Disconnect
9999
Terminate
Extension NNN wishes an
established conversation to be
recorded and deposited in voice mail
box extension NNN. The DX2E
establishes a conference and
connects the correct audio path to the
voice mail port. This feature may be
accessed by a pre-programmed
function key on the DX2E.
1. DX2E has completed a screen
transfer from a voice mail system to
internal extension.
2. Calling party disconnect during
attempted screened transfer by voice
mail
3. Calling party disconnect.
Notes:
XXX = Source Extension
NNN = Extension number requesting service
YYY = Destination Extension NN = Message Count (00-32)
UUU = Called extension or trunk
ZZZ = Called Extension
TTT = Trunk Number
¾ 415 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
Hold and Transfer
Hold:- Timed Break Recall
Screened Transfer:- Recall, dial 1 XXX, either wait for answer or go on hook (forced
transfer).
Unscreened Transfer:- Recall, dial XXX, either wait for answer or go on hook (forced
Transfer). If the called extension answers, the held call is
automatically transferred by the DX2E.
Retrieve from hold:- Recall, pause, * 7 :- Please note *7 is not always required
For clarification of the hold transfer operation please refer to the attached sheets.
XXX= Called ext number
¾ 416 ¾
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
Incoming Trunk Answered and Unscreened Transferred to Ext 200
Call
Action
Result
Hold and retrieve
1.Incoming call on TRK1
answered by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT presses Recall
4. SLT presses * 7
Hold, enquiry call to
RNA/Busy, retrieve call
1. Incoming call on TRK1
answered by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 200
4. Ext 200 is Ring No Answer/Busy
5. SLT presses Recall
6. SLT presses * 7
Hold, forced transfer to ext
200 which is RNA/Busy
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 200
4. Ext 200 is Ring No Answer/Busy
5. SLT goes on hook
6. Transfer recall timer expires
(default 30 secs)
7. SLT answers recalled call
Hold, enquiry call to ext 200
and extension 200 answers
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 200
4. Ext 200 Answers
5. SLT goes on hook
¾ 417 ¾
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3. MOH to TRK1 stops
SLT hears normal dial tone
4. SLT connected to TRK1
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3/4. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
or Ext 200 Busy
SLT hears Busy tone
5. MOH to TRK1 stops
SLT hears normal dial tone
6. SLT connected to TRK1
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3/4. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
or Ext 200 Busy
SLT hears Busy tone
5. TRK1 transferred to Ext 200
6. Call recalls at SLT after timer if RNA or
immediately if Busy
7. SLT answers and hears either
***4001200 (Busy) or
***5001200 (RNA)
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
4. TRK1 connected to Ext 200
automatically.
SLT hears Busy tone
5. SLT goes on hook
PC Based Voice Mail Connection (NVM-Series) (Cont’d)
Appendix (Cont’d)
Incoming Trunk Answered and Screened Transferred to Ext 200
Call
Action
Result
Hold and retrieve
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT presses Recall
4. SLT presses * 7
Hold, enquiry call to
RNA/Busy, retrieve call
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 1200
4. Ext 200 is RNA/Busy
5. SLT presses Recall
6. SLT presses * 7
Hold, forced transfer to ext
200 which is RNA/Busy
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 1200
4. Ext 200 is Ring No Answer/Busy
SLT goes on hook
Transfer recall timer expires
(default 30 secs)
7. SLT answers recalled call
Hold, enquiry call to ext 200,
but ext 200 does not want to
take held call and ext 200
does not hang up
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 1200
4. Ext 200 Answers
5. SLT presses Recall
6. SLT presses * 7
Hold, enquiry call to ext 200,
ext 200 wants to take held
call
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 1200
4. Ext 200 Answers
5. SLT hangs up
Hold, enquiry call to ext 200,
ext 200 does not want to take
the held call and hangs up
1.Incoming call on TRK1 answered
by SLT
2. SLT presses Recall
3. SLT dials 1200
4. Ext 200 Answers
5. Ext 200 hangs up
6. SLT presses Recall
7. SLT presses * 7
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
MOH to TRK1 stops
SLT hears normal dial tone
SLT connected to TRK1
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3/4. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone or Busy tone
5. MOH to TRK1 stops
SLT hears normal dial tone
6. SLT connected to TRK1
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3/4. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone or Ext.200 Busy
SLT hears Busy tone
5. TRK1 transferred to Ext.200
6. Call recalls at SLT after timer if RNA or
immediately if Busy
SLT answers and hears either
***4001200 (Busy) or ***5001200
(RNA)
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
4. SLT connected to Ext 200
5. SLT connected to TRK1
Ext 200 goes on hold
6. TRK1 hears * 7
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
4. SLT connected to Ext 200
5. TRK1 connected to Ext 200
1. ***6001 sent to SLT
2. MOH to TRK 1 starts
SLT hears fast dial tone
3. Ext 200 rings
SLT hears ring tone
4. SLT connected to Ext 200
5. SLT hears 9999
6. MOH to TRK1 stops
SLT hears normal dial tone
7. SLT connected to TRK1
¾ 418 ¾
PC Programming (Remote Maintenance)
Description
“PC Programming” software package shall be offered from Nitsuko. By this software, your
PC can access to the dX-Z96 system locally or remotely for system programming purpose.
For “local” PC Programming application, your PC shall be connected to DCI-A unit
installed in the keyphone. For “remote” PC Programming application, ISDN line is
preferred to use for direct connection.
For either case, LAPBU-S1 should be installed in the system.
For the details, refer to “dX-Z 96/328 Remote Maintenance Terminal Handling Manual”
¾ 419 ¾
Preamble Message (VAU)
Description
Preamble Message assists operator to answer the Trunk line incoming. When operator
answers the Trunk line, VAU automatically answers the incoming Trunk line with
Preamble Message, and then VAU transfers the answered Trunk line to operator.
For example,
- Incoming Trunk line comes.
- Operator answers the Trunk line. (by pressing the C/O key.)
- Trunk line caller hears the Preamble Message from VAU.
"This is NITSUKO Japan. May I help you?"
- Operator starts to talk to Trunk line caller.
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Options
DX2E-VAU-A
Related Features
None
¾ 420 ¾
Preamble Message (VAU)
Programming
Start
In 0401 Item 31
enter 0.
No
Does VAU send VAU fixed
message (English)?
Does the all VAU message
Clear ?
Yes
Yes
In 0401 Item 31
enter 0.
In 2201 enter 2, all
VAU message clear.
h fl h d
i
No
Does the system allow the
Preamble Message for an
adequate duration ?
No
In 2201 Item 1, change
the message length.
Yes
When the operator
answers to caller, does the
system allow the Preamble
Message for caller ?
Yes
In 2207, assign the
VAU message number
at the each night
No
Do you change the Service
Code for Operation for VAU
message?
No
Stop
¾ 421 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Preamble Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 31: VAU fixed message
Set the use (0) or not use (1) VAU fixed message for VAU features.
When you set to not use (1), you can not use Preamble Message feature. .
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B, Item 6: Operation for VAU message (VAU)
Assign a service code for operation for VAU message.
> 2201 - VAU Reset
Erase the Preamble Message and VAU message.
> 2202 - Message Length Assignment for VAU
Assign the maximum message length for VAU message and Personal message.
> 2207 - Preamble Message
Each extension line, assign the VAU Message number is used by Preamble Message.
Related Features
None
Operation
To Answer with Preamble Message to Trunk Line
<Key Telephone> <Single Line Telephone>
To answer with Preamble Message to Trunk Line
1. Incoming Trunk line comes.
2. Answer the incoming Trunk line.
3. Trunk line caller hears the Preamble Message from VAU.
(after Preamble Message is over)
4. Starts to talk to Trunk line caller.
¾ 422 ¾
Preamble Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Preamble Message Control
<Key Telephone>
To operate the VAU message (Preamble Message):
Note: Message Number (refer to 4-a, 4-b and 4-c) should be assigned under CMD 2207.
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 716(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. Dial message number (01-16).
5-a. Press SPK to hang up (finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-b.
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Dial message number (01-16).
Listen the recorded VAU message.
Press SPK to hang up.
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-c.
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
Dial 7.
Dial message number (01-16).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording VAU message.
Press SPK to hang up.
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
¾ 423 ¾
Preamble Message (VAU) (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone>
To operate the VAU message (Preamble Message):
Note: Message Number (refer to 4-a, 4-b and 4-c) should be assigned under CMD 2207.
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 716(
).
3-a. Dial 3 (erase).
4-a. Dial message number (01-16).
5-a. On hook (finish).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-b.
4-b.
5-b.
6-b.
Dial 5 (listen).
Dial message number (01-16).
Listen the recorded VAU message.
On hook.
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 7 (re-record: go to 4-c).
3-c.
4-c.
5-c.
6-c.
7-c.
Dial 7.
Dial message number (01-16).
Hear "Please start recording <beep>".
Recording VAU message.
On hook.
OR
Dial 3 (erase: go to 4-a).
OR
Dial 5 (listen: go to 4-b).
¾ 424 ¾
Preview Dial
Description
Preview Dial lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it
out. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions
This feature only available for key telephone with display.
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.
Default Setting
An extension's Class of Service allows Preview Dial.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 50: Preset dial
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Preview Dial.
> 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
To use Preview Dial to place a call:
1. Do not lift the handset and do not press a CL key.
2. Dial number you want to call.
The number displays.
3. To dial out the displayed Trunk Line number, press a line key.
If the previewed number as a Trunk Line access code (e.g.,9), you can press CL
instead.
OR
To dial out the displayed Intercom number, press a CL key.
OR
To cancel the number without dialing it out, Press HOLD.
¾ 425 ¾
Preview Dial (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 50, enter 0
to disable Dial Number
Preview.
No
Should extension have
Preview Dial
capability?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
¾ 426 ¾
Yes
In 0406 Item 50, enter 1
to enable Dial Number
Preview.
Prime Line Selection
Description
Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific
Trunk Line by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to first press keys or dial
codes. This simplifies handing calls on a frequently used Trunk Line.
Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:
l
Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a
telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer
just lifts the handset and the Prime Lines is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line
Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference -- see Programming
below.)
l
Incoming Prime Line Preference
When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming
Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must
quickly answer customer's service calls and then dispatch repay technicians. The
dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in, the dispatcher
just lifts the handset get their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize
an idle line appearance -- see Programming below.)
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone (without DX2E-0T TEL).
Default Setting
- Trunk Line calls have incoming priority over Intercom calls.
- Ringing Line Preference set for ringing Trunk Line calls.
- All Trunk Lines in group 1 - route 1.
- Trunk Lines only ring extension 200 (port 001).
- Extensions Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset.
- Users get Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset.
- No Prime Lines programmed.
Options
None
¾ 427 ¾
Prime Line Selection (Cont’d)
Programming
Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Outgoing Prime Line
Selection is a customized
application of Trunk
Line Group Routing.
Start
Is Prime Line trunk
part of current
"dial 9" group?
Program Trunk Line Group
Routing:
No
- Assign Trunk lines
to groups in 0905.
Yes
- Assign Trunk lines
groups to routes in 0906.
- Assign routes to
extensions in 0907.
This gives the system
a maximum of 16
outgoing Prime Lines.
In Program 0911, assign each
Prime Line Trunk line to
a different access map.
In Program 0912,
assign each extension
with a Prime Line to a
different access map.
No
Will Prime Line
Trunk line be shared
by more than one
extension?
Yes
In Program 0912,
assign more than one
extension to the same
access map.
In Program 0912, deny
outbound access to all
trunks expect the Prime
Line Trunk line.
In Program 1008
Item 3, enter 1.
Stop
¾ 428 ¾
If users phone is idle, they set
dial tone on the programmed
Prime Line Trunk line
when they lift the handset.
Prime Line Selection (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Incoming Prime Line Preference
Start
In Program 0910, assign
each Prime Line Trunk
line to a different ring
group.
In Program 0909, assign more
than one extension to the
same Prime Line ring group.
Yes
Should extensions
share Prime line?
This gives the system a maximum
of 16 incoming Prime Lines.
No
In Program 0909, assign each
extension with an incoming
Prime Line to a different
Prime Line ring group.
Check other Program 0909 ring
groups. If extension rings for other
ring group calls, user can't identify
Prime Line calls.
In Program 0401 Item
13, enter 1.
In Program 0401 Item
8, enter 1.
Yes
Prime
Line
When Prime Line rings,
should lifting the handset
answer the call?
With both Intercom and
Prime Line ringing, should
lifting the handset answer
Intercom or Prime Line?
Stop
¾ 429 ¾
No
In Program 0401 Item
13, enter 0.
Intercom
In Program 0401 Item
8, enter 0.
Prime Line Selection (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 8: Priority for Incoming Call
Set incoming Prime Line preference. Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to
answer ringing Intercom call.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A,
Item 13: Auto Answer to Incoming Call from Trunk Line
Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to seize idle line
appearance.
> 0905 - Trunk Line Groups
Assign Prime Line to Trunk Line group for outgoing Prime Line selection. (Also see
0906 and 0907 below.)
> 0906 - Trunk Line Group Routing (Dial 9)
Set up outbound route for Trunk Line group that contains the Prime Line. (Also see
0905 and 0907.)
> 0907 - Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension
Assign extension(s) to a Prime Line route (1-36) for outgoing Prime Line access.
> 0909 - Trunk Line Group Assignment
Assign extension(s) to a ring group (1-16) that consists of a Prime Line.
> 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
Assign a Prime Line to a ring group (1-16).
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
For outgoing Prime Line selection, assign each Prime Line Trunk Line to a different
access map (1-16).
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Set assignment so extension(s) can have access to Prime Line. Deny outbound access to
extensions that should not have Prime Line.
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Auto Trunk Line Seize
Enter 1 for this option so extension user seizes Prime Line when they lift the handset.
¾ 430 ¾
Prime Line Selection (Cont'd)
Related Features
Direct Inward Lines/Direct Inward System Access
DILs and DISA calls also ring extensions directly, even if not allowed in ring group
programming.
Line Preference
Prime Line Selection directly interacts with Line Preference.
Operation
To place a call on your Prime Line:
1. Lift handset.
You hear dial tone on your Prime Line.
To answer a call on your Prime Line:
1. Lift handset.
Depending on your Line Preference programming, you'll either answer the Prime
Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance.
¾ 431 ¾
Privacy Release (Meet Me Conference)
Description
Privacy Release lets extension user's in the same work area join in a Trunk Line
Conference. To initiate a Privacy Release, an extension user just presses the Meet Me
Conference key and tells their co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy
on the Trunk Line, and other users can just press the Trunk Line's line key to join the call.
Privacy Release does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The
person initiating the Privacy Release just announces it "through the air".
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- The system allows 8 four-party Conferences.
- An extension's Class of Service allows initiating a Voice Call Conference.
- Meet Me Conference key not assigned.
- Privacy Release join permission time is 90 sec.
Options
None
¾ 432 ¾
Privacy Release (Meet Me Conference) (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0302 Item 2, enter 1.
In 0406 Item 17, enter
0 to prevent initiating
Conference.
8-party
No
Should the system allow
eight 4-party
conferences or four 8party conferences?
Should an extension be
allowed to initiate a
Voice Call Conference?
4-party
Yes
In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
In 0406 Item 17, enter
0 to allow initiating
Conference.
In 0405 Item 9, enter
the interval after which
the system cancels
Privacy Release.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, assign a function key
as a Meet-me Conference key
(code 1017).
Stop
¾ 433 ¾
Privacy Release (Meet Me Conference) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference mode
Set the Conference mode. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eightparty conferences per option card.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 9: Privacy Release timer
Set the join permission time of the Privacy Release.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 17: Privacy Release
In an extension's Class of Service, enables (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
initiate a Privacy Release.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function keys
Assign a function key for Privacy Release (code 1017).
Related Features
Conference
Set up multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office.
Operation
To set up a Privacy Release with a co-worker in your immediate work area:
1. Place or answer Trunk Line call.
2. Press Meet Me Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1017).
3. Announce Conference.
Just tell your co-worker about the call. Do not use telephone system features to
announce it.
To join a Meet Me Conference (if invited).
1. After Conference request, press indicated line key.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:
1. Press HOLD.
¾ 434 ¾
Private Line
Description
A Private Line is a Trunk Line reserved for an extension for placing and answering calls.
A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally,
the user has their own Trunk Line for placing calls that is not available to others in the
system.
l Incoming only
The extension has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place calls on the
Private Line.
l Outgoing only
The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for
incoming calls.
l Both ways
The extension has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- No Private Lines programmed.
- All extensions assigned to ring group 1.
- Extension port 001 has option 1; all other extensions have option 0.
- All Trunk Lines assigned to ring group 1.
- All Trunk Lines in access map 1 have option 7 (full access).
- All Trunk Lines in the other access maps have option 0 (no access).
- All extensions use Access Map 1.
Options
None
¾ 435 ¾
Private Line (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In Program 1006, make
sure extension's Private
Line is assigned to a key.
In Program 0910, assign
Private Line to an unused
"Private Line" ring group (i.e.,
just for the Private Line).
In Program 0912, assign
extension to an unused
"Private Line" access map.
Remove the key assignment
for other extensions.
This allows for up to
52 different Private Lines
In Program 0909, assign
extension (with option 1)
to Private Line's ring
group (see step 4).
In Program 0911, assign
Private Line to the
"Private Line" access map
(see step 3). Use option 5
(incoming and Hold access).
In Program 0909, assign
extension (with option 1)
to Private Line's ring
group (see step 4).
In Program 0911, assign
Private Line to the
Private Line access map
(see step 3). Use option 7
(incoming, outgoing and
Hold access).
In Program 0909, assign
extension (with option 1)
to Private Line's ring
group.
In Program 0911, assign
Private Line to a unique
access map (i.e., one
member). Use option 4
(outgoing and Hold access).
Yes
No
Yes
Is Private Line
Both Ways?
No
Yes
Stop
Is all other access maps, give access 3
(Hold) to Private line. Do not assign
any extensions to Private Line ring group.
¾ 436 ¾
Is Private Line
for Incoming Only?
Is Private Line
for Outgoing Only?
No
Private Line (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
> 0909 - Trunk Line Group for Assignment
Assign extension to Private Line's ring group. Use option 1 for Incoming or Both Ways
Private Lines. Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not assign any other
extensions to the Private Line ring group.
> 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
Assign Private Line to an unused "Private Line" ring group (1-16) (i.e., a ring group just
for the Private Line).
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
Assign Private Line to the Private Line access map (1-16) (see Program 0912 below).
Use option 5 for Incoming, option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all
other access maps, give option 3 to the Private Line.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign extension that should have Private Line to an unused "Private Line" access map.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Make sure extension has a line key for the Private Line.
¾ 437 ¾
Private Line (Cont'd)
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding.
Line Preference
An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line.
Prime Line Selection
A Private Line can also be a Prime Line.
Toll Restriction
Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction.
Transfer
An extension user can Transfer their Private Line. Since other users have hold access
(see Programming), the destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it
or Hold.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place a call on your Private Line:
1. Press Private Line key.
2. Dial number.
OR
1. Press idle CL key and dial 805(
).
2. Dial private line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
To answer a call on your Private line:
1. Press Private Line key.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call on your Private Line:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial 805(
).
3. Dial private line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
To answer a call on your Private line:
1. Off hook.
¾ 438 ¾
Programmable Function Key
Description
Each keyset has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable Function Key simplify
placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of
a keyset's programmable keys from your administration telephone, or the extension user
can do it themselves.
Depending on your telephone, you either have 16, 24 or 32 Programmable Function Keys.
(0-Line keysets don't have function keys.)
Refer to Table 1-4 for Programmable Function Key functions.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone (without DX2E-0T TEL).
Default Setting
- All Programmable Function Key are line keys.
- Service Code for programmable function key programming is dial 851.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options,
Item 69: Programmable function key programming
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
program their own function keys.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 36: Programmable function key programming
Assign a service code for programmable function key programming.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign the functions of a keyset's Programmable Function Key.
> 1011 - Function Key Initialization
Initialize an extension's Programmable Function Key. This makes all keys (key 1 = line,
key 2 = etc.). You may want to do this if you have to reassign an extension's keys.
¾ 439 ¾
Programmable Function Key (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 69,
enter 0.
Extension users dial
Service 851 to program
their function keys.
No
Should extension be
able to program their
own function keys?
Yes
In 0406 Item 69,
enter 1.
Yes
In 1011, automatically
reset an extension's
function keys to line keys.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, you can optionally
customize an extension's
function keys from the
system program.
Do you want to
initialize an extension's
function keys?
No
Do you change the Service
Code for Programmable
Function Key Programming?
No
Stop
¾ 440 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Programmable Function Key (Cont'd)
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing/One-Touch Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing and One-Touch Dialing also offer quick access to calls and
features.
Operation
To change the function of a programmable key:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 851(
).
Press the key you want to program.
Enter the 4-digit key function.
Available functions are 1000-1074 (refer to chart) and line keys 0001-0052.
To check the function of a programmable key:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press the programmable key.
The programmed function displays.
¾ 441 ¾
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Description
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on Trunk Line calls.
Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user change their extension's dialing mode while placing a
call. For systems in a Dial Pulse area, this permits users to access automatic banking from
their DP area. The user can, for example:
- Place a call to a DP Trunk Line.
- Depending on programming:
- Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion
OR
- Wait 10 seconds (PGM 0405 Item 30).
- Dial the access code for automatic banking. The system dials the digits after the
conversion as DTMF.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse Trunk Lines (Program 0901 Item 1,
options 0 or 1).
Default Setting
- All Trunk Line allow manual DP to DTMF Conversion.
- An extension's Class of Service allows Pulse to Tone Conversion.
- The Pulse to Tone Conversion time (inter digit time) is 10 second.
Options
None
Programming
> 0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options
For each Trunk Line, set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required: automatic (0),
automatic and manual (1), or manual (2).
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 30: Trunk line, inter digits timer
Set the inter digits timer (0-64800 seconds).
Related Features
None
¾ 442 ¾
Pulse to Tone Conversion (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0104, enter 2
for manual.
Manual
At an extension, should
DP to DTMF conversion be
automatic, manual or both?
Automatic
In 0104, enter 0
for automatic.
Both
In 0104, enter 1
for both.
In 0405 Item 30, set
how long automatic
conversion wait time.
Stop
Operation
To convent your phone's dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line:
1. Place call over pulse line.
2. Dial # to switch the DP Trunk Line to DTMF dialing.
¾ 443 ¾
Room Monitor
Description
This feature enables you to monitor the room status through your phone. Between
keyphone and keyphone, the monitored room status shall be picked up by the integrated
microphone, and the status shall be heard from integrated speaker of the monitoring
keyphone. Between SLT and SLT, go off hook the handset of monitored phone and call it
from the other phone by dialing the Service code, then the status of certain area where
monitored phone is placed can be heard at the monitoring phone. This service is available
until the handset of monitored telephone is set to on-hook.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and Single Line Telephone.
However, the feature is not available in the combination of key telephone and SLT.
Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow for conversation between the
monitoring and monitored extensions.
Between keyphone and keyphone, a user can only monitor one station at a time. However
many stations can monitor the same extension at the same time.
Between SLT and SLT, a SLT can monitor more than two SLTs call by call. But one SLT
cannot be monitored by more than two SLTs.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit initiating Room Monitor.
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit it to be monitored.
- No Room Monitor keys assigned.
- An extension’s Class of Service does not permit SLT Room Monitor.
- Service code for “SLT Room Monitor” is 770.
Options
None
¾ 444 ¾
Room Monitor (Cont’d)
Programming
<Room monitor for Key Telephone>
Start
In 0406 Item 54,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be able
to initiate KTS Room Monitor?
Yes
In 0406 Item 54,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 55,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension have
ability to be monitored by
another extensions?
Yes
In 0406 Item 55,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, assign a Room
Monitor key (code 1025)
to both the monitoring
and monitored extension.
Stop
<Room monitor for Single Line Telephone>
Start
In 0406 Item 60,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be
able to initiate and receive
SLT Room Monitor?
Yes
In 0406 Item 60,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Should service code be
changed from initial ?
(Code 770)
Stop
¾ 445 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering.
Room Monitor (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 54: Room Monitoring
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
initiate Room Monitor.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 55: Room Monitored
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to be
monitored.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 60 : SLT Room Monitor
In extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for “SLT Room Monitor”.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 56 : SLT Room Monitor
Assign the Service Code for “SLT Room Monitor”.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function keys as a Room monitor key (code 1025) for both the extension being
monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor.
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys.
Operation
You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the
extension you want to monitor. You can only listen to one extension at a time.
<Key Telephone>
To activate Room Monitor by KTS (at the initiating extension):
1. Do not lift handset and do not press SPK.
2. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1025).
3. Dial number of extension you want to monitor.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
(Room Monitor key shows slow flashing.)
You can place and answer to other calls while Room Monitoring is activated.
¾ 446 ¾
Room Monitor (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To activate Room Monitor by KTS (at the extension to be monitored):
1. Do not lift handset and do not press SPK.
2. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1025).
3. Dial your own extension number.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
(Room Monitor key shows fast flashing.)
You can place and answer to other calls while Room Monitored is activated.
To cancel Room Monitor by KTS (at either extension):
1. Press Room monitor key.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
<Single Line Telephone>
In the following case, SLT(B) goes to monitor to SLT(A).
At Monitored SLT(A)
1. Go off hook
2. Dial 770 (
)
3. Dial 1
4. Dial the monitoring extension number <SLT(B)>
*Check confirmation tone
5. Set the transmitter of the handset toward the room
At monitoring SLT(B)
1. Go off hook
2. Dial 770 (
)
3. Dial 2
4. Dial the monitored extension number <SLT(A)>
*Check confirmation tone
5. You can monitor the room status from SLT(A)
6. Go on-hook to end the monitor
To cancel the monitored status at SLT(A)
1. Go on hook
¾ 447 ¾
Saved Last Number Dialing
Description
Saved Last Number Dialing permits a keyset user to save their last outside number and
easily redial it later on. For example, a key set user can recall a busy or unanswered number
without manually dialing the digits.
The system retains the saved number until the user stories a new one in its place.
Saved Last Number Dialing saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits. The
number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits
regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally
uses the same Trunk Line group as for the initial call, However, the extension user can
preselect a specific Trunk Line if desired.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service permits Save number Dialed.
- No Save keys defined.
- Service Code for Saved Last Number Dialing is dial 815.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 49: Saved Last Number Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Saved Last Number Dialing.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 25: Saved Last Number Dialing
Assign a service code for Saved Last Number Dialing.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Save key (code 1014).
¾ 448 ¾
Saved Last Number Dialing (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 49,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Saved Last Number
Dialing?
Yes
In 0406 Item 49,
enter 1.
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
An extension cannot save
numbers without a Saved
Number Redial function key.
In 1006, assign a function
key for Saved Number
Redial (code 1014).
Stop
Related Features
Last Number Dialing
An extension user can quickly redial the last number placed.
Programmable Function Key
Function keys simplify Saved Last Number Dialing
Automatic Repeat Dialing
The system can automatically retry a Trunk Line call that was unanswered or busy.
¾ 449 ¾
Saved Last Number Dialing (Cont'd)
Operation
To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 24 digits):
Use this feature before hanging up.
1. Press Saved Last Number Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
To redial a saved number:
1. Press line key.
This selects a specific Trunk Line for the call.
2. Press Saved Last Number Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
The stored number dials out.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 815(
).
OR
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
Saved Last Number Dialing automatically selects a Trunk Line from the same group
as your original call.
The stored number dials out.
To check to see the number you have saved:
1. Press Saved Last Number Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
The stored number displays for six seconds.
The stored number dials out is you:
- Lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CL key, or
- Press SPK
2. Press CLEAR.
To clear your saved number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 885(
).
3. Press SPK to hang up.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
¾ 450 ¾
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Description
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have
Secretary Call, both co-workers must have Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses
their buzzer key, the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and
flashing the called extension's buzzer key. The called user can respond by placing an
intercom call to the calling party. The called extension's buzzer key continues to flash until
the user cancels the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a
message through to the boss in an important meeting. After being alerted, the boss could
call the secretary when it's most convenient.
An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only by
the available number of programmable keys.
Conditions
(A) Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users.
(B) Secretary Call does not set up an intercom call.
(C) When assigning Secretary Call from their own extension, a user enters the associated
extension numbers. When assigning Secretary Call from system programming, use
the associated extension port number.
Default Setting
- No Secretary Call (Buzzer) keys defined.
Options
None
¾ 451 ¾
Secretary Call (Buzzer) (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 67,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Secretary Call?
Yes
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to extensions.
In 1006, assign a function key as
a Secretary, Call key (code 1031 +
extension port number).
Stop
¾ 452 ¾
In 0406 Item 67,
enter 1.
Secretary Call (Buzzer) (Cont'd)
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 67: Buzzer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Buzzer.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign Class of Service (1-10) to extensions.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer (code 1031 plus the destination extension
number). If co-workers want Secretary Call, both must have buzzer keys for each other.
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Operation
To buzz your secretary or boss:
1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press buzzer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1031 + ext).
Your boss or secretary hears a splash tone.
Your buzzer key lights steadily.
Your boss's or secretary's buzzer key flashes fast.
To check to see who left you a Secretary Call:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not lift handset.
Press CHECK.
Press flashing Secretary Call key.
Press CLEAR.
To answer your Secretary Call indication:
1. Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you.
To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension:
1. Press your lit Secretary Call key.
To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension:
1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press flashing Secretary Call key.
¾ 453 ¾
Secretary Call Pickup
Description
Secretary Call Pickup lets an extension user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to
themselves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a coworker's phone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified
type of Follow Me for employees that work closely together. This feature could be helpful
to customer service representatives leaves their desk, an associate could press the Secretary
Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls.
An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions, limited
only by the available number of programmable keys.
Conditions
Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users.
Default Setting
No Secretary Call Pickup keys defined.
Options
None
Programming
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup (code 1032). Unlike Secretary Call, you
do not have to program a corresponding key at the source and destination extensions.
Related Features
Follow Me
An extension user can also have with Follow Me reroute a co-worker's calls to
themselves.
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Co-workers can alert each other without disturbing their work.
¾ 454 ¾
Secretary Call Pickup (Cont'd)
Operation
To activate Secretary Call Pickup:
1. Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + ext).
You hear a splash tone and your Secretary Call Pickup key lights. Calls intended for
covered extension ring your phone instead.
To cancel Secretary Call Pickup:
1. Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + ext).
To check a key's Secretary Call Pickup assignment:
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press your Secretary Call Coverage key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + ext).
3. Press CLEAR.
¾ 455 ¾
Selectable Ring Tone
Description
An extension user can change the way calls ring their phone. Selectable Ring Tone allows
an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a crowded
work area where several phones are close together. Because their phone has a characteristic
ring, the user always can tell when it's their phone ringing.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
- An extension's Class of Service allows using Selectable Ring Tone.
- An extension's Class of Service prevents checking Selectable Ring Tone.
- Service Code for Trunk line incoming ring tone switching is dial 820.
- Service Code for Check of ring tone is dial 811.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 59: Ringing tone selection
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
change the incoming ring tones.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 86: Checking incoming ring tone
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
check the Selectable Ring Tone.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 59: Trunk Line incoming ring tone switching
Assign a service code for Trunk line incoming ring tone switching.
> 0511 - Service Code setup, Part A Item 80: Check of ring tone
Assign a service code for check of ring tone.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 456 ¾
Selectable Ring Tone (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 59,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to change the incoming
ring tones?
Yes
In 0406 Item 59,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 86,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to check (listen to) the
incoming ring tones?
Yes
In 0406 Item 86,
enter 1.
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Trunk Line Incoming
ring tone switching and
Check of Ring Tone?
No
Stop
¾ 457 ¾
Selectable Ring Tone (Cont'd)
Related Features
None
Operation
To change your extension's incoming ring tones:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 820(
).
Dial 1 to set Intercom ring; 2 to set Trunk Line ring.
Dial code for the desired ring pattern.
1 High pitch
2 Medium pitch
3 Low pitch
5. Press SPK to hang up.
To listen to the incoming ring choices:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 811(
).
3. Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring; 2 to listen to Trunk Line ring.
For Trunk Line ring, enter the tone you want to listen to followed by the System.
4. Dial code for the desired ring pattern.
1:High pitch
2:Medium pitch
3:Low pitch
5. Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 458 ¾
Series Call
Description
Series Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring
extension. Series Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer
Service Representative (CSR) has a client of certain costs when Tech Service is done.
Rather than transferring the call back and forth, the CSR can use Series Call to Technical
Service and announce, "I have John on the phone. I need to talk to him again. Just hang up
when you're done and he'll ring back to me."
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
No series Call keys defined.
Options
None
Programming
> 0402 - System Options, Part B, Item 2: Transfer key operation mode
Enter 1 for this option to assign the TRFR key as a Series Call key.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a programmable key as a Series Call key (code 1035).
Related Features
Transfer
An extension user can extend (send) a call to a co-worker.
¾ 459 ¾
Series Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Refer to the Transfer and Flash
features for additional information.
In 0402 Item 2, enter 0
(for Transfer) or 2
(for Flash).
Do not enter 1.
No
Start
Should extension be able
to use the TRFR key as a
Series Call key?
Yes
Should extension have a
function key assigned as a
Series Call key?
Yes
In 0402 Item 2, enter
1 to make the
extension TRFR keys
Series Call keys.
If the TRFR key is for Series Call,
extensions don't need a Series Call
function key.
In 1006, do not assign
a function key as a
Series Call key
(code 1035).
No
In 1006, assign a
function key as a
Series Call key
(code 1035).
Stop
Operation
To place a Series Call to a co-worker:
1. Place or answer Trunk Line call.
2. Press HOLD.
3. Dial co-worker's extension number.
Co-worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement.
4. Press Series Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1035) but do not hang up.
When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer
back to your extension.
¾ 460 ¾
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system's Trunk Line
calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data
collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and Trunk
Line. This makes change-back and traffic management easier.
SMDR provides the following options:
l Abandoned Call Reporting
The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e.,
abandoned). SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that
rang longer than the specified duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep
track of lost business.
l Blocked Call Reporting
When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have the blocked call information print on
the SMDR report. If you prefer, you can have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With
Blocked Call Reporting, you can better customize Toll Restriction for the site's
application.
l
Customized Date Format
The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats:
American, European or Japanese. Set the format for your preference.
l Data Call Tracking
Data Call Tracking can log the system's internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs
external (Trunk Line) data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of
data terminal activity.
l
Digit Counting
With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls.
For example, if the digit count is nine, SMDR won't include toll calls within the home
area code. Digit Counting permits SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to
monitor.
l
Digit Masking
Digit Masking lets you "X" out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report. A
digit mask of seven, for example, masks out all Trunk codes (NNXs) and local
addresses. Digit Masking makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns, without
having to interpret each individual number. You can also use Digit Masking to block out
access and security codes.
¾ 461 ¾
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
l
Duration Monitoring
SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval
you specify. If you want to keep trunk of all Trunk Line activity, use a short duration.
To keep trunk of only significant usage, use a longer duration.
l
Incoming Call Exclusion
You can selectively exclude all incoming call from the SMDR report.
l
PBX Call Reporting
If you system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or
just calls placed over PBX Trunk Lines. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls
(including calls to PBX extensions) or just calls that include the PBX Trunk Line access
code.
l
Usage Summaries
SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each
summary includes the total number of regular Trunk Line calls and ISDN Trunk Line
calls, and the costs for each type.
The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday
night at midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.
l
ALB Output Control
The system provides additional option on SMDR whether ALB (All Line Busy)
information is output or not.
l
Conversion Table Name Output Control
In case that the system receives MSN / DDI call on ISDN , the “Conversion Table
Name” (Command 1806) can be output to the “LINE” area on SMDR.
l
Date Information Output Control
The system provides additional option on SMDR whether Date information (Day /
Month) is output or not.
Conditions
(A) The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls.
(B) SMDR requires the installation of a DCI (Data Communications Interface). Once you
designate a DCI for SMDR, you cannot use that extension for placing and answering
other data calls.
(C) The SMDR call buffer stores 300 calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR
device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, each new call in causes an old call to be
replaced.
¾ 462 ¾
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Description (Cont'd)
Default Setting
- No DCI circuit types programmed.
- System and Alarm Reports use DCI port 1.
- System date is American format.
- No SMDR digits masked.
- SMDR includes all outgoing calls-regardless of number of digits dialed.
- SMDR printer port is not assigned.
- Outgoing calls of any duration print.
- All "No Answer" calls print.
- SMDR report includes all calls blocked by Toll Restriction.
- If system is behind a PBX, all calls to PBX print an SMDR report.
- Internal data calls print on SMDR report.
- All report summaries enabled.
- No DCI extension numbers defined.
- All Trunk lines print out on SMDR report.
- Internal RS-232-C parameters for SMDR DCI are 2400 baud, no stop bits, 8 data bits and
no parity.
- All DCI ports set for RS-232-C.
- All DCI ports not initialized.
- Incoming call report not out put.
- Extension status printouts by extension name.
- The system outputs “ALB” information to printer / PC.
- The system does not output the “Conversion Table Name” information to printer / PC.
- The system does not output “Date” information to printer / PC.
Options
DX2E-DCI-A/B or DX2E-3DCI-A
Printout Format
1. Conversation table name output
01
CLASS TIME
LINE
IVIN 10:10
John
DURATION
STATION
DIALED No./CLI
EXT200
RD/COST
ACCOUNT
44556677
2. Date Information output
CLASS TIME DATE
01
POT
10:10 10 / 12
LINE
DURATION
STATION
DIALED No./CLI
001
00:01:10
EXT200
044813710X
¾ 463 ¾
RD/COST ACCOUNT
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
Is DCI installed,
programmed and
functional?
Yes
No
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on
the next
page.
In Program 1201, Type 1,
Item 1, register 65, set DCI
communications parameters
to match the SMDR device.
In Program 1202,
set port type to 2
(Centronics parallel).
Parallel
Is SMDR device serial
or Parallel interface?
In Program 1206,
initialize the DCI
port used for SMDR.
Will SMDR printer
also be used for
system reports?
Serial
In Program 1202,
set port type to 1
(RS-232).
In Program 0503, assign an
unused extension number
(e.g.,500) to the DCI port.
Yes
In Program 0007, enter the
SMDR DCI port number as the
system report port number.
Yes
In Program 0008, enter the
SMDR DCI port number as the
system report port number.
No
Will SMDR printer
also be used for
alarm reports?
No
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on
the next
page.
¾ 464 ¾
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In Program
0130, enter 0.
American
Do you want American,
European
European or Japanese
data format in the
SMDR header?
In Program
0130, enter 2.
Japanese
In Program
0130, enter 1.
In Program 0901 Item 13
for each trunk, enter 0 to
include trunk on SMDR; 1 to
exclude trunk from SMDR.
In Program 1008 Item 1
for each extension, enter
1 to include extension on
SMDR; 0 to exclude
extension from SMDR.
Selected
Selected
Should SMDR record
include information for
all trunks or just
selected trunks?
Should SMDR record
include information for
all extensions or just
selected extensions?
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on
the next
page.
¾ 465 ¾
All
In Program 0901 Item
13 for all trunks,
enter 0.
All
In Program 1008 Item
1 for all extensions,
enter 1.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In Program 0404 Item
3, assign the SMDR
DCI port.
In Program 0404 Item 4,
enter minimum duration
of call that will print
on the SMDR report
(1-65535 seconds).
In Program 0404 Item 5,
enter how long an
unanswered call must
ring (1-65535 seconds)
before SMDR logs it as
"NO ANSWER".
No
No
Should calls of any
duration print on
the SMDR report?
Should all unanswered
(i.e., "NO ANSWER")
calls print on the
SMDR report?
To check a keyset's DCI port
number, press CHECK - then DND.
Yes
In Program 0404 Item
4, enter 0.
Yes
In Program 0404 Item
5, enter 0.
Yes
In Program 0404 Item
2, enter 0.
To have only long distance
calls print, for example,
enter 8.
In Program 0404 Item 2,
enter the minimum number
of digits a user must
dial (1-24) before system
will include call on
SMDR report.
No
Should all outgoing
calls print on the
SMDR report, regardless
of the number of
digits dialed?
For example, you can use this
feature to block the printing
of security codes.
In Program 0404 Item 1,
enter the number of
digits you want
to block. If you enter
8, for example, SMDR Xs
out the last 8 digits dialed.
Yes
Do you want to back
(i.e., "X" out) any of
the digits on the
SMDR report.
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on
the next
Page.
¾ 466 ¾
No
In Program 0404 Item
1, enter 0.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In Program 0404
Item 6 Print:
Item 1, enter 0.
No
Do you want the
SMDR report to
include calls blocked
by Toll Restriction?
In Program 0404
Item 6 Print:
Item 1, enter 1.
Yes
Access Code
All Calls
Calls
If your system is behind
a PBX, do you want SMDR
In Program 0404
to include all calls to
Item 6 Print:
PBX or just calls using
Item 2, enter 0.
PBX trunk access code?
In Program 0404
Item 6 Print:
Item 3, enter 0.
No
In Program 0404 Item 6:
enter 0 to enable the
following reports:
Print Item 4 - Daily Summary
Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary
Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
Print Item 8 - Incoming call
Print Item 10 - ALB output
Disable
Print Item 12 - DDI table name
Output
Print Item 14 - Date data output
Do you want the SMDR
report to include
internal data calls?
No Do you want to print Yes
the SMDR report
summaries?
Stop
¾ 467 ¾
Yes
In Program 0404
Item 6 Print:
Item 2, enter 1.
In Program 0404
Item 6 Print:
Item 3, enter 1.
In Program 0404 Item 6:
enter 1 to enable the
following reports:
Print Item 4 - Daily Summary
Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary
Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
Print Item 8 - Incoming call
Print Item 10 - ALB output
Disable
Print Item 12 - DDI table name
Output
Print Item 14 - Date data output
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0008 - System Alarm Report Setup
If the SMDR printer will also be used for alarm reports, enter the SMDR DCI port
number as the alarm report port number.
> 0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
Set the date format for SMDR (0 = American, l = Japanese or 2 = European).
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item l: Omit (Mask) digits
Enter the number of digits (1-24) you want SMDR to black (i.e., "X" out). Enter 0 not to
block any digits.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 2: Min. digits
Enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial (1-24) before the system includes a
call on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to include all outgoing calls, regardless of the number
of digits dialed.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 3: Printer output port (DCI port No.)
Enter the port number of the DCI assigned to the SMDR printer.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 4: Min. call duration
Enter the minimum duration of a call (1-65535) that will print on the SMDR report.
Enter 0 to have calls of any duration print.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 5: Min. ringing time
Enter the how long an unanswered call must ring (1-65535) before SMDR lags it as "No
Answer". Enter 0 to allow all "No Answer" calls to print.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 1
(Toll restriction call)
Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction. Enter
0 to exclude blocked calls.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 2
(PBX call)
If system is behind a PBX, enter 1 to have SMDR include all calls to the PBX. Enter 0
to have SMDR include only calls dialed using PBX Trunk Line access code.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 3
(Extension data call)
Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include internal data calls.
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to exclude internal data calls.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 4-6
(Summary (daily) (weekly) (monthly))
Enter 1 to enable a summary report. Enter 0 to disable a summary report.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 8
Enter 1 to enable an incoming call report. Enter 0 to disable an incoming call report.
¾ 468 ¾
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 9
Enter 0 to printout the extension status by extension name. Enter 1 to printout the
extension status by extension number.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 10
Assign “output(0)” or “Not output(1)” for ALB information.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 12
Assign “output(1)” or “Not output(0)” for “Conversion table name” information in case
of MSN/DDI call.
> 0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Printer output options 14
Assign “output(1)” or “Not output(0)” for “Date” information.
> 0503 - DCI Extension Number
Assign an unused extension number (e.g., 500) to the DCI port assigned to SMDR.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 13: SMDR print-out
For each Trunk Line, enter 0 if Trunk Line's calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter
0 if extension's calls should not appear on SMDR report.
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 1: SMDR printout
For each Extension, enter 1 if extension's calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 0
if extension's calls should not appear on SMDR report.
> 1201 - DCI Internal Pattern Setup, Type 1, Item 1, S-register 65
Set the DCI communications parameters to match the SMDR device.
> 1202 - DCI Port Type
Set this option to 1 if the SMDR device is serial. Set this option to 2 if the SMDR device
is Centronics parallel.
> 1206 - Initialize DCI
Initialize the DCI port selected for SMDR.
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
To use the PBX Call Reporting option, program system for behind PBX operation.
Transfer
The extension that initially answers or places a call "owns" the SMDR record for the
call. For example, if extension 218 transfers a Trunk Line call to extension 220 does not
show on the SMDR record as part of the transferred call.
Operation
Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.
¾ 469 ¾
Text Message
Description
An extension user can select a preprogrammed Text Message for their extension. Display
keyset callers see the selected message when they call the user's extension. Text Massage
provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message
"GONE FOR THE DAY".
Any display keyset user calling the extension would see the message.
Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call through normally. See Default
Setting below for a list of the standard messages.
Each System has 20 Text Messages.
An extension user can add digits for date, time or phone number after messages l-8 and 10.
For example, an extension user could select the message "ON VACATION UNTIL" and
then enter the date. Callers see the original message followed by the appended date. They
would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
Default Setting
- The default messages are:
No.
Message
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11-20
Appended with...
IN MEETING UNTIL
OUT UNTIL
OUT-PLEASE CALL
PLEASE CALL ME ON
BUSY CALL AFTER
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK AT
BUSINESS TRIP UNTIL
BUSINESS TRIP CALL
GONE FOR THE DAY
ON VACATION UNTIL
MESSAGE 11-20
Time (when meeting done)
Time (when returning)
9 digits (phone number)
9 digits (phone number)
9 digits
Time (when returning)
Date (when returning)
9 digits (where returning)
Date (when returning)
- An extension's Class of Service allows using Text Message.
- No Text Message keys programmed.
- Service Code of Text Message is dial 836.
- Service code of Common Canceling Service Code is dial 720.
¾ 470 ¾
Text Message (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
Do you want to change
the default display
messages?
Yes
In 0403, change
the default Text
Messages.
Yes
In 0406 Item 75,
enter 1.
No
In 0406 Item 75,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension
be able to use choose a
Text Message?
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
a function key for
Text Message
(code 1027).
No
Should extension
have one-button access
to Text message?
Do you change the
Service Code for Text
Message and Common
Canceling code?
No
Stop
¾ 471 ¾
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key for
Text Message
(code 1027).
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Text Message (Cont'd)
Options
None
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0103 - Time and Date Display Mode
Enter 1-4, 12-hour mode display on Text Message. Enter 5-8, 24-hour mode display on
Text Message.
> 0403 - Text Messages
Program the Text Messages (1-20).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 75: Text Message
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Text Messaging.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 6: Text Message
Assign a service code for text message.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B
Item 10: Common canceling service code
Assign a service code for common canceling service code.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Text Messaging (code 1027).
Related Features
Programmable Function Key
Function Keys simplify Text Message operation.
Operation
To select a message:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 836(
).
OR
Press Text Messaging key (PCM 1006 or SC 851: 1027 + 00-20).
3. Dial the message number (1-20).
You may be able to append a message with digits (phone number - shown as
########), the time of day (24-hour) or the date. The time displays in 12-hour
format.
To scroll through the messages, press VOL s or VOL t .
4. Press SPK to hang up.
A co-worker calling your extension sees the message you selected.
¾ 472 ¾
Text Message (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
To cancel Selectable Display Messaging:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 836(
).
OR
Press Text Messaging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1027 + 00).
3. Press SPK to hang up.
OR
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 720(
). (Common Canceling Service Code)
3. Press SPK to hang up.
When you cancel of alarm clock by dial 720, these features are cancelled at same
time, DND, Call Forward, Repeat Dial, Message Waiting, Head-set Mode and Text
Message.
¾ 473 ¾
Time and Date
Description
The system uses Time and Date for:
Central Office Calls (Access Maps)
Class of Service (Class)
Direct Inward Lines
Display Telephones
FAX Machine Compatibility
Night Service (Automatic)
Programmable Trunk Line Parameters
Ring Groups
Station Message Detail Recording
System Reports
System Reports
Toll Restriction (Class)
Trunk Line Group Routing
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone with display.
The system returns the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset.
Default Setting
- In a new system, Time and Date is initially 00:00:00 00/00/00.
- The default Time and Date display mode is: Month-Day of Month Day of Week Hours:
Minutes AM/PM (i.e., 3-10 TUE 3: 15 PM).
- User Time and Date password is 0000.
- An extension's Class of Service allows it to set the Time and Date.
- Service Code for time and date setting is dial 828.
Options
None
Programming
> 0003 - Time and Date
Set the system Time and Date from your administrator's telephone.
> 0103 - Time and Date Display Made
Select the display mode (type l-8) for Time and Date (i.e., Time and Date format).
> 0202 - Setting the User Passwords
Set the password used for setting the Time and Date (i.e., with Service Code 828).
¾ 474 ¾
Time and Date (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 71,
enter 0
No
Should extension user be
able to set the Time and
Date (Service Code 828)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 71,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0202 Item 1, change
the Time and Date and
MOH password.
Yes
In 0003, change the
system Time and Date.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
The default passwords
is 0000.
Do you want to change
the default password
users dial when changing
the Time and Date?
No
If the system prevents all
extensions from dialing
Service Code 828, this is
the only way to change the
Time and Date.
Do you want to set the
system Time and Date from
system programming?
No
You have 8 different
formats from which to
choose.
Do you want to change
the way Time and Date
display on telephone
displays?
Yes
In 0103, select the
new Time and Date
format (1-8).
No
Do you change the
Service Code for Time
And Date Setting?
No
Stop
¾ 475 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Time and Date (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 71: Time and Date setting
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to set
the Time and Date.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 39: Time and date setting
Assign a service code for time and date setting.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
To set the system Time and Date:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 828(
).
Dial the password (normally 0000).
Dial two digits for the year (e.g., 92).
Dial two digits for the month (01-12).
Dial two digits for the day (01-31).
Dial the day of the week (0-6, 0 = Sunday, 6 = Saturday).
Dial two digits for the hour (24-hour clock).
Dial two digits for the minutes (00-60).
Press SPK to hang up.
¾ 476 ¾
Toll Restriction
Description
Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to
place only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system
applies Toll Restriction according to an extension's Toll Restriction Class. There are 8 Toll
Restriction Classes.
Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities:
l
Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll
Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the
Common Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict
Code and Common Restrict Code Tables. Each code is 4 digits max, using 0-9, #, *, and
FLSH (as a wild card).
l
Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directly assistance (411), for
example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Tables.
l
Restrict Code Table
When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use
the Restrict Code Table. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict
Code Tables, the system restricts that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls
entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system has four tables, with 60 enters
(restricted codes) in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, *
and FLSH (as wild card).
l
Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only
selected (permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most
calls. To allow all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit
Code Table.
1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Toll Restriction
Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter
only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) The
system has four tables, with 60 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code
is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLSH (as a wild card).
¾ 477 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
l
International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may
dial. You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit
table to allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International
Call Restrict Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow
Table. The system can have one Inter national Call Restrict table and one International
Call Allow table, with up to 10 digits in each table entry. Valid entries are 0-9, #, * and
FLSH (for a wild card).
l
Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing
You can have abbreviated Dialing bypass or follow Toll Restriction. If you allow many
users to program Abbreviated Dialing, you'll probably want to Toll Restrict the numbers
they dial. If only administrators can program Abbreviated Dialing, Toll Restriction may
not be necessary. You can separately restrict Group and Common Abbreviated Dialing.
l
Local Call Digit Counting
Use Local Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You
can use this option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example,
set the Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to 7 to limit local callers to dialing
the Trunk code (NNX) and local address (nnnn) only. You can make four entries for this
option. The range is 4-8 digits.
l
Toll Call Digit Counting
With Toll Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers
can dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up
services. You can make four entries. The range is 4-30 digits.
l
Toll Free Trunk Lines
Certain Trunk Lines can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president's
Private Line. Users can place calls a Toll Free Trunk Lines anytime -- to anywhere,
without inadvertently being toll restricted.
¾ 478 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
l
PBX Call Restriction
Toll Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter
PBX access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you
have Trunk Lines programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility
feature for the specifics.
l
Transfer Restriction of Non-completed dialing Trunk
Transfer Restriction of Non-completed dialing Trunk lets you enable/disable the noncompleted dialing trunks an outside caller may transfer. Example, a disabled extension
of Transfer of Restriction Completed Trunk have dial "00" restriction. When this
extension transfer without dialing or transfer after dial "0", user heard congestion tone
(user cannot transfer). When this extension transfer after dial "01", trunk is transferred to
another extension.
Conditions
(A) If a Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table,
the system does not restrict the call.
(B)
Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from talking advantage of long distance
automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service.
Default Setting
- No Toll Restriction programmed.
- Toll Restriction enforced on all Trunk Lines.
Options
None
¾ 479 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
For each toll restricted
trunk, in Program 0901
Item 19 enter 0.
Review the PBX
Compatibility feature
before programming
Toll Restriction.
No
Yes
Is trunk
toll free?
For each toll free trunk,
in Program 0901
Item 19 enter 1.
Yes
Is your system
installed behind a
PBX?
No
In Program 0702 Item 7,
enter data into the
Common Permit Codes
Table. There is one
table.
Yes
Do you want to
allow all users to dial
certain calls?
No
In Program 0701 Item 5,
enable (1) the Common
Permit Code Table.
In Program 0701 Item 5,
disable (0) the Common
Permit Code Table.
If you enable just the
Common Permit Codes
Table but don't make
any entries, you can't
place any trunk calls.
Do you want to
prevent all users
from dialing certain
calls?
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 8,
enter data into the
Common Restrict
Codes Table. There is
one table.
No
In Program 0701 Item 6,
disable (0) the Common
Restrict Codes Table.
Go to the
flowchart on
the following
page.
¾ 480 ¾
In Program 0701 Item 6,
enable (1) the Common
Restrict Codes Table.
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
Allow
In Program 0702 Item 6,
program the Restrict Codes
tables. The system has four
tables, with 60 entries in each
table.
Restrict
For a Toll Restriction
Class, do you want to
allow most calls or
restrict most calls?
In Program 0702 Item 5,
program the Permit Codes
tables. The system has four
tables, with 60 entries in each
table.
In Program 0701 Item 11,
enable the Restrict Code
Table (1-4) you want to use.
In Program 0701 Item 11,
enable the Permit Code
Table (1-4) you want to use.
In Program 0701 Item 12,
disable (0) the Permit
Code Table.
In Program 0701 Item 12,
disable (0) the Restrict
Code Table.
In Program 0701 Item 13,
enable (1) the Transfer of
restriction completed trunk.
In Program 0701 Item 13,
disable (0) the Transfer of
restriction completed trunk.
Go to the
flow chart
on the
following
page.
¾ 481 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
For a Toll Restriction
Class, do you want to
allow most International
calls or restrict most
International calls?
In Program 0702 Item 1,
program me International
Call Restrict Table. The system
has one table, with ten
entries in each table.
Allow
In Program 0702 Item 2,
program the International
Call Permit Table. The
system has one table, with
ten entries in each table.
Restrict
In Program 0702 Item 1,
enable (1) the International
Call Restrict Table.
In Program 0702 Item 2,
enable (1) the International
Call Permit Table.
In Program 0701 Item 2,
disable (0) the International
Call Permit Table.
In Program 0701 Item 1,
disable (0) the International
Call Restrict Table.
In Program 0701
Item 7, enter 0.
No
In Program 0701
Item 8, enter 0.
No
Do you want to Toll
Restrict Common
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
Do you want to Toll
Restrict Group
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
Go to the
flowchart on
the following
page.
¾ 482 ¾
Yes
In Program 0701
Item 7, enter 1.
Yes
In Program 0701
Item 8, enter 1.
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
In Program 0701
Item 3, enter 0.
No
Do you want to restrict
the number of digits
local callers can dial?
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 3,
program the maximum
number of local call digits
dialed table. The system
has one table, with four
entries in each table.
In Program 0701 Item 3,
select a table entry from
Program 0702 Item 3.
In Program 0701
Item 3, enter 0.
No
Do you want to
restrict the number of
digits long distance
callers can dial?
Long distance calls are calls where
the NPA or NNX is in either the Common
Table (Program 0702 Item 7) or the
Permit Code Table (Program 0702 Item 5).
Stop
¾ 483 ¾
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 3,
program the maximum
number of toll call digits
dialed table. The system
has one table, with four
entries in each table.
In Program 0701 Item 4,
select a table entry from
Program 0702 Item 4.
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 1: International call restriction table
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Restrict
Table (Program 0702 - Item 1).
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 2: International call permit code table
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Permit
Table (Program 0702 - Item 2).
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 3: Dial number length limit for local call
Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the dialing limit for local Calls.
When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 3.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 4: Maximum dial number length limit
Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the dialing limit for non-local
Calls. When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 4.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 5: Common permit code table
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Permit Code
Table (Program 0702 - Item 7).
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 6: Common restriction table
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable the Common Restriction Table
(Program 0702 - Item 8).
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 7: Restriction for common abbreviated dials
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Common
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 8: Restriction for group Abbreviated dials
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (O) Toll Restriction for Group
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 9: Intercom call restriction
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Intercom Call Restriction.
¾ 484 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 10: Restriction of calls within PBX
Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) PBX Call Restriction. Refer
to the PBX Compatibility Feature.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 11: Permit code table
Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Permit Code table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 5.
> 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 12: Restriction table
Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Restriction table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 6.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 1: International call restriction table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 2: International call permit code table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Dial number length limit for local call
Set the maximum number of digits local callers can dial.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 4: Maximum dial number length limit
Set the maximum number of digits long distance callers can dial.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 5: Permit code table
Program codes into the Permit Code Tables.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 6: Restriction table
Program codes into the Restriction Tables.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 7: Common permit code table
Program codes into the Common Permit Code Tables.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 8: Common restriction table
Program codes into the Common Restriction Tables.
> 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 9: Trunk Line access code of PBX (Note 1)
The system can have up to 10 PBX access codes, Refer to the PBX Compatibility
feature for the specifics.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 19: Restrict
For each Trunk Line, enter 0 to enable Toll Restriction; enter to disable Toll Restriction.
¾ 485 ¾
Toll Restriction (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1004 - Toll Restriction Class for Extension
Assign a Toll Restriction Class for each extension and each Night Service mode.
Related Features
Toll Restriction Override
A user with the proper password can temporarily override an extension's Toll
Restriction.
Operation
To place a Trunk Line call if your system is Toll Restricted:
1. Place call normally
If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be
Cutoff.
¾ 486 ¾
Toll Restriction Override
Description
Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension's Toll Restriction.
This helps a user that must place an important call while at a co-worker's phone. Toll
Restriction Override lets the user:
1. Go to a Co-worker's phone.
2. Implement Toll Restriction Override.
3. Place a Trunk Line call the extension normally restricts.
<Note> Station based password must be programmed per a station.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Toll Restriction Override password is not setting.
- The Toll Restriction Override Time is 10 seconds.
- Service Code for Toll Restriction Override is dial 875.
Options
None
Programming
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 38: Toll restriction override time
Set the Toll Restriction Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction for this
interval.
> 1025 - Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Set the different password for each extension, user must dial for Toll Restriction
override.
Related Features
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override temporarily overrides an extension's Toll Restriction.
¾ 487 ¾
Toll Restriction Override (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
Do you want to change
the default password
users must dial when
implementing Toll
Restriction Override?
Yes
In 0202 Item 3,
change the Toll
Restriction Override
password.
No
After the system
implements Toll Restriction
Override, do users have
adequate time to dial
their number?
Yes
Stop
¾ 488 ¾
No
In 0405 Item 38,
change the Toll
Restriction Override
Time.
Toll Restriction Override (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To temporarily override a restricted extension's Toll Restriction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 875(
).
Dial password (default = 0000).
Press idle line key.
Dial number without restriction.
<Single Line Telephone>
To temporarily override a restricted extension's Toll Restriction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Off hook.
Dial 875(
).
Dial password (default = 0000).
Dial 9 (Trunk Line Routing Code).
Dial number without restriction.
¾ 489 ¾
Transfer
Description
Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active Intercom or outside call
to any other extension in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a
call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at
the destination extension. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their
transfers.
For the retrieve operation, the extension user can retrieve the last transferred line by
pressing the Trunk Line Key.
The system allows the following types of transfers:
l
l
l
l
Screened Transfer - The transferring user announces the call to the destination before
hanging up.
Unscreened Transfer - The transferring party extends the call without an
announcement.
Extension (Department) Groups Transfer - The transferring party sends the call to a
Department instead of an extension.
Transfer Without Holding - A user presses a busy line key and waits for the call to
complete. The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs
up.
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
The retrieve feature is available only for Key Telephone.
Default Setting
- The Transfer Recall Time is 10 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service enables Unscreened Transfer.
- An extension's Class of Service disables Transfer Without Holding.
- An extension's Class of Service enables the Transfer pre-answer display.
- An extension's Class of Service enables Live Transfer.
- The retrieve feature is not assigned.
Options
None
¾ 490 ¾
Transfer (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 11,
enter 0.
Should extension be
allowed to place and
Unscreened Transfer?
Yes
In 0406 Item 11,
enter 1.
No
Should extension be
allowed to use Transfer
Without Holding?
Yes
In 0406 Item 34,
enter 1.
No
Should extension have
Automatic On-Hook
Transfer?
Yes
In 0406 Item 76,
enter 1.
Should extension be
able to see the incoming
pre-answer display?
Yes
In 0406 Item 42,
enter 1.
Should extension be
able to see the Transfer
Callback display?
Yes
In 0406 Item 95,
enter 1.
No
If disabled, extension user cannot press
a busy line key and wait for the internal
caller to hang up.
In 0406 Item 34,
enter 0.
If disabled, extension user must
additionally press TRFR to
Transfer a call.
In 0406 Item 76,
enter 0.
The pre-answer display shows
"TRANSFER<<" the incoming trunk and
the transferring extension.
In 0406 Item 42,
enter 0.
No
The Transfer Callback display shows
"TRF RECALL" and the number of the
extension that didn't pick up.
In 0406 Item 95,
enter 0.
No
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 491 ¾
Transfer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0401 Item 21,
enter 0.
In 0401 Item 19,
enter 0.
Should an extension
No retrieve the last Transferred Yes
line by pressing the
incoming line key ?
In 0401 Item 21,
enter 1.
Should extensions be
allowed to Transfer calls
to busy extensions?
In 0401 Item 19,
enter 1.
No
If an extension's
Transfer is not picked
up, does it recall in
an adequate time?
Yes
No
In 0405 Item 5,
change the Transfer
Recall time.
Yes
In 0401 Item 18,
enter 0.
Hook-switch For single line telephones, Hook-switch
+894
should hook-switch or
hook-switch + 894 answer
to Call Waiting call?
Stop
¾ 492 ¾
In 0401 Item 18,
enter 1.
Transfer (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 18: Call waiting answer method
For a busy single line telephones, set the mode used to answer an override (call waiting)
call:
0 = Press and release hook-switch to pick up waiting call
1 = Press and release hook-switch and dial Service Code 894 to answer waiting call
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 19: Transfer to busy extension
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls
transferred to busy extensions recall immediately.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 21: Retrieve the transferred line (Line key)
Assign enable (1) or disable (0) to retrieve the last transferred Trunk line by pressing the
incoming Trunk Line Key.
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 5: Ring inward recall timer
Set the Transfer Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). An unanswered transferred call recalls
to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 11: Ring inward transfer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to use
Unanswered Transfer.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 34: Transfer without holding
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to use
Transfer Without Holding.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 42: Transfer information display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's incoming
Transfer pre-answer display.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 76: Automatic on hook transfer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to use
Automatic On Hook Transfer. If enabled, user must Press HOLD, dial the extension
number and then TRFR to transfer the call.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 493 ¾
Transfer (Cont'd)
Related Features
One-Touch Dialing
When transferring, an extension user can press a One-Touch key instead of dialing the
extension number.
Series Call
Series Call is method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring
extension.
Operation
>
Transferring Trunk Line Calls
To Transfer a Trunk Line call to a co-worker's extension:
1. Press HOLD.
You hear transfer dial tone.
2. Dial co-worker's extension number.
If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy, pressing
TRFR returns you to the call.
If the extension doesn't answer, you can dial another extension number or press CL
to return to the call.
3. Announce call and hang up.
If you don't have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press TRFR to Transfer the
call.
If your co-worker doesn't want to screen the call, hang up without making an
announcement.
To answer a call transferred to your extension:
1. Lift the handset when a co-worker announces the call.
>
Transferring to Extension Groups
To Transfer your Trunk Line call to an Extension Group:
1. Press HOLD.
2. Press Internal Group Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1006).
OR
Dial 801(
) and the Extension Group number (1-8)
3. Announce call.
4. Hang up when Extension Group user answers your announcement.
The answering party connects to the Trunk Line call when you hang up.
¾ 494 ¾
Transfer (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
>
Transferring Trunk Line Calls (Cont'd)
To pick up a call transferred to an Extension Group Pickup key (PGM 1006 or
SC851: 1010):
The phone you use must be in the group paged.
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Press Extension Group Pickup key (PCM 1006 or SC 851: 1010).
OR
Dial 863(
).
3. Respond to the announcement.
You connect to the Trunk Line when the announcing party hangs up.
Transferring Without Holding
1. Lift handset.
2. Press busy line key.
3. When original caller hangs up, you are connected.
To retrieve the transferred Trunk Line
1. Press idle CL key or lift handset.
2. Press the last transferred Trunk line key (green flashing).
>
Transferring intercom Calls
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial extension to receive your call.
3. Announce your call and hang up.
If the called party lifts the handset to answer your announcement, they automatically
connect to the Transferred call when you hang up.
If the called party answers Handsfree, the transferred Intercom call rings their phone
when you hang up.
If the called party doesn't want the call, press you illuminated CL key to retrieve it.
¾ 495 ¾
Trunk Incoming Call
Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming Trunk Line calls to meet the exact site
requirements. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system
extensions.
The Ring groups assigned to each extension can access for incoming calls.
Ring Groups determine how Trunk Lines ring extensions. Generally, Trunk Line ring
extension's only if Ring Group programming allows. For example, to make a Trunk Line
ring an extension:
l Assign the Trunk Line and the extension to the same Ring Group
l In the extension's Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the Trunk Line.
The system allows up to 16 Ring Groups, and any number of extensions and Trunk Lines
can be in a specific group. Extensions and Trunk Lines can be in only one Ring Group at a
time.
If an extension has a line key for the Trunk Line, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the
extension doesn't have a line key, the Trunk Line rings the line appearance key. If an
extension has a key for a Trunk Line that is not in its ring group, the Trunk Line follows
Access Map programming.
Incoming Trunk Access
An extension user can answer an incoming call on a specific Ring line group. The ring line
groups assigned to each extension can access for incoming calls and audible assignments
(Day/Night/Midnight/Rest) for the extensions.
Ringing/Recall Trunk Off-Hook Access
Ringing/Recall Trunk Off-Hook Access allows a ringing incoming call or recalling line to
be answered by just lifting the handset.
Trunk Off-Hook Signaling
Trunk Off-Hook Signaling allows an extension user with an audible indication of an
incoming Trunk call while already on a call ; the busy extension user hears muted ringing if
on a handset call or one short burst tones if on a Handsfree call.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
¾ 496 ¾
Trunk Incoming Call (Cont’d)
Default Setting
- Pre-ringing for outside calls enabled.
- Ring No Answer Alarm interval is 60 seconds.
- All trunks have normal ringing.
- All extensions and trunk are in Ring Group 1. Extension 200 rings for trunk calls - all
other extension's only flash.
- All extension use Access Map 1. In Access Map 1, all trunks have incoming access,
outgoing access and access when on Hold.
- All function keys are line keys (key 1 = trunk 1, etc.).
- Auto answer to incoming trunk line call is enabled.
Options
None
Programming
> 0306 - Pre-ringing Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) pre-ringing for outside calls.
> 0401 - System Options, Part A
Item 13: Auto answer to incoming Trunk line call
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 7: Incoming ring no answer alarm
Set the Ring no Answer Alarm interval (0-64800 seconds). If a trunk rings a keyset
longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 2: Incoming Type
For each Trunk Line, enable delayed ringing (0) or immediate ringing (1).
> 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
To have Trunk Line ring extensions, assign extensions to ring groups (1-16). For each
extension in the Ring Group, indicate if Trunk Line should ring or not ring.
> 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
To have the Trunk Line ring extensions, assign Trunk Line to Ring Group.
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map setup
Set up the Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16). This sets the access options for Trunk Line.
None that Ring Group programming overrides Access Map programming.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-16) to extensions.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
To simplify answering, assign Trunk Line to function keys.
¾ 497 ¾
Trunk Incoming Call (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont'd)
See also:
- Direct Inward Dialing
- The Lines
Start
Is trunk other than CO
loop start DTMF?
Yes
Refer to program 0901 to
match the system to the
connected Trunk line.
No
In 0910, assign Trunk lines
to Ring Groups. Trunks that ring
extensions the same way should
be in the same Ring Group.
A trunk can be in only one Ring
group for each Night Service mode.
If trunk is programmed
to ring extension,
incoming access (set
in 0911/0912) is not
required.
In 0911, set up the Trunk line
Access Maps. A trunk can be in
more than one map. Each map
sets incoming/outgoing options.
In 0909, assign
extension to Trunk
line's Ring Group and
enter 0 (no ringing).
Should non-ringing
extension be able to
answer call on the
Trunk line?
Not
Ring
No
Should extension ring for
incoming calls on trunk?
In 0912, assign extension
to Access Map that prevents
user from answering
Trunk line.
Yes
In 0912, assign
extension to Access
Map that allows user
to answer the
Trunk line.
In 0903, assign names to
Trunk lines to make
incoming call identification
easier.
The flowchart on the following page
is for ringing extensions only.
Continued
on following
page.
¾ 498 ¾
Ring
In 0909, assign
extension to Trunk
line's Ring Group and
enter 1 (ringing).
Trunk Incoming Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
When line
key flashes
Wait for
ring cycle
In 0306, enter 0 to
disable pre-ringing
for trunk calls.
For ringing extensions, should
extension ring when line key
starts flashing or wait for
the system ring cycle?
The system changes the
ring cadence for ringing
calls after this interval.
In 0405 Item 7, set the Ring
No Answer Alarm Time interval.
Does ring cycle start and
stop irregularly?
In 0306, enter 1 to
disable pre-ringing
for trunk calls.
Yes
No
Check 0901 Item 2
(Delayed Ringing) and
review settings of 0114
Items 15, 16 and 17.
In 0401, item 13,
enter 0.
No
Do you want to off-Hook
access to each Ringing
Trunk line?
Yes
In 0401, item 13,
enter 1
In 1006, do not
assign function keys
as line keys.
No
Do you want one-button
incoming access to each
Trunk line?
Yes
In 1006, program function
keys as line keys
(codes 0001 - 0052).
In 1006, do not program
function keys as loop keys
(code 1012 + trunk group).
No
Do you want line
group (loop) keys for
Trunk Line Group?
Stop
Yes
In 1006, program function
keys as line keys (code
1012 + Trunk line group).
Non-ringing line group access (loop)
keys require access programming.
Ringing line group access (loop) keys
require Ring Group programming.
¾ 499 ¾
Trunk Incoming Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont’d)
> Note:
For incoming calls, Ring Group programming (0909/0910) overrides Access Map
programming (0911/0912)
Use the charts below to program the following example:
For this extension...*
200
Line 1 rings
Line 2 flashes
Line 3 flashes
201
Line 1 flashes
Line 2 rings
Line 3 flashes
202
Line 1 flashes
Line 2 flashes
Line 3 rings
*: Trunk line ring the same in the day as at night.
Program 0910 - Trunk Line Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group*>
1
2
3
Line 1
X
—
—
Line 2
—
X
—
Line 3
—
—
X
X = Trunk Line assigned to indicated Ring Group
* = Make the same 0910 entry for all Night modes.
Program 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group*>
1
2
3
EXT. 200
1
0*
0*
EXT. 201
0*
1
0*
EXT. 202
0*
0*
0*
1 = Extension rings
0 = Extension doesn't ring
* = To allow extension user to answer flashing line, be sure to give extension incoming
access to the Trunk line program 0911 and 0912.
¾ 500 ¾
Trunk Incoming Call (Cont'd)
Related Features
Direct Inward Line
Direct inward Lines ring an extension directly, without Ring Group or Access Map
programming.
Programmable Function Key
Line keys and Trunk Line Group keys simplify answering outside calls.
Night Service
Ring Group programming can be different for each Night Service mode.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To answer an incoming Trunk Line Call:
1. Lift handset.
2. Press flashing line key.
If you don't have a line for a Trunk Line call ringing your phone, it rings an idle CL
key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you have Auto Answer to incoming call from Trunk line, you automatically answer
to ringing Trunk line without press flashing line key.
<Single Line Telephone>
To answer an incoming Trunk Line Call:
1. Lift handset.
(Automatic answer to ringing Trunk line.)
¾ 501 ¾
Trunk Line Group
Description
Trunk Line Group let you optimize Trunk Line usage for incoming and outgoing calls.
With Trunk Line Group, users can have loop (rotary) keys for Trunk Line calls. Incoming
Trunk Line group calls ring these loop keys. For outgoing calls, the user presses a loop key
to access the first available Trunk Line within the group. You set the access order in Trunk
Line group programming. The system allows 16 Trunk Line Group.
Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys, since the user doesn't need
a separate line key for each Trunk Line. The user only needs one loop key for each Trunk
Line group.
Like Trunk Line Group Routing, Trunk Line Group help you to minimize the expense of
toll calls.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
- Trunk Line group keys set for incoming and outgoing access.
- All Trunk Lines assigned to Trunk Line group 1.
- All Trunk Lines and extensions use access map 1.
- No Trunk Line group access key assigned.
- Service Code for Line Group Access is dial 804.
Options
None
¾ 502 ¾
Trunk Line Group (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
Stop
No
Should extension users
have one-button access to
Trunk Line Group (loop
key) of specified Trunk
line access.
Yes
In 0905, assign
Trunk to Trunk
Line Group.
Do you need to restrict
certain extensions from
placing calls on certain
trunks?
Build an outgoing
restriction matrix.
Yes
No
In 0912, assign
extensions to Access
Maps.
Should extension users
have one-button access to
Trunk Line Group?
In 0402 Item 1,
enter 2 for incoming
incoming
At extension, operation
mode of the Trunk Line
Group (Loop) keys outgoing,
incoming or both?
In 0911 for each Access
Map, select the access
options for each trunk.
In 1006, assign Line
Group Access (loop) keys
(1012 + group number).
both
In 0402 Item 1,
enter 0 for both.
outgoing
In 0402 Item 1,
enter 1 for outgoing.
Do you change the Service
Code for Line Group Access?
Stop
¾ 503 ¾
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
Trunk Line Group (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0402 - System Options, Part B, Item 1: Line group access key operation mode
Set the operating mode of the extension's Trunk Line group keys
(Incoming and Outgoing Access = 0, Outgoing = 1, Incoming = 2).
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A, Item 28: Line group access
Assign a service code for line group access.
> 0905 - Trunk Line Group
Assign Trunk Lines to Trunk Line Group (1-16).
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
Assign Trunk Lines to access maps (1-16).
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign access maps (1-16) to extensions.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Trunk Line group access (code 1012).
Related Features
Trunk Outgoing Call
Instead of using Trunk Line Group, an extension user can place a Trunk Line call by:
- Pressing a line key
- Dialing a Trunk Line access code
- Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing code (9) - refer to the Trunk Line Group Routing
feature
Ring Groups
Trunk Lines ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
¾ 504 ¾
Trunk Line Group (Cont'd)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place a call over a Trunk Line group:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 804(
).
Dial line group number (1-9 or 01-16).
Dial number.
OR
1. Press Trunk Line group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012).
2. Dial number.
To answer an incoming Trunk Line group call:
1. Lift handset.
2. Press flashing Trunk Line group key.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call over a Trunk Line group:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Off hook.
Dial 804(
).
Dial line group number (1-9 or 01-16).
Dial number.
To answer an incoming Trunk Line group call:
1. Off hook.
¾ 505 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call
Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk
calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each
individual's needs. A user can place a call by:
l Pressing a line key
l Dialing a Specified Trunk Line Access Service Code
l Pressing a Trunk Group Access key
l Dialing a Trunk Line Group Access Service Code
l Pressing an Outgoing Line Access key
l Dialing a Trunk Line Group Routing Code
l Dialing an Individual Trunk Line Group Routing Code
l Off hook automatic Trunk Line Group Routing access.
Individual Trunk Line Group Routing sets different outbound call routing options for each
extension user that dial Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code for Trunk Line calls.
Individual Trunk Line Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system
programming. If a user dials Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code and all calls in the
first group are busy, the system may route the calls to another group. When you're setting
up your system, Individual Trunk Line Group Routing will help you minimize the expense
of toll calls. For example, if your system has normal Trunk lines, behind PBX lines, DISA
lines, use Individual Trunk Line Group Routing to route calls to the behind PBX lines first.
Route 1
Trunk
line call
Behind PBX
lines
Outgoing lines
Normal
Trunk lines
outgoing and
incoming lines
DISA lines
Usually incoming
lines
Individual Trunk Line Group Routing can be given different Trunk Line Group Routing for
each extension. If your system gives different route of Trunk Line Group Routing for every
extension, each Trunk line will have similar toll.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
¾ 506 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont’d)
Default Setting
- Preselection interval is 5 seconds.
- An extension's Class of Service enables Trunk line calls.
- All Trunk lines allow outgoing calls.
- Trunk 1 is named LINE 001, trunk 2 is named LINE 002, etc.
- All extensions uses Access Map 1, all trunks have incoming access, outgoing access and
access when on Hold.
- All function keys are line keys (key 1 = trunk 1, etc.).
- Off hook automatic Trunk Line Group Routing access is no setting.
- Service Code of Specified Trunk Line Access is dial 805.
- Service Code of Trunk Line Group Access is dial 804.
- Trunk Line Group Routing code is Dial 9.
- Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code is no setting.
- All extension has no route for the Individual Trunk line Group Routing.
Options
None
¾ 507 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 62, enter
0 to enable outgoing
calls.
Should system users be
able to place outgoing
calls on Trunk lines?
No
Yes
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
In 0901 Item 18, enter 0
to allow outgoing calls.
In 0406 Item 62, enter
1 to enable outgoing
calls.
No
Yes
Are outgoing calls allowed
on specific Trunk lines?
In 0901 Item 18, enter 1
to allow outgoing calls.
In 0501, Select 1st and 2nd
digits you want to assign and
Then enter to digits and type
(6: Trunk line access )
In 0510, select tenant you
want to assign and then enter
to Trunk line group routing
code.
Do you need to restrict
certain extensions
from placing calls on
certain trunks?
Build an outgoing
restriction matrix.
Yes
No
In 0912 assign extensions
to Access Maps.
In the default program, extensions
have full access to all trunks.
In 0901 Item 11, enter
0 to disable dial
tone detection.
No
Do you want system
to detect dial tone for
manually dialed calls
on Trunk line?
Continued
on next
page.
¾ 508 ¾
In 0911 for each Access
Map, select the access
options for each trunk.
Yes
0901 Item 11, enter
1 to enable dial
tone detection.
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If a user preselects a line,
does it remember the system
that preselected it for an
adequate time?
No
In 0405 Item 15, enter
the preselection interval.
Yes
In 1006, do not assign
function keys as line keys
(codes 0001-0052).
No
Should extension users have
one-button placing of
outside calls?
Yes
In 1006, assign functions
keys as line keys
(codes 0001-0052).
In 1006, do not assign
Trunk Group Access or
trunk group keys
No
Should extension users have
one-button access to Trunk
line groups for placing calls?
Yes
In 0905, assign Trunk
to Trunk Line Group.
In 0906, assign extension
to Trunk Line
Group Rout.
In 1006, assign Outside
Line Access keys
(code 1011) and/or Line
Group Access (loop) keys
(1012 + group number).
Stop
¾ 509 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 0405 - System Timers, Item 15: Pre-selection time
Set the pre-selection interval (0-64800 seconds). When a keyset user preselects a line
key, the system remembers the pre-selection for this interval.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 62: Trunk Line outgoing
In an extension's Class of Service, enables Trunk Line calling.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 28: Trunk line group access
Assign a Service Code for Trunk line group access.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A Item 67: Specified Trunk line access
Assign a Service Code for specified Trunk line access.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A
Item 11: DTD after line seize in manual dial mode
Enable (1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for manually dialed Trunk line calls.
> 0901 - Basic Trunk Line Port Setup, Part A Item 18: Outgoing
For each Trunk Line, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls.
> 0903 - Trunk Line Names
To make identifying calls easier, assign a name to each Trunk Line.
> 0905 - Trunk Line Group
Assign Trunk line to Trunk Line Group and set the priority assignment.
> 0906 - Trunk Line Group Routing (Dial 9)
Set up an outbound routing table (1-36) for Trunk Line Group assigned in Program
0905.
> 0907 - Trunk Line Group Routing for Extension
Assign the routes set in Program 0906 to extensions.
> 0911 - Trunk Line Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-16). This sets the access options for Trunk lines.
> 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Line Access Maps (1-16) to extensions.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
¾ 510 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing Trunk Line calls: Line keys
(code 0001-0052), Trunk Line Group Access (code 1011) and Trunk Line Group (code
1012).
> 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Auto Trunk line Seize
For each extension, enabled (1) or disabled (0) Automatic Trunk Line Group Seize.
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display/Call Timer
If the Trunk Line name seize display is enabled in programming (Program 0406: item 37
= 1), Call Timer starts automatically after the user places a Trunk Line call. Disabling
the Trunk Line name seize display (Program 0406: Item 37 = 0) also disables the Call
Timer.
Automatic Handsfree (One-touch line key access)
With Automatic Handsfree (One-touch) (Program 0401: Item 6 = 1), an extension user
can press a line key to place a Trunk Line call without first lifting the handset or
pressing SPK. Users without Automatic Handsfree (Pre-selection) (Program 0401:
Item6= 0) can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPK.
Programmable Function Key
Line keys and Trunk line group keys simplify placing outside calls.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place a call over a specific Trunk Line:
1. Press idle line key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 0001 to 0052).
2. Dial telephone number.
OR
1. Press idle CL key and dial 805(
).
2. Dial line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3. Dial telephone number.
¾ 511 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Key Telephone> (Cont'd)
To place a call over a Trunk Line group:
1. Press Trunk Line group key
(PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + 1-9 or 01-16).
2. Dial telephone number.
OR
1. Press idle CL key and dial 804(
).
2. Dial line group number (1-9 or 01-16).
3. Dial telephone number.
To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing:
1. Press idle CL key and dial 9(
) [Trunk Line Group Routing Code].
2. Dial telephone number.
OR
1. Press Outgoing Line Access key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 101l).
2. Dial telephone number.
To place a call using Off Hook Automatic Trunk Line Group Routing:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial telephone number.
To place a call using Individual Trunk Line Group Routing
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial Individual Trunk Line Group Routing code.
3. Dial telephone number.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place a call over a specific Trunk Line:
1. Off hook and dial 805(
).
2. Dial line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3. Dial telephone number.
To place a call over a Trunk Line group:
1. Off hook and dial 804(
).
2. Dial line group number (1-9 or 01-16)
3. Dial telephone number.
¾ 512 ¾
Trunk Outgoing Call (Cont'd)
Operation (Cont'd)
<Single Line Telephone> (Cont’d)
To place a call using Trunk Line Group Routing:
1. Off hook and dial 9(
) [Trunk Line Group Routing Code].
2. Dial telephone number.
To place a call using Off Hook Automatic Trunk Line Group Routing:
(When this feature setting, this telephone can not used normal intercom call and another
features.)
1. Off hook.
2. Dial telephone number.
¾ 513 ¾
Trunk Port Disable
Description
Trunk Port Disable lets a user disables for each trunk all extension user place outgoing
trunk calls. For example, when a trunk have trouble, a trunk caller place trouble trunk by
Trunk Line Group Access or Trunk Line Group Routing. At this time, Trunk Port Disable
setting to trouble trunk, a user can be place non-trouble trunk by automatic avoiding for
trouble trunk.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone and single line telephone.
Default Setting
- Service Code for Trunk Port Disable is dial 745.
- An extension's Class of Service does not permit it to be used Trunk Port Disable.
Options
None
Programming
> 0406 - Class of Service Options, Item 122: Dial Block
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Trunk Port Disable.
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 35: Trunk Port Disable
Assign a service code for trunk port disable.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a class of service (1-10) to an extension.
Related Features
None
¾ 514 ¾
Trunk Port Disable (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0406 Item 122,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Trunk Port Disable?
Yes
In 0406 Item 122,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Do you change the
Service Code for
Trunk Port Disable?
No
Stop
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To set the Trunk Port Disable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 745(
).
Dial disabling trunk port number (01-52).
Dial 1.
To release the Trunk Port Disable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press idle CL key.
Dial 745(
).
Dial disabled trunk port number (01-52).
Dial 0.
¾ 515 ¾
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System numbering
feature.
Unsupervised Conference
Description
Unsupervised Conference (Trunk to Trunk) allows an extension user to establish the special
conference for two outside parties without any extension user. There are 3 types of
operation in dX-Z Series. For the feature availability, refer to the following table.
- Operation 1 (OP1) : Automatic On-Hook Transfer
- Operation 2 (OP2) : use “TRFR” key
- Operation 3 (OP3) : from Conference mode
Note : For the details of each operation, refer to the “Operation” part.
< Important Notice for Analogue to Analogue Conference>
If “busy tone detection” is not programmed for “Analogue to Analogue”, then the
extension user who made “Unsupervised Conference” should check the line condition by
joining to the conference time by time. (For the operation, refer to “Operation” part.)
However, if “busy tone detection” is programmed, then the above operation is not
necessary. (Refer to command 0921-Item10)
< Important Notice for Program Setting>
In order to provide “Unsupervised Conference” feature on Analogue trunk, command
0901-Item31 must be set to “1” for the trunk.
(Case 1)
<Incoming & Incoming>
1st Line
Incoming Line
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue
E&M
E&M
E&M
ISDN
ISDN
ISDN
2nd Line
Incoming Line
OP 1
OP2
OP3
SLT
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Note 1 : “Conference” feature is not available on the above condition.
Note 2 : SLT user can not answer to 2nd Line while talking with 1st Line.
¾ 516 ¾
Unsupervised Conference (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
(Case 2)
<Incoming & Outgoing>
1st Line
Incoming Line
2nd Line
Outgoing Line
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue
E&M
E&M
E&M
ISDN
ISDN
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
OP 1
OP2
OP3
SLT
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Case 3) <Outgoing & Incoming>
1st Line
Outgoing Line
2nd Line
Incoming Line
OP 1
OP2
OP3
SLT
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue
E&M
E&M
E&M
ISDN
ISDN
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Note 1 : “Conference” feature is not available on the above condition.
Note 2 : SLT user can not answer to 2nd Line while talking with 1st Line.
¾ 517 ¾
Unsupervised Conference (Cont’d)
(Case 4) <Outgoing & Outgoing>
1st Line
Outgoing Line
2nd Line
Outgoing Line
OP 1
OP2
OP3
SLT
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue
E&M
E&M
E&M
ISDN
ISDN
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
Analogue
E&M
ISDN
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Condition
- This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone.
Default Setting
- “Automatic On-Hook Transfer” feature is provided for Key Telephone.
Option (Required Items)
None
Programming
> 0116 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup: (Item19 - Item32 for Tone type2)
If 0921-Item10 is set to 0 (for BT detection ON), then enter appropriate data of your
exchange busy tone.
> 0406 : Class of Service Options Item 16 : Conference
In extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “Conference”.
> 0406 : Class of Service Options Item 76 : Automatic on-hook transfer
In extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) for the “Automatic On-Hook
Transfer”.
> 0901 : Basic Exchange Line Port Setup, Part A Item 31 : Line Loop Detection
In case of Analogue exchange line is used for this feature, data “1” should be set.
> 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup, Part B : Item10 Busy Tone Detection
Enable (0) or disable (1) for busy tone detection for cutting off the paths
¾ 518 ¾
Unsupervised Conference (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In Program
0901 Item 31,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 76,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 16,
enter 0.
No
No
No
Should analogue line be
Yes
available for Unsupervised
conference function?
In Program
0901 Item 31,
enter 1.
Should extensions be able
Yes
to use automatic on hook
transfer (operation1) ?
In Program
0406 Item 76,
enter 1.
Should extensions be able
Yes
to use a conference
transfer (operation3) ?
In Program
0406 Item 16,
enter 1.
In Program 1005, assign
a Class of Service to an
extension.
Stop
¾ 519 ¾
Unsupervised Conference (Cont’d)
Related Features
Conference
Conference should be activated in case that “Operation 3(OP3)” (from Conference mode)
is used.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
Operation 1 : Automatic On-Hook Transfer
1. Conversation with 1st Line.
2. Put 1st Line on hold.
3. Seize 2nd Line. (answer to 2nd Line or place outgoing call)
4. Conversation with 2nd Line.
5. Go on-hook.
1st and 2nd Lines shall be connected. BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in red.
Operation 2 : use “TRFR” key
1. Conversation with 1st Line.
2. Put 1st Line on hold.
3. Seize 2nd Line. (answer to 2nd Line or place outgoing call)
4. Conversation with 2nd Line.
5. Press “TRFR”.
1st and 2nd Lines shall be connected. BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in red.
6. Go on-hook.
Note : If Command 0402, Item 2 is set to “2”, the above operation is not activated.
Operation 3 : from Conference mode
1. Conversation with 1st and 2nd Line. (3-party Conference)
2. Press “TRFR”.
1st and 2nd Lines shall be connected. BLF Lamp of both Line keys lights in green.
3. Go on-hook.
¾ 520 ¾
Unsupervised Conference (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
<Key Telephone> (Cont’d)
To release the Unsupervised Conference in case of Analogue to Analogue
Conference (only in case of “Busy Tone Detection” is not programmed)
1. Press one of the Line key which lights in green.
2. Listen the talk status. (still making conversation or already finished)
3. If both Lines are making conversation, press “TRFR” to go on-hook. (Unsupervised
Conference shall be continued.)
OR
3. If both Lines are already finished conversation (Busy Tone is heard), then go on-hook to
finish the Unsupervised Conference mode.
<Single Line Telephone>
1. Conversation with 1st Line.
2. Tap hook switch for hold 1st Line.
3. Seize 2nd Line then place outgoing call.
4. Conversation with 2nd Line.
5. Go on-hook. ® 1st and 2nd Lines shall be connected.
¾ 521 ¾
VAU Fixed Message (VAU)
Description
VAU Fixed Message gives extension users to listen the Operation Guidance in English. For
Example, "The number you have dialed is not in service", "Vacant number", "All lines are
busy, for callback dial XXXX", and etc. (XXXX is service code for Camp an/Call back
feature.)
Conditions
This feature is available for key telephone, single line telephone and DUD/DISA caller.
Default Setting
- VAU fixed message is provided (if VAU installation is acknowledged)
Options
DX2E-VAU-A
DX2E-VAU-B (optional)
Programming
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 31: VAU fixed message
Set the use (0) or not use (1) VAU fixed message for VAU features.
When you set to not use (1), you can not use VAU fixed Message features.
Related Features
None
Operation
None
¾ 522 ¾
Virtual Extension
Description
Virtual Extension lets a keyset have more than one extension number. Calls can route to the
keyset's installed number or to the keyset's Virtual Extension key. This helps users identify
incoming calls.
There are two examples for easy reference.
An extension installed at 204 (Sales) could have a virtual extension for 460 (Service) on the
one of function key. Calls to 204 ring the extension normally. Calls to 460 ring the Virtual
Extension key. This lets the user at extension 204 differentiate Sales calls from Service
calls.
Extensions 205, 206 and 207 in Account group could have virtual extension number 470 on
the one of function key on the each keyset. Calls to 205, 206 and 207 ring to each extension
individually. Calls to 470 ring the Virtual Extension key on the three keysets
simultaneously. It seems to be main (pilot) number 470 for Account group.
Conditions
(A) More than one extension can share the same Virtual Extension Number.
(B) An extension can have more than one Virtual Extension Number
(limited only by the number of available function keys).
Default Setting
- No virtual extensions assigned (i.e., virtual extensions do not have extension numbers or
names).
- Virtual Extension keys not assigned.
Options
None
Programming
> 0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extensions (ports 73-96).
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Virtual Extension (code 1036 + extension number).
> 1016 - Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Set ringing for an extension's Virtual Extension keys.
> 1018 - Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Set ring tone for an extension's Virtual Extension.
> 1019 - Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Set ringing for an extension's Virtual Extension keys.
¾ 523 ¾
Virtual Extension (Cont'd)
Programming (Cont'd)
Start
In 0502, assign unused
extension numbers (e.g.,
500) to virtual extension
ports 73-96.
In 1006, do not
assign a function key
for Virtual Extension
(code 1036).
In 1016, select the
Virtual Extension
key and enter 0.
No
No
Should extension
have function key
appearance for
Virtual Extension key?
Should Virtual
Extension key ring?
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign function key
for Virtual Extension
(code 1036 + virtual port’s
extension number assigned
in 0502.
In 1016, select the
Virtual Extension
key and enter 1.
In 1018, select the
tone pattern for the
extension port.
In 0111, refer to the
tone pattern
configuration.
In 1019, select the
order of the tone
pattern.
Stop
¾ 524 ¾
Virtual Extension (Cont'd)
Related Features
Class of Service
Class of Service options apply to Virtual Extension Appearances.
Department Calling
Virtual Extension Appearances can be in Department Calling Groups.
Group Call Pickup
Virtual Extension Appearances can be in Call Pickup Groups.
Toll Restriction
The system restricts calls made from Virtual Extension Appearance keys.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To answer a call ringing a Virtual Extension number:
1. Lift handset.
2. Press flashing Virtual Extension key.
To place a call to a Virtual Extension Number:
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial Virtual Extension number.
<Single Line Telephone>
To answer a call ringing a Virtual Extension number:
This feature only available for key telephone.
To place a call to a Virtual Extension Number:
1. Off hook.
2. Dial Virtual Extension number.
¾ 525 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type)
Description
The system provides the connectivity of proprietary voice mail. In the first release, box type
of voice mail called DX2E-VM-A/C had been offered. The unit shall be connected to a
digital station port. (However, the production had been discontinued already.)
In the 2nd release, slot type of voice mail called DX2E-PVMU-S1 has been offered. The
unit shall be inserted into the main equipment
For the functions and operation procedures of previous box-type DX2E-VM-A/C, refer to
HOW TO USE VOICE MAIL BOX (Concise User Guide).
Following functions are added on the DX2E-PVMU-S1 newly:
- Maximum Recording Capacity Selection
The maximum recording capacity can be selected (15 hours or 30 hours) by programming.
It shall be defined depend on the ADPCM type for Hard Disk.
- Automatic Erasing for Left Message
The left messages can automatically be erased in accordance with programming. This
programming can be set for Day base.
- Recording Restriction
Nobody can leave a message to the assigned Mail Box. This feature can be set / canceled by
each extension user.
- Left Messages Displaying (only Large Display Key Telephone user)
The Large Display Key Telephone user can select whether left messages are displayed /
replayed from old message or new message.
- Skip (only Large Display Key Telephone user)
During replaying the left message, the Large Display Key Telephone user can skip it by
pressing “SKIP” key. And also, “BACK SKIP” key is provided. The Skip Duration Time
can be set at each Large Display Key Telephone. (8 / 16 / 24 / 32 / 40 seconds)
- Escape from Voice Mail Box
In case the outside caller entered to the Voice Mail Box Service through DUD / DISA, DIL
or DDI, the outside caller can escape from VMB Service to DUD mode by dialing the
Service Code (50#).
This function is available in case :- the outside caller entered to the Voice Mail Service by dialing VMB extension No.
- the outside caller is recording the message on Automated Attendant for the System mode.
- the outside caller is recording the message on Automated Attendant for the Extension
mode.
After escaping to DUD mode, the outside caller should operate in accordance with usual
DUD feature. The Talkie (Answering Machine, VAU, etc...) is also work same like usual
DUD feature.
¾ 526 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Description (Cont’d)
- Escape from Voice Mail Box (Cont’d)
In case the outside caller entered to the VMB Service through E&M Tie Line and dials the
Service Code (50#) to escape from VMB, the outside caller can return to the “Extension
Dialing Mode” instead of DUD mode.
In Addition, in case the outside caller entered to the VMB Service through DDI Line, then
another Service Code (51#) can be used to escape from VMB, and shall be transferred to
specified destination in accordance with DDI Transfer function.
The details of Specification for Slot-type Voice Mail are as below:- Maximum Recording Capacity
- Voice Channel
- Maximum Number of Mail Box
- Maximum Number of Message
: 15 hours (32K bps)
30 hours (16K bps)
: 4 channels
: 300
: 4000
Note 1 : The maximum recording time can be set (32K bps or 16K bps) by Programming.
Note 2 : Card Type Voice Mail can not be installed together with previous Voice Mail Box. (DX2E-VMA / C)
Conditions
Key Telephone, Single Line Telephone and Outside Caller
Default Setting
- Voice Mail is not defined
(after Voice Mail definition)
- ADPCM type is 32K bps (15 hours)
- Maintenance Time is not set
- Automatic Message Erasing is not set
Option
DX2E-PVMU-S1
¾ 527 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Programming
(Following 3 programs have to be entered for Voice Mail.)
> 0509 - Voice Mail Group Pilot Number
Assign the access number for Voice Mail.
> 1407 - Mail Box Setup
Setup mail box number and password for each extension use.
> 1409 - Setting Master / Slave Voice Mail
Assign Master and Slave Voice Mail. In case of Slot-type VM, “the slot No. + 1000” (e.g.
slot 4 : 1004) shall be entered instead of the extension port..
(Following 3 programs are related to the optional functions on Slot-type voice mail)
> 1417 - Maintenance Time Setting for PVMU
Assign the Time (Hour : Minutes) for VM maintenance. When this time comes, VM shall
stop about 1 minute and the system shall check the contents of Hard Disk. If Automatic
Erasing is activated in Command 1419, the applicable messages shall automatically be
erased at this time.
> 1418 - ADPCM Selection (Maximum Recording Time)
Assign the ADPCM type (0: 32K bps, 1: 16K bps). This assignment shall relate to the
maximum recording time.
> 1419 - Automatic Message Erasing Setup
Assign the length of days for automatic erasing. After the assigned day(s) have been
passed, all left messages shall automatically be erased. For this activation, Command 1417
has to be set to “1: Service On”.
(Following programs are to be used for the optional setting of VM)
> 1403 - Voice Mail Options
> 1404 - Message Recording (Leave Message) Setup
> 1405 - Call Information (Mail Forward Service) Setup
> 1406 - Voice Mail System Password Setup
> 1408 - Voice Mail Feature Data Initialize
> 1410 - Delayed Automated Attendant Setup
> 1411 - Incoming Call Mode Setup (Voice Mail)
> 1413 - Voice Mail Multiple Address Abbreviated Code Setup
> 1414 - Voice Mail Multiple Address Abbreviated Name Setup
¾ 528 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 1409, enter the
port number.
Box-type
Which type of
Voice Mail is
installed?
Slot-type
In 1409, enter 10xx.
(xx: slot number)
In 0509, assign the
pilot number to access
to the voice mail.
In 1407, setup the
voice mail box and
password or each
extension.
Is Slot-type
Voice Mail used?
Yes
R
e
s
et
No
Stop
* For the optional settings, refer to program manual.
¾ 529 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Operation
<Note> Hereafter, the functions described are only available by using of slot-type voice
mail. Basic functionality are referred to HOW TO USE VOICE MAIL BOX (Concise
User Guide)
To set / cancel the Recording Restriction :
<Key Telephone & Single Line Telephone>
1. Access to the Voice Mail Service.
2. Dial 66# to set / cancel.
3. Hang up.
<Large Display Key Telephone>
VOICE SRV
REPLAY
EXT 200
MSG REC
MEMO REC
1. Access to the Voice Mail Service.
(Press Mail Box and dial Password.)
2. Press “SET” key.
ATTEN MSG
INCOM INF
SET
END
3. Press “RESTRICT” key.
VOICE SRV
EXT 200
RESTRICT
REPLAY
[Ô]
VOICE SRV
EXT 200
4. Press “SET” or “CANCEL” key.
(Confirmation Message shall be displayed.)
SET
CANCEL
[Ô]
¾ 530 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
To set displaying order:
VOICE SRV
REPLAY
EXT 200
MSG REC
MEMO REC
1. Access to the Voice Mail Service.
(Press Mail Box and dial Password.)
2. Press “SET” key.
ATTEN MSG
INCOM INF
SET
END
3. Press “REPLAY” key.
VOICE SRV
EXT 200
RESTRICT
REPLAY
[Ô]
VOICE SRV
PLAY MODE
FIRST MESSAGE
LAST MSG
FIRST MSG
SKIP TIME
4. Press “FIRST MSG” or “LAST MSG” key.
(Confirmation Message shall be displayed.)
[Ô]
¾ 531 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
To set the SKIP Time:
VOICE SRV
REPLAY
EXT 200
MSG REC
MEMO REC
1. Access to the Voice Mail Service.
(Press Mail Box and dial Password.)
2. Press “SET” key.
ATTEN MSG
INCOM INF
SET
END
VOICE SRV
3. Press “REPLAY” key.
EXT 200
RESTRICT
REPLAY
[Ô]
VOICE SRV
PLAY MODE
FIRST MSG
LAST MSG
4. Press “SKIP TIME” key.
FIRST MSG
SKIP TIME
[Ô]
VOICE SRV
MSG SKIP TIME
8 sec
16 sec
24 sec
32 sec
40 sec
8 sec
5. Press the desired time.
(Confirmation Message shall be displayed.)
[Ô]
¾ 532 ¾
Voice Mail Box (Box-type / Slot-type) (Cont’d)
Operation (Cont’d)
To use the Skip during replaying the left message:
(During replaying the left message)
1. Press “SKIP” or “BACK SKIP” key.
VOICE SRV
REPEAT
EXT 200
COPY
REPLAY
ERASE
SKIP
BACK SKIP
[Ô]
To escape from VMB Service:
1. Enter to the VMB Service from outside.
2. Dial “50#” during recording mode or Service Code entering mode.
(Unique Dial Tone or Greeting Message shall be heard.)
3. Follow DUD operation.
If outside caller comes through DDI Line :
1. Enter to the VMB Service from outside.
2. Dial “51#” during recording mode or Service Code entering mode.
3. The call shall be forwarded to specified destination according to the system setting of
DDI Transfer.
¾ 533 ¾
Voice Over
Description
When a user makes intercom to an extension busy on a call, he/she can perform Voice Over
indicating he/she has something to talk to. This is one of “Override” functionality that is not
cut in to the established conversation on the handset, but to send his/her voice to the
speaker of keyphone.
<Note> By the same operation procedure, but it may send the ring to the speaker of
keyphone. This is because CDHF-A is not installed in the keyphone at the called
side. The functionality is described as “Intercom Off-hook Signaling” in this issue.
The system provides the following “Voice Over” options:
l Called Extension Block
The called extension's Class of Service may block incoming Voice Over attempts. This
is beneficial to users that don't want to have interruptions while on a call.
l
Automatic Voice Over
Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Voice Over. This option is set in the
calling extension's Class of Service.
l
Manual Voice Over
When the above option is not set, then system provides this option. In case of reaching
to a busy extension, the caller can dial service code or press function key to perform
Voice Over to the called keyphone manually.
l
Prefer Off-hook Signaling at the keyphone with CDHF-A
If the keyphone (with CDHF-A) user sets this mode by service code, called mode shall
be changed to Off-hook Signaling, not Voice Over.
Conditions
The Voice Over call is available for key telephone and single line telephone.
The called keyphone has to be installed CDHF-A inside.
<Note> If your keyphone is 1st generation type , then the Voice Over function can be
performed without any option except following types:DX2E-16T-LC2 TEL, DX2E-16TXH-LC2 TEL
Default Setting
- An extension's COS allows it to receive Voice Over.
- An extension's COS prevents it from automatically sending Voice Over.
- Service code for Voice Over is dial 809.
- Service code for setting of forced Voice Over is dial 892.
- Service code for setting of forced Off-hook Signaling is dial 893.
- One digit service code for Voice Over is no setting.
¾ 534 ¾
Voice Over (Cont’d)
Programming
An extension user can dial
Service Code 892 to change
the mode to Voice Over.
In Program 0401 Item
11, enter 1.
Set Program 0406
Item 5 to 0.
Set Program 0406
Item 6 to 0.
Start
Ring
No
Manually
Should Override ring
or voice over?
Should extension be
able to receive
Voice Over?
Should extension do
Voice Over manually
or automatically?
An extension user can dial
Service Code 893 to change
the mode to Ring.
Voice
Over
In Program 0401 Item
11, enter 0.
Yes
Set Program 0406
Item 5 to 1.
Automatically
Set Program 0406
Item 6 to 1.
In 1005, assign a
Class of Service to
an extension.
Should extension have
one-button operation for
Voice Over?
Yes
In Program 1006, assign a
function key for Override
(code 1018).
No
Do you change the
Service Code for
Voice Over?
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature.
No
Do you use One Digit
Service Code for
Voice Over?
No
Stop
¾ 535 ¾
Yes
In Program 0512 Service
No. 4, assign One
Digit Service Code for
Voice Over.
Voice Over (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
> 0401 - System Options, Part A, Item 11: Called mode setting for override.
Enter 1 to have off-hook signal ring at the called busy extension.
Enter 0 to have Voice Over to the called busy extension. An extension user can override
these settings by dialing Service Code 892 (for voice over) or 893 (for off-hook signal).
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 5: Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to
automatically send override call.
> 0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to
automatically send override call to an extension busy on a handset call.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Item 15: Override
Assign a service code for Override.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 83: Setting of signal called for override
Assign a service code for setting of signal called override.
> 0511 - Service Code Setup, Part A
Item 82: Setting of Voice Over called for override
Assign a service code for setting of voice-announce called for override.
> 0512 - One Digit Service Code Setup, Service No. 4: Override
Assign one digit service code for override.
> 1005 - Class of Service for Extension
Assign a Class of Service (1-10) to an extension.
> 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for override (code 1018).
Options
DX2E-CDHF-A
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Override has
already gone through.
Handsfree (Speaker & Microphone)
You cannot send override to an extension busy on a Handsfree (Speakerphone) call.
The called extension's idle CL key flashes fast, with no ringing.
¾ 536 ¾
Voice Over (Cont’d)
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place Voice Over to an extension busy on a handset call:
2. Call to busy keyphone.
You hear busy tone
2. Dial 809(
).
OR
Press Override key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1018).
OR
Dial one digit service code for override(
).
You hear ring-back tone
To change your call to signal, dial 1.
To set Off-hook Signaling mode at your extension (with CDHF-A):
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 893(
).to set.
To set Voice Over mode at your extension (with CDHF-A):
1. Press idle CL key.
2. Dial 892(
).to set.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place Voice Over to an extension busy on a handset call:
1. Call to busy keyphone.
You hear busy tone.
2. Dial 809(
).
OR
Dial one digit service code for override(
).
You hear ring-back tone. Dial 1 to change the mode to signal.
To set Off-hook Signaling mode at your extension:
To set Voice Over mode at your extension:
These features are only available for key telephone.
¾ 537 ¾
Volume Control
Description
The volume buttons (s, t) are provided on each keyphone to adjust the volume level for
incoming Ring, Background Music, Paging announcements, Handsfree and the handset.
With Volume Controls, each keyphone user can individually set volumes to their most
comfortable level.
The user can adjust their controls while on a call or when the phone is idle.
<Note> For the 1st generation type of keyphones (except LC2 type), the slide switch had been
provided at the left side of the phone. In the case, incoming ring volume shall be adjusted
by the switch.
Conditions
This feature available for key telephone.
Default Setting
None
Options
None
Programming
None
Related Features
None
Operation
To adjust the volume of incoming Ring, Background Music, Paging
announcements, Handsfree and the handset:
1. Press VOL s or VOL t.
You can press the volume keys while on a call or when your phone is idle.
¾ 538 ¾
Walking Toll Restriction
Description
Walking Toll Restriction lets you temporally permit to make outgoing call which is
originally restricted at the extension, by entering your password. Each password carries
own toll restriction class. Once the system permits you to make outgoing call, continuous
attempt is not accepted after terminate the first call, unless entering the password again.
Condition
- This feature is available for Key Telephone and Single Line Telephone.
Default Setting
- Maximum 50 passwords can be stored to the memory.
- All passwords are not defined.
- All passwords are 6 digits fixed.
- All Toll Restriction Classes of password table are “Class 8”.
- Service Code of Walking Toll Restriction is dial 763.
Options
None
¾ 539 ¾
Walking Toll Restriction (Cont’d)
Programming
Start
Complete Toll
Restriction Programs.
No
Do you complete to set
Toll Restriction programs?
(Program 0701/0702)
Yes
In Program 0203, assign
the passwords and its
restriction class.
In Program 0404
Item 6 - No.11, enter 0.
No
When Walking Toll
Restriction is used, is this
information printed on
SMDR?
Do you change the
Service Code for Walking
Toll Restriction?
Yes
In Program 0404
Item 6 - No.11, enter 1.
Yes
Refer to Flexible
System Numbering
feature..
No
Stop
> 0203 - Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Assign the table No., Password (6 digits) and its restriction class which is defined in the
Toll Restriction programs. (command 0701, 0702)
> 0404 - SMDR Options Item 6 - 11 : Walking Toll Restriction Table No.
Assign the output condition for printer / PC. If the data is set to “1” (output), the symbol
of call will be printed as “POTW”, and password table No. will be printed as “
W/@@@” (@@@ : 3 digits table No.) at the Account Code area. (Refer to the
following appendix.)
> 0514 - Service Code Setup, Part B Item 53 : Walking Toll Restriction
Assign a service code for Walking Toll Restriction.
¾ 540 ¾
Walking Toll Restriction (Cont’d)
Related Features
Toll Restriction
Before use the Walking Toll Restriction feature, Toll Restriction programming should be
assigned.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
In case that an extension is used by other user who entered Walking Toll Restriction
password, the outgoing information can be output to printer / PC.
Operation
<Key Telephone>
To place outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction
1. Lift handset or press idle CL key.
2. Dial 763 (
).
3. Dial Password. (6digits fixed)
If the dialed password is correct, dial tone shall be heard. If the dialed password is
incorrect, warning tone shall be heard.
4. Seize an idle Trunk Line.
5. Dial Telephone Number.
<Single Line Telephone>
To place outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 763 (
).
3. Dial Password. (6digits fixed)
If the dialed password is correct, dial tone shall be heard. If the dialed password is
incorrect, warning tone shall be heard.
4. Seize an idle Trunk Line.
5. Dial Telephone Number.
¾ 541 ¾
Walking Toll Restriction (Cont’d)
(Reference)
Printout Format for Walking Toll Restriction on SMDR
(example 1)
When any user places outgoing call by using Walking Toll Restriction, the call shall be
printed to SMDR as follows ;
CLASS
01 POTW
TIME
LINE
10:10 LINE 001
DURATION STATION
00:01:10
200
DIALED No./CLI
0448137101
RD/COST
0
ACCOUNT
W/001
(example 2)
When outgoing call is restricted even through Walking Toll Restriction is performed,
the call shall be printed to SMDR as follows ;
CLASS
01
BRD
TIME
LINE
10:10 LINE 001
DURATION STATION
00:00:00
200
DIALED No./CLI
009714816958
¾ 542 ¾
RD/COST
ACCOUNT
0
W/001
Manufacturer:
Nitsuko Corporation
2-6-1 KITAMIKATA, TAKATSU-KU, KAWASAKI 213-8511 JAPAN
TEL: +81-44-813-7104 FAX: +81-44-813-7300
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement